JP7036184B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-261415

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably performing display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing display control.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes a display means having a display unit and a display means.
A display storage means that stores image data in advance,
A display control means for displaying an image on the display unit using image data stored in the display storage means, and a display control means.
Equipped with
The special moving image data in which one type of image data is created by executing the decoding process is stored in the display storage means.
The gaming machine includes a reading storage means for storing the one type of image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data.
The display control means uses the one type of image data stored in the read storage means as texture data to display an image on the display unit.
The special moving image data includes reference data that serves as a reference when the image data is created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data, and the reference when the decoding process is executed. It is characterized by not including the difference data for providing the difference to the data .

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform display control.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a big hit generation lottery and the like. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process which is executed in the sound light side MPU. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a notice lottery table, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a reach lottery table, and (c) explaining a configuration of a sound / light side RAM. It is an explanatory diagram for this. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control pattern table. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the symbol is oscillatedly displayed in the symbol display device, and (b) it is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the symbol is definitely displayed in the symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a), (b) various parts tables. (A1)-(a3), (b1)-(b3) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the fluctuation display time defined by the parts table. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process which is executed in the sound light side MPU. (A)-(e2) It is a time chart which shows the state which the production for a game round is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing which is executed by the display CPU. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the drawing list. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process which is executed by VDP. It is a time chart which shows an example of the variation display mode of a symbol (a)-(f). (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of a memory module, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for demonstrating the configuration of a work RAM. (A) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table for the acceleration period, and (b) is the explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table for the first high-speed period. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution target table for the 1st low speed period. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the value set in the 1st adjustment counter and the 3rd adjustment counter, and the type of a symbol, and (b) with the value set in the 2nd adjustment counter. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship with the kind of a symbol. (A) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table for the acceleration period, and (b) is the explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table for the first high-speed period. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution target table for the 1st low speed period. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic process for normal fluctuation executed by the display CPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a loop display effect. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows the flow of a loop display effect. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of a memory module, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for demonstrating the configuration of a work RAM. It is explanatory drawing for explaining (a) the character staying table, (b) explanatory drawing for explaining the character moving table, and (c) explanatory drawing for explaining the background table. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for a character loop executed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the background loop executed by the display CPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the group display effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating moving image data for group display. (A1) to (a3) are time charts showing the relationship between the image update cycle and the cycle in which still image data can be used, and (b) and (c) are drawn in the frame area to be drawn in the same decoded image data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how to make a different range. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic process for group display effect executed by the display CPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the decoding process which is executed by a moving image decoder, and (b) is is a flowchart which shows the setting process for group display executed by VDP. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the valid period display effect. (A), (b) It is a time chart which shows the comparative example of the valid period display effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of a memory module. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the band display table, and (b) it is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (b) the blinking display table. (A1), (b1), (a2), (b2) is a time chart showing how the validity period display effect is executed using both the band display table and the blinking display table. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic process for the validity period display executed by the display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a number display effect. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure for performing a number display effect. It is a front view of the inner frame which shows the lower area of the inner frame enlarged. It is a flowchart which shows the counting process which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the output setting process of the measurement command executed by the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the measurement command correspondence processing executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for measurement display executed by the display CPU. (A)-(c) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a number display effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the increase display executed by the display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of a memory module. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining an image for a first character, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect image, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining an image for a second character. .. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the range to be drawn is different in the frame area to be drawn in each image data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for pseudo moving things. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a pseudo moving image production is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for pseudo moving image effect executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the round effect executed by the display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating another example of (a)-(c) pseudo moving image production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing which is executed by the display CPU. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the drawing list. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process which is executed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how drawing data is created with execution of drawing processing. (A)-(c) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a time correspondence effect is executed. (A) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of a symbol display device in a normal period, (b) it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of a symbol display device in a preparation period, and (c) it is an explanatory diagram in a special period. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of a symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display device at the time of the start timing of the time correspondence effect in the situation where the effect for game rounds is executed. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows the state that the time correspondence effect is executed in relation to the execution state of the effect for game rounds. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of sound light side ROM, and (b) it is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data table for time correspondence effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of a memory module. It is a flowchart which shows the RTC correspondence processing which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the start of the preparation period executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process during the preparation period executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process during a special period executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating another example of the display content of the symbol display apparatus in the preparation period. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the setting process for the start of the preparation period executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the command correspondence processing executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the setting process during the preparation period executed in the sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete content of (a), (b) separate preservation effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the comparative example of each preservation effect (a)-(c). (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows the state that the preservation effect is performed separately. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete content of (a)-(c) another preservation effect. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during operation valid period executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the operation corresponding production process which is executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the separate storage display executed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing data creation process for separate storage display executed by VDP. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete display content of the angle display effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of a memory module. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a)-(i) various moving image data groups. (A) to (g) are time charts showing how the angle display effect progresses. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the angle display effect executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the opening process which is executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the decoding process which is executed by VDP. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the moving image correspondence table corresponding to A angle, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for demonstrating (b) a switching reference table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the angle display effect executed by VDP. (A) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of a normal moving image data, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of a special moving image data. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows the state that the special moving image use effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic process for the special moving image use effect executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the special moving image use effect executed by VDP.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as to be in a locked state. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

A game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame 13. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. As a guide rail is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism (not shown) attached to the lower part of the game board 24 in the inner frame 13 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail. The game ball launch mechanism performs a game ball launch operation by manually operating the launch operation device 28 provided on the front door frame 14.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the first operating port 33 or a ball enters the second operating port 34, three prize balls are paid out. , When a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. Will be executed.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 may be smaller than that in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out opening 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that has not entered various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, a large number of nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only is the ball discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into a game is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first actuating port 33 and the second actuating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a universal electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the prize in the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the prize can be won in the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and a normal map display of the normal map unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the part 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the winning of the electric service opening, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the general map display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the general electric opening state. In the open state of the normal electric power, the public electric accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

The cathode ray display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix displays. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal drawing unit 38, a normal drawing holding display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 38a. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the normal figure reservation display unit 38b.

A winning lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a. The display area of the special figure display unit 37a is narrower than the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display unit 37a, the pattern is displayed in a variable manner by performing a big hit generation lottery triggered by a prize in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34. Then, as a stop result after the variable display of the pattern is performed, the display corresponding to the result of the big hit occurrence lottery is performed. The special figure display unit 37a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix displays. Further, as the pattern displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed. Is displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure hold display unit 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display unit 37a. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display unit 37b.

About the symbol display device 41 In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the symbol display device 41, when the special symbol display unit 37a displays the variation of the pattern based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the variation of the symbol is displayed accordingly. Will be. That is, when the special figure display unit 37a performs the variable display, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display accordingly. Then, for example, in the game round in which the result of the jackpot generation lottery is the jackpot result, the symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the effective line preset in the symbol display device 41.

The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. 3 (a) to 3 (j) are diagrams showing individual symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41, and FIGS. 4 (a) and 4 (b) are display surfaces of the symbol display device 41. It is a figure which shows P.

As shown in FIGS. 3 (a) to 3 (j), the symbols which are a kind of symbols are 9 kinds of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" and shell-shaped symbols. It is composed of a sub-design consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface P, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 4B, on the display surface P, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become like. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display surface P. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the variation display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols" and even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) are assigned. The main symbol corresponds to a "non-specific symbol". When the 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same combination of specific symbols or the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, when a normal jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result described later, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and then the variation display is completed. An explicit video is displayed.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and may be configured such that only numbers are variablely displayed as the symbol, for example.

Further, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the variation display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display is stopped. Is equivalent to one game.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 2, if a big hit is won in the big hit generation lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, it is possible to win the special electric winning device 32. Shifts to the open / close execution mode. The special electric winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and is provided with an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize when the transition to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which the transition is made when a hit result is obtained. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult for the prize to occur than in the open state. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the display effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 24 having the above configuration. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 43 is fitted therein. The window panel 43 is colorless and transparently formed by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 43. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting unit 44 is provided above the window unit 42. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 45 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 42, an upper bulging portion 46 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 47 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 46a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 47a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 46a.

In the area outside the lower plate 47a of the lower bulging portion 47, an effect operating device 48 including an operating portion manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is manually operated by the player in order to make the effect content on the display surface P or the like of the symbol display device 41 a predetermined effect content.

A main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13. Further, the back pack unit 15 is equipped with a payout mechanism unit including a payout device, a payout control device, and a power supply / emission control device. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 includes a main control board 51 that controls the main control of the game. In the main control device 50, the substrate box accommodating the main control board 51 and the like is provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening is provided. You may do it. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is configured, or an adhesive layer is used as an adhesion target at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can be considered.

The MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51. The MPU 52 is a ROM 53 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 52, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in.

As the ROM 53, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that allows random access when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require an external power supply for storage retention is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. Further, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be mounted as separate chips. It may be installed.

The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power supply / emission control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power supply / launch control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, the operating power is supplied to the main control board 51 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 70 described later.

A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply / emission control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52, so that the MPU 52 executes a process for a power failure. It becomes possible to do.

Further, various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors, detection provided on a one-to-one basis for winning-corresponding ball-winning portions such as a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, and a through gate 35. A sensor is included, and the MPU 52 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 52, a big hit generation lottery and a big hit result type lottery are executed based on the winnings in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, and a reach generation lottery for each game and a lottery for determining the variable display time are executed. do.

Here, a configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 52 will be described.

The MPU 52 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, setting the display of the special figure display unit 37a, setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting the display of the normal figure display unit 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot generation lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type such as the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result, and the like. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 41 deviates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41. It is decided to use the fluctuation type counter CS that determines the fluctuation display time in. Further, it is decided to use the general electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is set to the electric service open state. Each of these counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is provided in the lottery counter buffer 54a.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is a reserved storage area 54b as an acquisition information storage means when a prize is won in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Stored in.

The hold storage area 54b includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and is used in the winning history of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. At the same time, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

In the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE2 → Each numerical information is stored in the order of the third holding area RE3 → the fourth holding area RE4 in chronological order. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be reserved and stored. .. The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to four, and may be any other, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 37a, and at the start of one game round. Is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

More specifically, the hit random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, "1" is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0". In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the hold storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the ROM 53 as a winning / failing table. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode in the jackpot generation lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to add "1" in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value, and then return to "0". The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the hold storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of jackpot results are (1) an mode of opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the jackpot generation lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing differences in the three conditions of the support mode in the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34.

As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high and low. Frequent winning mode and low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 30 sec has elapsed or the winning opening is won. It continues until the number reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings in the large winning opening. Continues until there are six.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 58 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Will be done. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

In addition, the number of times the large winning opening is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, and the opening limit time for one opening and the opening limit number for one opening are in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. However, as long as the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 increases from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of openings and closings than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time limit for one opening is long, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is not substantially won in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode. It is good to say. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening time limit for one opening, while in the low frequency winning mode, one opening is set. The product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number may be set longer than the opening limit time. In addition, even if the firing interval of the game ball and the opening time of one big winning opening are not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, the latter is set to be shorter than the former, so that it is substantially shorter. Therefore, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a prize is not generated in the special electric winning device 32.

As a support mode in the universal accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, when comparing in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the gaming area PA, the normal of the second operating port 34 is used. A low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a is opened per unit time is relatively high or low.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the general electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). ), But in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the general electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric service open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and one more time. The opening time is set long. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric service open state is won and the open state of the general electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured as the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be performed after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than that of the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than that of the first operating port 33. The probability that a prize will be awarded to the mouth 34 increases. Then, when a prize is won in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. It can be carried out.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. In addition, the secured time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (for example, on the general map display unit 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration where multiple types of variable display time to be executed) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation time is easier to select or the average reservation time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. May be. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is shortened (that is,). , Shortening the one-time variable display time in the normal map display unit 38a), shortening the average time of the secured time, and increasing the winning probability, one of the conditions or any combination of conditions shall be applied. Therefore, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 53 as a distribution table. Then, as the distribution destination, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a 15R probability variation jackpot result are set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the jackpot generation lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the normal jackpot state.

The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. be. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the big hit occurrence lottery becomes the big hit state winning and the state shifts to the big hit state. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state.

The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the jackpot generation lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. .. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the big hit occurrence lottery becomes the big hit state winning and the state shifts to the big hit state. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the 15R probability variation jackpot state.

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state means a state in which the jackpot generation lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and "10 to 14" corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. The "15-29" corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result, the mode of the probability variation jackpot result is diversified. That is, when comparing the two types of probability variation jackpot results, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high frequency winning mode in the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest, and the opening / closing execution is executed. In the support mode, which is the low frequency winning mode, the high frequency support mode is used, and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is the lowest. As a result, the monotonousness of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

As a kind of probability change jackpot result, the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the jackpot generation lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. The unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result that will be to be included may be included. In this case, the probabilistic jackpot results will be further diversified.

Furthermore, as a kind of loss result in the big hit occurrence lottery, a special loss result in which the transition to the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode is performed and the transition between the jackpot generation lottery mode and the support mode does not occur after the end is included. May be good. In the configuration where both the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special deviation result are set as described above, the open / close execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. On the other hand, when the transition mode of the jackpot generation lottery mode is different, for example, when either the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or the special deviation result occurs in the normal game state, It is possible to make the player predict which result it actually corresponds to.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order in the range of 0 to 238, reach the maximum value, and then return to "0". The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the hold storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is a game in which the symbol display device 41 capable of displaying the variation of the symbol is provided and the opening / closing execution mode of the special electric winning device 32 is the high frequency winning mode, and the stop display result after the variation display is specially displayed. In the resulting gaming machine, the player is made to think that the special display result is likely to be in the variable display state before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is started. The display state for.

There are two types of expected effects, the above-mentioned reach effect and the advance notice effect for expecting the occurrence of the reach effect and the occurrence of the special display result in the stage before the reach effect occurs.

For the reach effect, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of a high-frequency winning mode is performed by stopping and displaying some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. Includes a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may hold is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface P to perform a reach effect.

Regarding the reach effect, specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of the symbol, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode is placed on the preset effective line in the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may form a combination, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of the symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

Specifically, the display contents of FIG. 4 will be described in detail. Either is valid when the variable display of the symbol is first terminated in the upper symbol row Z1 and then the variable display of the symbol is terminated in the lower symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the fluctuation display of the symbols is performed in the middle symbol column Z2. It becomes a reach production by being told. Then, when the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The variable display of the symbol ends.

For the advance notice effect, after the variable display of the symbol is started on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or in a part of the symbol rows. Therefore, in a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, the background image has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice effect can occur in any of the game times when the reach effect is performed and when the reach effect is not performed, but the case where the reach effect is performed is higher than the case where the reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

The reach effect is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game rounds in which the open / close execution mode is entered. Further, in the game rounds that do not shift to the open / close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53. Will be executed if there is. On the other hand, the determination of whether or not to perform the advance notice effect is not performed by the main control device 50, but by the voice emission control device 60.

The variation type counter CS is configured to, for example, add "1" in order in the range of 0 to 198, reach the maximum value, and then return to "0". The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 52 to determine the variation display time in the special symbol display unit 37a and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the timer interrupt process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the main process described later. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the special symbol display unit 37a and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

The general electric utility opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value, and then return to "0". The general electric utility opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 54c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric accessory 34a to the open state by the value of the stored general electric accessory open counter C4.

A payout control device 55 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and a power supply / emission control device 57 is also connected. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55 based on the winning determination result to the winning ball corresponding to the prize. The payout control device 55 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 56 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 50. A firing permission command is transmitted to the power supply / firing control device 57 based on the fact that the firing operating device 28 is being operated. The power supply / launch control device 57 drives the game ball launch mechanism 58 to launch the game ball toward the game area PA based on the launch permission command received from the main control device 50.

Further, a special map display unit 37a and a normal map display unit 38a are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and the display control of the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, at each game round, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a is executed in the MPU 52. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is clearly shown, the display control of the general drawing display unit 38a is executed in the MPU 52.

To the output side of the MPU 52, a special electric winning drive unit that opens and closes the opening / closing door of the special electric winning device 32 and a general electric accessory driving unit that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 are connected. .. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the special electric winning drive unit is executed in the MPU 52 so that the large winning opening is opened and closed. Further, when the open state of the utility accessory 34a is won, the drive control of the utility accessory drive unit is executed in the MPU 52 so that the utility accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, a voice emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and various commands for effect are transmitted to the voice emission control device 60.

Here, the processing executed by the MPU 52 will be described. The processing of the MPU 52 is roughly classified into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main process. In step S101, the power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is started. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 54 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 52 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply / emission control device 57 is manually operated, and in the following step S105, whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 54. Is determined. Further, in step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, at the start of business of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the RAM 54 is cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, step S109 without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 54 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60 in order to recognize the current gaming state. do.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the MPU 52 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt processing, a residual time is generated between the timer interrupt processing of one and the next timer interrupt processing. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S111, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 54, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S113, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, in a 4 msec cycle). First, the power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed.

In the following step S202, the lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility release counter C4, and the read numerical information was added by 1 to each. Later, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

In the following step S205, fraud detection processing for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the RAM 54 by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred.

In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to various drive units is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric winning driving unit is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set, the relevant information is concerned. Stop the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electric accessory drive unit is started and the information for switching to the closed state is started. If is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S209, the winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signal received from each winning detection sensor is read, and whether or not the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are won. Execute the process to specify.

In the following step S210, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 54 is executed. In this case, the timer counters to which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated are collectively handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are collectively performed. It may be configured.

In the following step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In the situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is launched every 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined firing cycle, as described above.

In the following step S212, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading process of step S208.

In the following step S213, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed. In the special figure special electric control process, when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 in a situation where the number of reserved information stored in the holding storage area 54b is less than the upper limit number, the prize is awarded. A process of sequentially storing each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time point in the hold storage area 54b is executed. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, a big hit occurs to determine whether or not the hold information corresponds to the big hit winning on the condition that the hold information is stored and not during the game rotation or the open / close execution mode. The lottery process and, if the jackpot winning is supported, the distribution determination process for determining which jackpot result the pending information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, not only the jackpot occurrence lottery process and the distribution determination process, but also whether the hold information corresponds to the reach occurrence if the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot winning. In addition to executing the reach determination process for determining, the process of selecting the variation display time of the game times is executed by using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. In this case, the variable display time table corresponding to the presence / absence of the jackpot winning, the jackpot type, and the presence / absence of reach is read from the ROM 53, and the read variable display time table and the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that timing are used for this time. Determine the variable display time of the game times. Then, the variation command including the information on the variation display time of the determined game times and the type command including the information on the game result are transmitted to the voice emission control device 60, and the variation of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a. Start the display. As a result, one game round is started, and the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41 start the effect for the game round. Further, the MPU 52 starts measuring the fluctuation display time when the fluctuation command and the type command are transmitted.

Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the variable display time corresponding to the game round elapses during the execution of one game round, the special figure display unit 37a performs the jackpot generation lottery processing and distribution of the current game round. The stop result corresponding to the result of the determination process is displayed, and the measurement of the definite display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is started. Then, the state in which the stop result is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is maintained for the final display time. When the confirmed display time has elapsed, if the current game round corresponds to the out-of-game result, a new game round can be started on condition that the hold information is stored in the hold storage area 54b. Execute the process. If the hold information is not stored, wait until the hold information is newly acquired.

On the other hand, if the game times this time correspond to the jackpot result, the process for starting the open / close execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the open / close execution mode is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60, and a closing command indicating that the round game is ended is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, an ending command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is terminated is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60, and the jackpot generation lottery mode and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode are set. Executes the processing of. In the open / close execution mode, an opening period is generated over a period of, for example, 3 seconds, and an effect of making the player aware that the open / close execution mode has occurred in this opening period is executed. After that, a round game in which the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed is executed a predetermined number of times. Then, after a predetermined number of round games are executed, an ending period is generated over a period of, for example, 5 seconds, and an effect of making the player aware that the opening / closing execution mode ends in this ending period is executed. ..

After executing the special figure special electric control process of step S213 in the timer interrupt process, the normal figure general electric control process is executed in step S214. In the Fuzu Fuden control process, when a prize has been won in the through gate 35, a process for acquiring the hold information on the Fuzu side is executed, and the hold information on the Fuzu side is stored. In addition, a release determination is made for the reserved information, and further, a process for performing an effect for a normal drawing is executed with the release determination as an opportunity. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process of opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed.

In the following step S215, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the reserved information corresponding to the special figure display unit 37a in the special figure hold display unit 37b is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214. At the same time, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the reserved information corresponding to the normal figure display unit 38a in the normal figure hold display unit 38b is set. Further, in step S215, the output information for updating the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, and the display contents of the normal figure display unit 38a are set. Set the output information for updating.

In the following step S216, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 55 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed. Further, in step S217, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed. In the following step S218, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Voice emission control device 60>
Next, the voice emission control device 60 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 5, the voice emission control device 60 includes a voice emission control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 is a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 62, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A certain RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in.

As the ROM 63, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that allows random access when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require an external power supply for storage retention is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. Further, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be mounted as a separate chip. It may be installed.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 50 and an effect operation device 48 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. A display light emitting unit 44 and a speaker unit 45 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62, and a display CPU 72 described later of the display control device 70 is connected to the output side.

<Display control device 70>
Next, the display control device 70 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 5, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. ..

The display CPU 72 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program or the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected to the input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 through the input port 77. Will be done. It should be noted that receiving a command from the voice emission control device 60 in the display CPU 72 is not limited to a configuration in which the command is directly received from the voice emission control device 60, but also includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received. Is done.

The display CPU 72 is connected to the work RAM 73, the memory module 74, and the VRAM 75 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on a command received from the voice emission control device 60. Give a transfer instruction. Further, the display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and gives a drawing instruction to output an image signal to the symbol display device 41 based on a command received from the voice emission control device 60. Hereinafter, the memory module 74, the work RAM 73, the VRAM 75, and the VDP 76 will be described.

The memory module 74 stores control data including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and also includes sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, background data, moving image data, and the like. Various image data are stored in advance. The memory module 74 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention. Incidentally, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is well executed. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is used, the memory module 74 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM).

Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outline and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. There is. Further, the background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in which the still image data is compressed. The moving image data will be described in detail later.

The work RAM 73 is a storage means for temporarily storing control data read from and transferred from the memory module 74, and for temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storage retention, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the work RAM 73 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. Then, the display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into the internal memory area (register group) as needed, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 75 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 75 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage retention, and in detail, SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the VRAM 75 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 75 includes a decompression buffer 81. Image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 76 to the memory module 74. Further, the VRAM 75 is provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76. The VRAM 75 may be built in the VDP 76.

The VDP 76 is an image generation device that draws on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the expansion buffer 81 based on the drawing instruction from the display CPU 72. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 41b incorporated so as to drive and control a liquid crystal display unit 41a in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP76 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control unit 91, a register 92, a moving image decoder 93, and a display circuit 94. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to the I / F95 for the display CPU 72 and the I / F96 for the VRAM75.

The VDP 76 stores a drawing list as drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72 in the register 92. By storing the drawing list in the register 92, the control unit 91 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes a predetermined process. In addition, all of the control programs for operating the control unit 91 may be provided by the drawing list, and a memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the control unit 91, and the contents of the control program and the drawing list are combined. The control unit 91 may be configured to execute a predetermined process. Further, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 74.

As the above process, the control unit 91 reads the image data stored in the memory module 74 into the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Further, the control unit 91 creates drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 82 using (or by processing) the image data read out in the expansion buffer 81. The drawing data for one frame is the data necessary for displaying the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. say.

Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame region 82a and a second frame region 82b are provided. Each of these frame areas 82a and 82b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, a full-color method is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) at each dot. Corresponding to this, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

The method is not limited to the full-color method. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed at each dot, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 82 is provided with the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b, drawing on the symbol display device 41 is executed using the drawing data created in one frame area. , Creation of drawing data to be used in the future is executed for other frame areas. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 82.

In the display circuit 94, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b, and the image signal is transmitted to the display circuit 94. It is output to the symbol display device 41 via the connected output port 78. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 82a and 82b to the display circuit 94. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 41. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output based on the gradation data. A synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal is also output from the display circuit 94. Further, the moving image decoder 93 decodes the moving image data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75.

<Processing configuration of MPU 62 of voice emission control device 60>
Next, the process executed by the MPU 62 of the voice emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as the sound light side MPU 62) will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec) on the sound / light side MPU 62.

First, in step S301, a table setting process for setting a control table used for executing light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44, sound output control of the speaker unit 45, and control of the display control device 70 is executed. do. In the table setting process, for example, a control pattern table for performing a process corresponding to a command received from the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 (hereinafter referred to as the main MPU 52) is set. In the following step S302, a command selection process for instructing the display CPU 72 of the content of the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed. In the command selection process, the command is output to the display CPU 72 according to the control table read in the table setting process in step S301.

After that, in step S303, a light emission control process for controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed according to the control table read out in the table setting process in step S301. Further, in step S304, a sound output control process for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 45 is executed. In the sound output control process, the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed according to the control table read out in the table setting process of step S301. After that, the pointer update process is executed in step S305. In the pointer update process, the pointer information of the current control table is updated to the next pointer information.

<Table setting process>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a table setting process executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 52 (step S401: YES), the game result storage process is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, information on which is the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery or the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 52 at the start of this game round is specified. The specified information is written to the RAM 64.

After that, the notice lottery process is executed on condition that the change display time corresponding to the change command received this time from the main MPU 52 is the change display time corresponding to the situation where the notice effect can occur (step S403: YES). (Step S404). In the advance notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the symbol display device 41 is to perform the advance notice effect in this game round. As such a notice effect, as described above, in a situation where the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the symbol display device 41 starts the variable display, or a part of the symbol display device 41. In a situation where the symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of symbol rows in the symbol row, the mode is to display the character separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the background screen is the previous mode. Also includes those having different predetermined modes and those in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have different predetermined modes from the previous modes. The advance notice effect can occur in any of the game times when the reach effect is performed and when the reach effect is not performed, but the case where the reach effect is performed is higher than the case where the reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability. In addition, the advance notice effect is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to one of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the missed result, and the advance notice effect with a lower appearance rate in the game times corresponding to the big hit result. Is set to be easy to occur.

In the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice lottery table T1 stored in advance in the ROM 63 of the voice emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as the sound light side ROM 63) is used in the RAM 64 (hereinafter referred to as the sound light side RAM 64) of the voice emission control device 60. read out. The notice lottery table T1 is prepared with a one-to-one correspondence with a combination of a variable command and a type command. Therefore, in the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice lottery table T1 corresponding to the variable command and the type command received this time from the main MPU 52 is read from the sound light side ROM 63.

FIG. 11A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the advance notice lottery table T1. The advance notice lottery table T1 is associated with the advance notice lottery result and the numerical range of the advance notice lottery counter. As a result of the advance notice lottery, a non-occurrence in which the advance notice effect does not occur, a first advance notice effect in which the advance notice effect is executed in the first aspect, and a second advance notice effect in which the advance notice effect is executed in the second aspect are set. .. In the first notice effect, for example, the individual image for the first notice effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined mode, and in the second notice effect, for example, the individual image for the second notice effect is displayed in a predetermined mode. It is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate. The advance notice lottery counter is provided in the sound / light side RAM 64. The advance notice lottery counter is a loop counter that can take any value from "0" to "239", and is added by "1" periodically (for example, 4 msec), and when the maximum value is reached, it becomes "0". return. As shown in FIG. 11A, in the advance notice lottery table T1, a value that can be taken by the advance notice lottery counter is assigned to any of the advance notice lottery results.

It should be noted that the type of advance notice effect to be drawn may differ depending on the type of the advance notice lottery table T1. In this case, although the types of the advance notice effects to be drawn are the same between the different types of advance notice lottery tables T1, the selection rates of the advance notice effects may be different, or between the different types of advance notice lottery tables T1. In some cases, some or all of the types of notice effects that are subject to the lottery may be different.

In the advance notice lottery process, the value at that time of the advance notice lottery counter is acquired, and the acquired value is collated with the advance notice lottery table T1 read out this time. Then, the advance notice lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the advance notice lottery counter is acquired as the result of the present advance notice lottery process.

Returning to the explanation of the table setting process (FIG. 10), when a negative judgment is made in step S403 or the process of step S404 is executed, the variation display time corresponding to the variation command received this time from the main MPU 52 is reached. The reach effect lottery process is executed (step S406) on condition that the variable display time corresponds to the occurrence of the effect (step S405: YES). That is, when the variation display time of the game times determined by the main MPU 52 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect, the type of the reach effect to be executed is determined by the reach effect lottery process, and the main MPU 52 If the variation display time of the game times determined in is not corresponding to the occurrence of the reach effect, the reach effect lottery process is not executed.

For the reach effect, as described above, the high-frequency winning mode can be generated by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbols displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. A display state is included in which a combination of reach symbols that may hold a combination of jackpot symbols is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface P to perform a reach effect. The reach effect is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to one of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the missed result, and the reach effect corresponding to the jackpot result has a lower appearance rate. It is set to be easy to occur.

In the reach effect lottery process, the reach lottery table T2 stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 63 is read out to the sound light side RAM 64. The reach lottery table T2 is prepared with a one-to-one correspondence with a combination of a variable command and a type command. Therefore, in the reach effect lottery process, the reach lottery table T2 corresponding to the variable command and the type command received this time from the main MPU 52 is read from the sound / light side ROM 63.

FIG. 11B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the reach lottery table T2. In the reach lottery table T2, the reach lottery result and the numerical range of the reach lottery counter are associated with each other. As a result of the reach lottery, the first reach effect in which the reach effect is executed in the first aspect, the second reach effect in which the reach effect is executed in the second aspect, and the third reach effect in which the reach effect is executed in the third aspect. The production is set. In the first reach effect, for example, the individual image for the first reach effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined mode, and in the second reach effect, for example, the individual image for the second reach effect is displayed in a predetermined mode. It is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate, and in the third reach effect, for example, an individual image for the third reach effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined mode. The reach lottery counter is provided in the sound / light side RAM 64. The reach lottery counter is a loop counter that can take any value from "0" to "239", and is added by "1" periodically (for example, 4 msec), and when the maximum value is reached, it becomes "0". return. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the reach lottery table T2, a value that can be taken by the reach lottery counter is assigned to any of the reach lottery results.

The type of reach effect to be drawn may differ depending on the type of the reach lottery table T2. In this case, although the types of reach effects to be drawn are the same between the different types of reach lottery tables T2, the selection rates of the reach effects may be different, or between the different types of reach lottery tables T2. In some cases, some or all of the types of reach effects to be drawn may be different.

In the reach effect lottery process, the value at that time of the reach lottery counter is acquired, and the acquired value is collated with the reach lottery table T2 read out this time. Then, the reach lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the reach lottery counter is acquired as the result of the reach effect lottery process this time.

Returning to the description of the table setting process (FIG. 10), when a negative determination is made in step S405 or when the process of step S406 is executed, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S407). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game round is either a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variation jackpot result, it corresponds to a stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5. The information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. In this case, the same odd symbol combination may be selected for the 15R probability variation jackpot result, while the same even symbol combination may be selected for both the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result. The effective lines L1 to L5 in which the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, even if it is a normal jackpot result, the same odd-numbered symbol combination may be selected.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game round is an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and one effective line L1. Information corresponding to the stop result in which a specific symbol combination (“3.4.1”) is established on L5 is determined as the information of the stop result this time. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game is out of order, the presence or absence of the reach effect is specified from the contents of the combination of the variable command and the type command. Then, when the reach effect occurs, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the specific symbols are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination is on one or two effective lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of reach symbols is established is determined as the information of the stop result this time. On the other hand, when the reach effect does not occur, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the specific symbols are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the reach is on all the effective lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of symbols is not established is determined as the information of the stop result of this time.

After that, the control pattern table setting process is executed (step S408). In the control pattern table setting process, the result of the advance notice lottery process (step S404), the presence / absence of the reach effect, the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S406) if the reach effect occurs, and the stop symbol determination process (step S406). The control pattern table corresponding to the combination of the results of step S407) is read from the sound light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound light side RAM 64.

The control pattern table T3 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of the control pattern table T3 that can be set when the advance notice effect and the reach effect are executed in the game times that result in the 15R probability variation jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 12, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the fluctuation display time of the target game times is set in the control pattern table T3, and information on the content of the task is set corresponding to each pointer information. And information on the presence / absence of command output are set.

The information on the content of the task is the information set for performing the light emission control and the sound output control corresponding to the current game times, and the light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 in the manner corresponding to the information on the content of the task in each frame. The control is performed and the sound output of the speaker unit 45 is controlled. Specifically, for the control pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 12, the pointer information of "0" is set with the data at the start of fluctuation, and the pointer information of "200" is set with the data at the start of the advance notice effect. , The data at the end of the notice effect is set in the pointer information of "300", the data at the start of normal reach is set in the pointer information of "400", and the data at the start of super reach is set in the pointer information of "700". The data at the start of the final effect is set in the pointer information of "1000", and the data at the start of the standby display is set in the pointer information of "1400". Each of these pointer information corresponds to a delimiter timing such as the start of the effect, the switching of the effect, and the end of the effect. In addition, data for enabling light emission control and sound output control between break timings are set in the pointer information other than these.

The information on the presence / absence of command output is information indicating the presence / absence of command output from the sound / light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 and the type of the command. By outputting the command to the display CPU 72 according to the control pattern table T3 in the command selection process (step S302) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the content of the image in the symbol display device 41 and the light emission in the display light emitting unit 44. It is possible to associate the content with the sound output content of the speaker unit 45. That is, according to the content of the moving image in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 44 executes the light effect, and the speaker unit 45 executes the sound output effect. Specifically, for the control pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 12, command data is set for the pointer information of "0" in which the data at the start of fluctuation is set in the content of the task. Therefore, at the start of the fluctuation of the game times, the display control is started in the display CPU 72 based on the command transmission from the sound / light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72. In addition, in the content of the task, each pointer information in which the data at the start of the advance notice effect, the data at the start of the normal reach, the data at the start of the super reach, the data at the start of the final effect, and the data at the start of the standby display are set. Specifically, command data is set for each pointer information of "200", "400", "700", "1000", and "1400". Therefore, within the range of the effect for the game round that is started by the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger that the variable command and the type command are transmitted from the main MPU 52, the effect category included in the effect for the game round is included. When the type changes, the display CPU 72 starts the display control corresponding to the new effect category based on the command transmission from the sound / light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72.

In addition to the effect for the game round, the control pattern table T3 is an effect for the demo display in a situation where neither the effect for the open / close execution mode, the effect for the game round, nor the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed. It is provided in correspondence with. Since the control pattern table T3 is set corresponding to various situations in this way, some control pattern table T3 is read out to the sound light side RAM 64 in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the sound light side MPU 62. It is in a state of being.

After that, the variable display time determination process is executed (step S409). In this process, the information on the variation display time of the current game is specified from the content of the variation command received this time from the main MPU 52, and the information on the specified variation display time is described in FIG. 11 (c). As shown in the figure, it is set in the fluctuation time counter 64a provided in the sound / light side RAM 64. The variable time counter 64a is a counter for the sound / light side MPU 62 to specify the timing at which the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is terminated and the final display of the symbol is started in the current game round. The value set in the variable time counter 64a is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started in the sound light side MPU 62, that is, every time 4 msec elapses.

The variation display mode of the symbol when the effect for the game round is executed will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b). FIG. 13 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the symbol is oscillatedly displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 13 (b) explains how the symbol is confirmed and displayed on the symbol display device 41. It is an explanatory diagram for this.

Reach effect can be achieved by using the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 without displaying the reach effect character or the normal reach display (the game time that results in the complete deviation without the reach effect occurring). In the game round in which the display content to be performed) is performed, the variation display of the symbols of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started in the high-speed variation display which is a low identification mode, and then the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a predetermined order. The display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display, which is a high identification mode, and the standby display is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the predetermined order. Then, after the state in which the standby display is performed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is continued for a predetermined period, each symbol that has been wait-displayed is confirmed and displayed as the final stop display, and the confirmed display state is confirmed and displayed. Continued over time.

As shown in FIG. 13A, the standby display is a standby area SA1 to virtually set so that there are three in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. It is a display state in which a symbol is waiting in SA9. In a state where only the upper symbol row Z1 is displayed as a standby and the scroll display of the symbols is continued in the remaining symbol rows Z2 and Z3, one symbol is on standby in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA3 corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1. It will be in a state of being. Further, in a state where the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are in standby display and the scroll display of the symbols is continued in the middle symbol row Z2, the standby areas SA1 to SA3 and the lower symbol row Z3 corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 are continued. One symbol is waiting in each of the standby areas SA7 to SA9 corresponding to the above. Further, in the state where all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed on standby, one symbol is waiting in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9. In the standby display, the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are not statically displayed, but are displayed in a variable manner within the same standby areas SA1 to SA9. Specifically, each symbol that is the target of the standby display swings up and down or left and right within the range including the stop position in the corresponding standby areas SA1 to SA9 and within the range sandwiching the stop position. Move.

As shown in FIG. 13B, the definite display means that each of the symbols on standby in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is the corresponding standby areas SA1 to SA9. This is a display state in which the variation display within the range is terminated and the corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the standby areas SA1 to SA9. By performing the definite display in this way, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the stop result of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 of the game times this time.

On the other hand, in the game round in which the super reach display is performed, the variable display of the symbols is started, and the symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, which are some of the symbol rows, are in the standby areas SA1 to SA3, SA7 to SA9. After the standby display is displayed and the reach line is formed, the image for super reach is displayed. After that, in a state where a combination of jackpot symbols or a combination of missed reach symbols is formed, the symbols are displayed on standby in each standby area on all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for a predetermined period. Then, those symbols are confirmed and displayed, and the confirmed and displayed state is continued for the confirmed display time.

Returning to the explanation of the table setting process (FIG. 10), the execution control of the effect is performed according to the control pattern table set in step S408 (step S410: YES), and the sound light side in step S409. When the value of the variable time counter 64a of the RAM 64 is "0" (step S411: YES), the fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is displayed on the fixed time counter 64b provided in the sound light side RAM 64. ) Is set (step S412). The value set in the fixed time counter 64b is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started in the sound light side MPU 62, that is, every time 4 msec elapses. Further, the definite display table that determines the mode of the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 during the definite display time is read from the sound light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound light side RAM 64 (step S413). Control data for executing light emission control and sound output control for the confirmed display time is set in the confirmed display table, but the display light emitting unit 44 is actually turned off during the confirmed display time, and the speaker is turned off. The unit 45 is in a mute state. After that, the confirmation display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S414). As a result, in the display CPU 72, each symbol that is standby and displayed on the symbol display device 41 is confirmed and displayed as it is, and the confirmed display state is maintained for the confirmed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec). The display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so as to be performed.

Here, in the main MPU 52, when the variation display time corresponding to the variation command and the type command has elapsed, the special figure display unit 37a corresponds to the result of the jackpot generation lottery process and the distribution determination process of this game round. The stop result is displayed, and the state is maintained for the confirmed display time. The variable display time measured by the main MPU 52 is the same as the variable display time set in step S409 in the sound light side MPU 62, and the definite display time measured by the main MPU 52 is the sound light side MPU 62. It is the same as the confirmed display time set in step S412. Therefore, the symbol display device 41 starts the definite display of the symbol at the timing when the elapse of the variable display time is confirmed by the main MPU 52, and the symbol display device is started at the timing when the elapse of the definite display time is confirmed by the main MPU 52. At 41, the final display of the symbol ends.

In the table setting process, in addition to each of the above processes, other processes are executed in step S415. In other processing, for example, when the control pattern table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode is read when the opening command is received from the main MPU 52, and the ending command is received from the main MPU 52. Executes a process for ending the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, in the situation where neither the effect for the game round nor the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed, the control pattern table for executing the demo display effect is read out.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the advance notice lottery process (step S404) for determining the presence / absence and the content of the advance notice effect is executed on the sound / light side MPU 62, and the reach effect lottery for determining the content of the reach effect is executed. The process (step S406) is executed. As a result, it is not necessary for the main MPU 52 to determine the presence / absence and content of the advance notice effect, and further it is not necessary to determine the content of the reach effect, so that the processing load of the main MPU 52 regarding the execution control of the effect for the game round is reduced. It becomes possible to do.

However, since both the advance notice effect and the reach effect are determined by lottery on the sound light side MPU 62, the variable display time determined by the control pattern table T3 selected on the sound light side MPU 62 is set to the main side MPU 52. It is possible that the variable display time will not match the determined variable display time. That is, if an attempt is made to execute a lottery for the advance notice effect and a lottery for the reach effect while completely matching the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52, the variable display time that can be determined by the main MPU 52 is made to correspond to each of the variable display times. Therefore, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of types of advance notice effects and a plurality of types of reach effects at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the types of advance notice effects and the types of reach effects become enormous. Further, even if a plurality of types of advance notice effects and a plurality of types of reach effects are prepared at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 in correspondence with each of the variable display times that can be determined by the main MPU 52, the main MPU 52 will be used. If an attempt is made to execute the lottery for the advance notice effect and the lottery for the reach effect while completely matching the determined variable display time, there are restrictions on the design of the advance notice effect and the reach effect. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation display time determined by the control pattern table T3 does not match the fluctuation display time determined by the main MPU 52, while waiting at the end of the effect for the game round. The display and the confirmation display are well performed. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described.

14 (a) and 14 (b) show various parts tables T4 to used when the control pattern table T3 is set in the control pattern table setting process (step S408) in the table setting process (FIG. 10). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating T9.

The parts tables T4 to T9 are tables for generating a part or all of one control pattern table T3, and are stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 63. The parts tables T4 to T9 are classified into a plurality of table groups, and one parts table read from one table group may be used as it is as one control pattern table T3, or from each table group. One control pattern table T3 may be generated by combining the read parts tables.

As the table group, there are a table group TG1 for the first period and a table group TG2 for the second period. In the table group TG1 for the first period, when the variation display of the symbol is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in the effect for the game round. When the parts table corresponding to the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the standby display in the lower symbol row Z3, and when all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are simultaneously switched to the standby display in the production for the game round. A parts table corresponding to the entire period of the production for the game is included. When the advance notice effect is executed as the effect for the game round, the control data for executing the advance notice effect is set in the parts tables T5 and T6 included in the table group TG1 for the first period. For example, the control data for executing the first notice effect is set in the parts table T5 for the first notice effect, and the control data for executing the second notice effect is set in the parts table T6 for the second notice effect. It is set. Further, the control data corresponding to the period until the standby display is started in the lower symbol column Z3 of the game times when the advance notice effect does not occur is set in the parts table T4 for not generating the advance notice effect. The table group TG1 for the first period also includes parts tables other than the parts tables T4 to T6 exemplified above.

In the table group TG2 for the second period, when the variation display of the symbol is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in the effect for the game round. A parts table corresponding to the period from the start of the standby display in the lower symbol row Z3 to the end of the standby display in the middle symbol row Z2 is included. When the reach effect is executed as the effect for the game round, the control data for executing the reach effect is set in the parts tables T7 to T9 included in the table group TG2 for the second period. For example, the control data for executing the first reach effect is set in the parts table T7 for the first reach effect, and the control data for executing the second reach effect is set in the parts table T8 for the second reach effect. The control data for executing the third reach effect is set in the parts table T9 for the third reach effect. The table group TG2 for the second period also includes parts tables other than the parts tables T7 to T9 exemplified above. The parts table also includes a parts table when the reach effect is not executed.

In the control pattern table setting process in step S408 of the table setting process (FIG. 10), one parts table is read out from the table group TG1 for the first period in the sound light side ROM 63. In this case, for example, it is a game round that results in a loss and is a game round that is started when the number of hold information stored in the hold storage area 54b is four, which is the upper limit. If the variable display time of the game times corresponds to the variable display time in which the switching from the scroll display of the variable display of the symbol to the standby display simultaneously occurs in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the table for the first period is used. One parts table read from the group TG1 is set as the control pattern table T3 as it is.

On the other hand, if the variation display time of the game times this time corresponds to the variation display time in which the switching of the symbol variation display to the standby display sequentially occurs in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, the advance notice lottery process (step). One parts table corresponding to the result of S404) is read out from the table group TG1 for the first period in the sound light side ROM 63. Further, if it is a game time in which the reach effect does not occur, one parts table corresponding to the fluctuation display time of this time is read out from the table group TG2 for the second period in the sound light side ROM 63, and the game time in which the reach effect occurs. If so, one parts table corresponding to the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S405) is read out from the table group TG2 for the second period in the sound light side ROM 63. Then, by combining the parts table read from the table group TG1 for the first period and the parts table read from the table group TG2 for the second period, it is set as one control pattern table T3.

In a situation where one parts table is set as one control pattern table T3 as it is, the type of control pattern table T3 corresponding to one fluctuation display time determined by the main MPU 52 is uniquely determined. On the other hand, in a situation where one control pattern table T3 is created by combining a plurality of parts tables, there are a plurality of types of control pattern tables T3 corresponding to one variation display time determined by the main MPU 52. It will exist. For example, the advance notice lottery process (step S404) is executed using the advance notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11A, and the reach effect lottery process is executed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 11B. In the situation where (step S406) is executed, from the table group TG1 for the first period, the parts table T4 for not generating the notice effect, the parts table T5 for the first notice effect, and the parts for the second notice effect are executed. One of the tables T6 is selected, and the parts table T7 for the first reach effect, the parts table T8 for the second reach effect, and the parts table T9 for the third reach effect are selected from the table group TG2 for the second period. One is selected.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the fluctuation display time defined by the parts tables T4 to T9. FIG. 15 (a1) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T4 for not generating the notice effect, and FIG. 15 (a2) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first notice effect. (A3) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T6 for the second notice effect. Further, FIG. 15 (b1) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T7 for the first reach effect, and FIG. 15 (b2) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second reach effect. FIG. 15 (b3) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T9 for the third reach effect.

As shown in FIGS. 15 (a1) to 15 (a3), the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first advance notice effect is longer than the variable display time determined by the parts table T4 for non-occurrence of the advance notice effect. It is (Ta1) minutes longer, and the variable display time determined by the parts table T6 for the second notice effect is longer than the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first notice effect by the time (Ta2-Ta1). Further, as shown in FIGS. 15 (b1) to 15 (b3), the variable display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second reach effect is from the variable display time determined by the parts table T7 for the first reach effect. Is also longer by the time (Tb1), and the variable display time determined by the parts table T9 for the third reach effect is longer by the time (Tb2-Tb1) than the variable display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second reach effect.

In the above configuration, the advance notice lottery process (step S404) is executed using the advance notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11A, and the reach effect lottery is executed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 11B. When the process (step S406) is executed, the variable display time determined by the control pattern table fluctuates according to the combination of the parts tables T4 to T9 to be used. Specifically, when the combination of the parts table T4 for non-notification effect and the parts table T7 for the first reach effect is selected, the variable display time is the shortest, and the parts table T6 for the second advance notice effect is used. When the combination with the parts table T9 for the third reach effect is selected, the variable display time is the longest, but the difference between these variable display times is (Ta2 + Tb2). Therefore, the variation display time determined by the sound / light side MPU 62 may be different for one variation command transmitted from the main MPU 52.

However, the longest variable display time among the variable display times that can be selected for one variable command is the variable display time corresponding to the variable command, that is, the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 or less. As such, the advance notice lottery table T1 and the reach lottery table T2 selected for the combination of the variable command and the type command are set. That is, regardless of which notice lottery table T1 is used or which reach lottery table T2 is used, it corresponds to the control pattern table created by combining a plurality of parts tables. The variable display time is equal to or less than the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52.

In a configuration in which the longest fluctuation display time among the fluctuation display times that can be selected for one fluctuation command is equal to or less than the fluctuation display time determined by the main MPU 52, the fluctuation time counter of the sound light side RAM 64 The control corresponding to the final pointer set in the control pattern table ends before the variation display time measured by using 64a elapses. On the other hand, if the control corresponding to the final pointer is completed before the fluctuation display time measured by using the fluctuation time counter 64a elapses, the value of the pointer to be controlled is returned. The standby display is continuously displayed. The process for returning the value of the pointer will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed in step S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

In the pointer update process, the value of the pointer information to be referenced is added by 1 among the pointer information used when specifying the control data to be used in the currently set control table (for example, the control pattern table). (Step S501). As a result, in the command selection process (step S302), the light emission control process (step S303), and the sound output control process (step S304) in the next processing round of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the value of the pointer information updated this time is used. The corresponding control data is used.

After that, on condition that the value of the pointer information to be referred to is larger than the value of the final pointer defined in the control table, and the control table currently set is the control pattern table for game rounds. (Step S502 and step S503: YES), the pointer information correction process is executed (step S504). In the pointer information correction processing, the control data corresponding to the pointer information corresponding to the timing at which the standby display is started is the command selection processing (step S302) and the light emission control processing (step S302) in the next processing round of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9). The value of the pointer information to be referred to is corrected so as to be used in step S303) and the sound output control process (step S304). As a result, even if the control corresponding to the final pointer ends before the fluctuation display time measured by using the fluctuation time counter 64a elapses, the standby display continues until the fluctuation display time elapses. It will be.

Further, when the pointer information correction process (step S504) is executed, the standby extension command is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S505). When the display CPU 72 receives the standby extension command, the display CPU 72 sets a data table for continuing the standby display so that the symbol display device 41 continues the standby display.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 17, a state in which the effect for the game round is executed will be described. FIG. 17 (a) shows the execution period of the game times, and FIGS. 17 (b1) and 17 (b2) show the execution control of the effect using the parts table read from the table group TG1 for the first period. The first period, which is the period to be used, is shown, and FIGS. 17 (c1) and 17 (c2) are periods in which the execution control of the effect using the parts table read from the table group TG2 for the second period is performed. A second period is shown, FIGS. 17 (d1) and 17 (d2) show a standby display period, and FIGS. 17 (e1) and 17 (e2) show a definite display period. In addition, in FIG. 17 (b1), FIG. 17 (c1), FIG. 17 (d1) and FIG. 17 (e1), the advance notice lottery process (step S404) is performed using the advance notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11 (a). A control pattern table (hereinafter, the shortest correspondence table) that has the shortest variation display time when the reach effect lottery process (step S406) is executed by using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 11B while being executed. 17 (b2), FIG. 17 (c2), FIG. 17 (d2) and FIG. 17 (e2) show the case where the notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11 (a) is used. Control to be the longest variable display time when the advance notice lottery process (step S404) is executed and the reach effect lottery process (step S406) is executed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 11 (b). The case where the pattern table (hereinafter referred to as the longest correspondence table) is used is shown.

Regardless of whether the shortest correspondence table is used or the longest correspondence table is used, the game round is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 17 (b1). ) And FIG. 17 (b2), the first period is started. After that, when the shortest correspondence table is used, the first period ends and the second period starts at the timing of t11 as shown in FIGS. 17 (b1) and 17 (c1), and the longest correspondence table is set. When used, the first period ends and the second period begins at the timing of t21, as shown in FIGS. 17 (b2) and 17 (c2).

After that, when the shortest correspondence table is used, the second period ends and the standby display period starts at the timing of t12 as shown in FIGS. 17 (c1) and 17 (d1), and the longest correspondence table is set. When used, the second period ends and the standby display period starts at the timing of t22, as shown in FIGS. 17 (c2) and 17 (d2). In this case, in the situation where the shortest correspondence table is used, the end timing of the standby display defined in the control pattern table is earlier than the elapsed timing of the variable display time, but the pointer update process (FIG. 16). The standby display is continued by executing the correction process of the pointer information (step S504) at.

After that, regardless of whether the shortest correspondence table is used or the longest correspondence table is used, the fluctuation measured by using the fluctuation time counter 64a of the sound light side RAM 64 at the timing of t2. The display time has elapsed. Therefore, if the shortest correspondence table is used, the standby display period ends and the final display period starts as shown in FIGS. 17 (d1) and 17 (e1), and the longest correspondence table is used. If so, as shown in FIGS. 17 (d2) and 17 (e2), the standby display period ends and the definite display period starts. Then, when the confirmed display time elapses at the timing of t3, the confirmed display period ends as shown in FIGS. 17 (e1) and 17 (e2), and the current game times as shown in FIG. 17 (a). Is finished.

As described above, the advance notice lottery process (step S404) for determining the presence / absence and the content of the notice effect is executed on the optical side MPU 62, and the reach effect lottery process (step S406) for determining the content of the reach effect is performed. Will be executed. As a result, it is not necessary for the main MPU 52 to determine the presence / absence and content of the advance notice effect, and further it is not necessary to determine the content of the reach effect. Is planned. In addition, it is possible to diversify the effect mode set for one combination of the variable command and the type command transmitted from the main MPU 52.

Corresponds to the result of the advance notice lottery process and the result of the reach effect lottery process so that the variation display time determined by the control pattern table can be different even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52. The control pattern table is set. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main MPU 52 and diversify the effect modes while making it possible to appropriately design the advance notice effect and the reach effect.

Even if the variation display time determined by the control pattern table selected by the same variation command is different, the symbol display device is at the timing corresponding to the variation display time determined by the main MPU 52. The mode of the variable display of the symbol in 41 is switched from the standby display to the definite display. As a result, even if the variable display time determined by the control pattern table may be different, the effect of playing the game on the symbol display device 41 is terminated at the timing corresponding to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52. It becomes possible.

In a configuration in which the control pattern tables to be used may differ even when the same fluctuation command is received from the main MPU 52, the longest fluctuation display among the fluctuation display times determined by those control pattern tables is displayed. The time corresponds to the fluctuation display time or less determined by the main MPU 52. Then, when the control pattern table corresponding to the variable display time is used, which is shorter than the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52, until the timing at which the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 elapses. , The variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is maintained in the standby display. As a result, regardless of which control pattern table is used, the symbol display device 41 switches from the standby display to the confirmed display at the end of the game round, for example, a predetermined effect. It is possible to prevent an event such as the sudden start of the definite display in the middle of the process or an event that the definite display of the symbol continues for a longer period than the normal definite display period.

The fluctuation time counter 64a is provided in the sound light side RAM 64, and the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation command received from the main MPU 52 is set in the fluctuation time counter 64a, and the fluctuation time counter 64a is set. When the variation display time measured by using the signal has elapsed, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is switched to the definite display. As a result, even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, the command indicating the start timing of the definite display is issued to the main MPU 52 in a configuration in which the variation display time defined by the control pattern table may be different. It is possible to start the definite display at the timing corresponding to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 without transmitting from.

The following configuration may be applied as a configuration in which the variation display time defined by the control pattern table can be different even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52.

-The various parts tables T7 to T9 included in the table group TG2 for the second period are controlled for a time longer than the longest fluctuation display time assumed in the situation where these parts tables T7 to T9 are used. In addition to the data being set, the control data for executing the standby display may be set as the control data corresponding to the later period following the end timing. In this case, it is not necessary to execute the correction process for extending the execution period of the standby display on the control pattern table. However, it is necessary to end the use of the control pattern table at the timing when the variation display time of the game times has elapsed.

-The control pattern table for controlling the execution of the effect after the start of the standby display is provided separately from the control pattern table for controlling the execution of the effect before the start of the standby display, and the standby display starts. If this is the case, the configuration may be such that the execution control of the effect is performed based on the control pattern table for standby display. In this case, by using the same control pattern table for standby display regardless of the game times, it is possible to use the control pattern table for standby display in various situations. In this configuration, the control pattern table for standby display is set as a table for displaying standby for a predetermined period, and it is necessary to display standby for a period longer than the predetermined period. The control pattern table for standby display may be used in a loop. In addition, the control pattern table for the standby display is set as a table that enables the standby display to be executed for a period longer than the maximum period assumed as the period in which the standby display is executed, and the variable display time of the game times is set. When the elapse has passed, the use of the control pattern table for the standby display may be terminated halfway.

-The measurement of the time for starting the final display is not limited to the configuration executed by the sound light side MPU 62, and when it is the timing to start the final display, the main side MPU 52 to the sound light side MPU 62. When a command corresponding to the command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 62 and the command is received by the sound light side MPU 62, a process for starting a confirmation display may be executed in the sound light side MPU 62.

-In a configuration in which the control pattern tables to be used may differ even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, the longest variation among the variation display times determined by those control pattern tables. Fluctuations in display time determined by main MPU 52 Fluctuations in which the longest display time among the fluctuations in display time determined by the control pattern table is determined by the main MPU 52, instead of the configuration corresponding to the display time or less. It may be configured so that the time can be longer than the display time. In this case, it becomes necessary to end the effect during the execution of the effect for the game round. Therefore, in such a case, an effect for forced termination is generated, and the content corresponding to the result of the jackpot generation lottery and the type lottery of the corresponding game times in the effect for forced termination, more specifically, the game. The content corresponding to the determination result of the stop symbol determination process (step S407) in the table setting process (FIG. 10) may be notified. More specifically, even if the symbol display device 41 is in the middle of performing an effect such as a reach effect corresponding to a period before the standby display, the game times are changed at the timing when the variable display time has elapsed. The combination of symbols determined as the stop result may be suddenly stopped and displayed, and the final display may be performed in the state where the combination of the symbols is stopped and displayed.

<Processing configuration of display CPU 72>
Next, the process executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process that is repeatedly activated by the display CPU 72 in a predetermined cycle, specifically, in a cycle of 20 msec.

When the VDP76 outputs an image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 41, the VDP76 starts outputting the image signal from a dot in the upper left corner portion of the display surface P, and is on a horizontal line including the dot at one end. The image signals are sequentially output to the dots lined up, and the image signals are output to the dots from left to right in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, the image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner portion of the display surface P. In this case, the VDP 76 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 72 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, and causes the display CPU 72 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec, which is the same as the image update cycle for one frame. In this respect, the V interrupt process can be considered to be started in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, the V interrupt process is newly started.

In the V interrupt process, the command analysis process is first executed (step S601). Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 73 are analyzed. Here, when the display CPU 72 receives the strobe signal from the sound / light side MPU 62, the display CPU 72 executes the command interrupt processing regardless of the processing being executed at that time. In the command interrupt process, the command received on the input port 77 is transferred to the command buffer provided in the work RAM 73.

After that, the command correspondence process is executed on condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving a new command (step S602: YES) (step S603). In the command correspondence process, the execution target table for executing the program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 74. The execution target table defines the processing required to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when the moving image corresponding to the received command is displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. It is a group of information.

The commands received by the display CPU 72 from the sound and light side MPU 62 include the command at the start of fluctuation, the command at the start of the advance notice effect, the command at the start of normal reach, the command at the start of super reach, and the command at the start of final effect, as described above. There are commands at the start of standby display, standby extension commands, and confirmed display start commands. When these commands are received, the execution target table necessary for executing the effect for the game round corresponding to each command on the symbol display device 41 is read out.

When a negative determination is made in step S602, or when the process of step S603 is executed, the task process is executed (step S604). In the task processing, by referring to the control data of the current processing times in the execution target table set as the usage target, a drawing instruction is given to the VDP76 in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing. Set various data necessary for the operation. Specifically, as the various data, the address information of the area where the image data of the control target is stored in the memory module 74, the address information of the area where the image data of the control target is transferred in the VRAM 75, and the image data of the control target are used. Information on the target frame areas 82a and 82b for which drawing data should be created, information on coordinates when writing image data to be controlled in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be created, information on scale when writing the image data, And there is information such as a uniform α value (semi-transparent value) when writing the image data.

After that, the drawing list output process is executed (step S605). In the drawing list output processing, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to VDP76. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP76 creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 according to this drawing list. The processing in this VDP 76 will be described in detail later.

The task process of step S604 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, the setting process for starting control is executed (step S701). In the setting process for starting control, it is determined whether or not an individual image to be controlled started exists in the current process round, based on the currently set execution target table. If it exists, the work RAM 73 searches for an empty buffer area for performing various operations in controlling the individual image, and has a one-to-one correspondence with the individual image grasped as the control start target. Allocate free buffer area so that. Further, the initialization process is executed for all the reserved free buffer areas, and the parameter information for starting control according to the individual image is set for the initialized free buffer area.

After that, the control update target is grasped (step S702). The control update target is an individual image for which the control start processing has been completed and may be included in the image for one frame after the current processing.

After that, the background arithmetic processing is executed (step S703). In the background calculation process, the control update target of the backmost still image and the background sprite that constitutes the background image is grasped. In addition, various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value, and α data designation in the virtual two-dimensional plane is calculated and derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the information for control is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in the area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73.

After that, the effect calculation process is executed (step S704). In the effect calculation process, the control update target of the effect sprites constituting the image of the effect to be displayed in various effects such as reach effect, notice effect, and jackpot effect is grasped. In addition, the above-mentioned various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the information for control is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in the area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73.

After that, the symbol calculation process is executed (step S705). In the symbol calculation process, among the symbols that are the targets of the variable display in each game, the control update target of this time is grasped. In addition, the above-mentioned various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the information for control is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in the area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73.

After that, the drawing instruction target grasping process is executed (step S706). In the drawing instruction target grasping process, one frame of the individual image subject to control update by the arithmetic processing of steps S703, S704, and S705 is used for one frame corresponding to the current drawing data creation instruction. Executes the process of grasping the included individual images. The grasp is performed by executing a predetermined operation with reference to the coordinates, rotation angles, and scale information of various individual images. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. It is necessary to select the individual images to be displayed in VDP76 by setting only the individual images to be displayed instead of the individual images specified in the drawing list as all the individual images whose control has already started. There is no need to wastefully draw an individual image that is not a display target even if it is not sorted. As a result, the processing load of VDP76 can be reduced.

<Basic processing in VDP76>
Next, the basic processing executed by VDP76 will be described.

In the VDP76, a process of setting the value of the register 92 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 72, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72, A process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b.

Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 95 for the display CPU 72. Further, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly started by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. 20 (a) to 20 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. The header information is information indicating in which of the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b the drawing data for displaying the image for one frame corresponding to the drawing list is drawn. Information is set. Further, in the header information, the presence / absence of decoding designation and the information of the address of the moving image data to be decoded are set.

In addition to the above header information, a plurality of types of image data used for displaying an image for one frame are set in the drawing list, and further, information on the drawing order of each image data and information on each image data. Parameter information and are set. In detail, the information of the drawing order is set so as to be the numerical information of the serial number, and the information of the image data to be used is set in which each numerical information has a one-to-one correspondence. Further, the parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information of each image data.

The drawing order is set so that the individual image to be displayed so as to be located on the back side of the display surface P in the image for one frame is first drawn. The individual image is a still image defined by still image data such as background data, or a sprite defined by sprite data such as symbol sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 20A, the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, then the sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and then the sprite data B is written. In the image for one frame, each individual image is displayed so as to be on the front side in the order of background image → effect image → symbol.

A plurality of types of parameters are set in the parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), .... Specifically, regarding the background data parameter P (1), as shown in FIG. 20 (b), the address information of the area where the background data is stored in the memory module 74 and the area for transferring the background data in the VRAM 75. Address information, coordinate information indicating the position on the virtual two-dimensional plane when writing background data, rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the virtual two-dimensional plane when writing background data, and background data. Scale information indicating the magnification when writing to the frame areas 82a and 82b with respect to the size set as the initial state of, and a uniform α value indicating the entire transparency information (or transparency information) when writing the background data. And the information of α data designation indicating whether or not α data is applied and the application target are set. As shown in FIG. 20 (c), the types of the above parameters are the same for the sprite data A.

The coordinate information is not set individually for all the pixels constituting the image data, but the information of one coordinate is set for one image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel to which coordinate information is specified. In VDP76, it is possible to recognize that the information of the designated coordinates is one pixel at the center of the image data, and when arranging the image data, one pixel at the center is set to be on the designated coordinates. .. As a result, the information capacity (that is, the amount of data) of the coordinate information to be specified for one image data in the display CPU 72 can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to be able to recognize the coordinates for all the pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to the central pixel, and may be a pixel at a corner such as an upper left or an upper right. Since the sprite data and the still image data are basically defined as a rectangular shape, by using the pixels at the corners as the reference pixels, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can easily recognize the reference pixels.

Further, the uniform α value is transparent information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparent information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data. In the α data, the transparency information can be different for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

Since the α value and α data are set uniformly as described above, in a situation where the transparency of background data and sprite data should be controlled uniformly for all pixels instead of being finely controlled for each pixel. It is possible to reduce the required data capacity by being able to handle with a uniform α value, and it is also possible to finely control the transmittance in pixel units by applying α data.

The drawing process in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the creation of the drawing data specified in the drawing list that has already been received is completed. When the creation of the drawing data is completed, it is determined in step S802 whether or not a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72. If a new drawing list has been received, the corresponding process at the time of reception is executed in step S803.

In the corresponding processing at the time of reception, it is grasped from which frame area 82a or 82b the drawing data for one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is drawn from the information of the target buffer included in the drawing list.

In the following step S804, the content grasping process is executed. In the content grasping process, the image data set as the read target in the drawing list is read from the memory module 74 and written to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Further, in the content grasping process, the type of image data initially set as the drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameter information of the image data is grasped. In the writing process, the image data to be drawn this time is written in the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation target based on the grasping result of the content grasping process in step S804.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the drawing data instructed by the already received drawing list is being created, the drawing list counter is updated in step S806. As a result, the drawing target is switched to the image data in the next drawing order. Then, the processes of steps S804 and S805 are executed for the switched image data. That is, by executing the drawing process a plurality of times, drawing data for one frame of the image specified by one drawing list is created.

It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which only one image data is processed in one drawing process, and a configuration in which a plurality of image data are processed in one drawing process may be used, and the drawing process may be performed. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each processing time of the above, and a configuration in which a different number of image data is processed in each processing time of the drawing processing may be used.

When a negative determination is made in step S802, or after the process of step S805 is executed, it is determined in step S807 whether or not the image signal output for one frame is completed in the display circuit 94. If it is not completed, the main drawing process is terminated as it is, and if it is completed, the V interrupt signal is output to the display CPU 72 in step S808, and then the main drawing process is terminated.

The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within the range of the 20 msec cycle. Further, an image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data. However, since the double buffer method is adopted as described above, the output of the image signal is output to the output. It is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data corresponding to the update timing after one frame for the corresponding frame. The display circuit 94 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame areas 82a and 82b to be referred to each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed, and the control unit 91 is switched by the selector circuit. The frame areas 82a and 82b, which are the drawing targets of the drawing data, are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting the image signal.

<Configuration to also serve as an execution target table>
Next, a configuration for also using the execution target table will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation display of the symbols is performed by the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 set in the symbol display device 41 in each game round (see FIG. 4A). The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set in a plurality of rows such as an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and no number is attached between the main symbols. Sub-designs are arranged one by one. Then, when the game round is started, the symbols finally stopped and displayed in the previous game round are displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 according to the arrangement order of the symbols. The variable display of the symbol is performed. After that, the variation display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped. In this case, since the display mode of the symbols finally stopped and displayed in each game round may be different, the types of symbols displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be different when the game round is started. ..

An example of the variation display mode of the symbol will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 22 (a) shows the execution period of the game times, FIG. 22 (b) shows the acceleration period in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and FIG. 22 (c) shows the high speed period in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. 22 (d) shows the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1, FIG. 22 (e) shows the low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3, and FIG. 22 (f) shows the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2.

At the timing of t1, the game round is started as shown in FIG. 22 (a). At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 22B, moving image display is performed so that the fluctuation display speed of the symbols gradually increases in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The variable display speed in this case is a variable display speed at which the types of symbols displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be identified or easily identified. Due to the existence of the acceleration period in this way, it is possible to set the start mode when the variable display of the symbol is started in each game round to a certain mode, and the player can indicate that the game round has started. Is easier to recognize.

After that, at the timing of t2, the acceleration period ends as shown in FIG. 22 (b), and as shown in FIG. 22 (c), it becomes a high-speed period in which variable display is performed at high speed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In the high-speed period, the fluctuation display speed of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 becomes the fluctuation display speed at which the type of the symbol cannot be identified or is difficult to identify. The type of the symbol displayed on the display surface P is adjusted during the high-speed period. As a result, in a configuration in which the stop result of the current game round is determined regardless of the type of the symbol displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 at the start of the current game round, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 It is possible to adjust the types of symbols that are displayed in standby mode and statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 while not giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 22D, the fluctuation display speed of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from high speed to low speed. When the low-speed display is performed, the variable display of the symbol is performed at a variable display speed at which the type of the symbol can be identified or easily identified. In this case, the low-speed display is performed only in the upper symbol row Z1, and the high-speed display is continued in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 22D, the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, so that the scroll display of the symbols ends and the standby display starts in the upper symbol row Z1. Further, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the fluctuation display speed of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from high speed to low speed. In this case, the low-speed display is performed only in the lower symbol row Z3, the high-speed display is continued in the middle symbol row Z2, and the standby display is continued in the upper symbol row Z1.

After that, as shown in the timing FIG. 22 (e) of t5, when the low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3 ends, the scroll display of the symbols ends and the standby display starts in the lower symbol row Z3. Further, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 22 (f), the fluctuation display speed of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from high speed to low speed. In this case, the low-speed display is performed only in the middle symbol row Z2, and the standby display is continued in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 22 (f), the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2 ends, so that the scroll display of the symbols ends and the standby display starts in the middle symbol row Z2. In this case, the standby display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and then the static display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

When displaying variations of symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the execution target table stored in advance in the memory module 74 is read out, and the display CPU 72 determines the type of symbols to be displayed on the display surface P according to the execution target table. At the same time, various parameters such as the placement position of the symbol to be displayed are determined. Here, the types of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the start of each game round, and the types of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the end of each game round are as follows. It can be different for each game. For example, the variable display of the symbol may be started from the stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23 (a), or the variable display of the symbol may be started from the stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23 (b). There is also. Further, for example, the game round may end in the stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23 (a), or the game round may end in the stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23 (b). In this case, if an execution target table is to be prepared in advance according to each pattern, it is necessary to prepare an execution target table corresponding to each of the possible modes of stopping display at the start of the variable display of the game times. At the same time, it becomes necessary to prepare an execution target table corresponding to each of the possible modes of stopping display at the end of the game. Then, the types of the execution target table become extremely large, and the storage capacity required for storing the execution target table in advance increases.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 uses a common execution target table regardless of the stop display mode at the start of the variable display of the game times, and is common regardless of the stop display mode at the end of the game times. It is configured to use the execution target table. The common execution target table will be described.

The execution target table is provided corresponding to each of the acceleration period, the high speed period, and the low speed period. In this case, the execution target table is provided so that the acceleration period is common to all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. On the other hand, the high-speed period and the low-speed period are not provided in common between the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the execution target table is provided corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In the execution target table, the acceleration period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the high speed period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1 and the low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3 are determined by the presence or absence of the reach effect. It is used regardless, but it is used only when the reach effect does not occur in the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2. When the reach effect occurs, the common execution target table is not used for the low speed period of the middle symbol column Z2, but the dedicated execution target table corresponding to each reach effect is used.

The execution target table is stored in the memory module 74 in advance. Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 24A, the memory module 74 stores in advance an execution target table for controlling the variation display of the symbols of all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 during the acceleration period. The period storage area 101, the first high-speed period storage area 102 in which the execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbol of the upper symbol string Z1 in the high-speed period is stored in advance, and the upper symbol string Z1 in the low-speed period. The first low-speed period storage area 103 in which the execution target table for controlling the variation display of the symbol is stored in advance, and the execution target table for controlling the variation display of the symbol in the middle symbol column Z2 in the high-speed period are stored in advance. The second high-speed period storage area 104, the second low-speed period storage area 105 in which the execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbol of the middle symbol string Z2 in the low-speed period is stored in advance, and the high-speed period. Execution to control the variable display of the symbol of the lower symbol string Z3 in the third high-speed period storage area 106 in which the execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbol of the lower symbol column Z3 is stored in advance and the low-speed period. A third low-speed period storage area 107 in which the target table is stored in advance is provided.

The acceleration period, the high-speed period, and the low-speed period are not constant in relation to the fluctuation display time of the game times, and there are a plurality of types so that there are long and short periods for each. In this case, there is only one type of execution target table for the acceleration period stored in the acceleration period storage area 101, and the acceleration period that can be controlled by the execution target table for the acceleration period is the variation display time of the game times. Of the multiple types of acceleration periods defined in relation to, the period is longer than the longest acceleration period. This makes it possible to use the execution target table for one type of acceleration period, regardless of which type of acceleration period is selected in relation to the variation display time of the game times.

Only one type of execution target table for the high-speed period is stored in each of the first high-speed period storage area 102, the second high-speed period storage area 104, and the third high-speed period storage area 106. The high-speed period that can be controlled by the execution target table for the first high-speed period stored in the storage area 102 for the first high-speed period is a plurality of types of the upper symbol sequence Z1 defined in relation to the variation display time of the game times. It is a period longer than the longest high-speed period in the high-speed period. Further, the high-speed period that can be controlled by the execution target table for the second high-speed period stored in the storage area 104 for the second high-speed period is a plurality of medium symbol rows Z2 defined in relation to the variation display time of the game times. It is a period longer than the longest high-speed period among the types of high-speed periods. Further, the high-speed period that can be controlled by the execution target table for the third high-speed period stored in the storage area 106 for the third high-speed period is a plurality of the following symbol strings Z3 defined in relation to the variation display time of the game times. It is a period longer than the longest high-speed period among the types of high-speed periods. As a result, even if any type of high-speed period is selected in relation to the variation display time of the game times in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the execution for one type of high-speed period is executed for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It becomes possible to use the target table.

A plurality of types of execution target tables for the low speed period are stored in each of the first low speed period storage area 103, the second low speed period storage area 105, and the third low speed period storage area 107. That is, in the storage area 103 for the first low speed period, a plurality of types of execution target tables for the first low speed period are stored so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the types of the low speed period of the upper symbol column Z1, and the second low speed is stored. A plurality of types of execution target tables for the second low-speed period are stored in the period storage area 105 so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the types of the low-speed period of the middle symbol column Z2, and the third low-speed period storage area 107 is stored. A plurality of types of execution target tables for the third low-speed period are stored so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the types of the low-speed period of the lower symbol column Z3. Since the execution target table for the low speed period is prepared for each type of low speed period in this way, it corresponds to each low speed period by controlling the variation display of the symbol using the execution target table for the low speed period. It is possible to execute the standby display of the symbol and the static display of the symbol at the timing of the operation.

FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period stored in advance in the acceleration period storage area 101, and FIG. 25B is the first high-speed period storage area 102. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution target table T11 for the 1st high-speed period which is stored in advance in FIG. 26, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the target table T12. The execution target table for the second high-speed period and the execution target table for the third high-speed period have different maximum values of pointer information from the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period, but the other points are the first. It is the same as the execution target table T11 for the high-speed period. Further, an execution target table of a type different from the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period stored in the storage area 103 for the first low speed period, an execution target table for the second low speed period, and an execution target table for the third low speed period. The execution target table is the same as the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period, although the maximum value of the pointer information is different from the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period.

As shown in FIGS. 25 (a), 25 (b), and 26, pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame is set in each of the execution target tables T10 to T12, and each pointer is set. Corresponding to the information, the adjustment area of the display symbol and the information of the content of the task are set.

Information for specifying the type of the symbol to be displayed is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol. Specifically, in the adjustment area of the display symbol, information corresponding to one symbol in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is set. Here, three symbols are displayed at the same time in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, but the information set in the adjustment area of the displayed symbol is the type of the symbol existing at the beginning in the moving direction of the symbol. Corresponds to the information of. Further, as already explained, the total number of symbols arranged in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is different. Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have the main symbol and the sub symbol 18 in total. While the individual symbols are arranged, in the middle symbol row Z2, 20 symbols including the main symbol and the sub symbol are arranged. Therefore, when the execution target table is used to control the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the display symbol adjustment area corresponds to any of "1" to "18". When the execution target table is used to control the variable display of the symbol in the middle symbol column Z2, the display symbol adjustment area corresponds to any of "1" to "20". Information is set.

For example, when "1" is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the predetermined pointer information in the execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbol in the upper symbol column Z1, the predetermined pointer information is set. In the frame corresponding to, the main symbol of "1", the sub symbol between "1" and "9", and the main symbol of "9" are displayed targets. When "2" is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol, the sub symbol between "1" and "9" and the main symbol of "9" in the frame corresponding to the predetermined pointer information are set. , And the sub-designs between "9" and "8" are displayed.

In the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols are scroll-displayed as described above, but the types of symbols to be scroll-displayed are the same over a plurality of frames. Therefore, the information of the same symbol is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol over a plurality of consecutive pointer information. Then, the information set in the adjustment area of the displayed symbol is changed as the value of the pointer information increases, so that the type of the symbol to be displayed in the corresponding symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is changed.

The task content information includes coordinate information indicating the placement position of the symbol to be used in each frame (that is, the drawing position in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be written in the frame buffer 82) and the size of the symbol to be used. Parameter information such as scale information indicating is set. In this case, the coordinate information is set with information that determines the arrangement position of each of the three symbols to be displayed in the corresponding frame. Therefore, it is possible to specify the coordinate information corresponding to each of the three symbols to be displayed specified from the information in the adjustment area of the display symbol from the information of the task content. For example, when "1" is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol of a plurality of continuous pointer information in the execution target table applied to the above symbol column Z1, the information of the content of the task corresponding to the plurality of pointer information. The arrangement position of the main symbol of "1", the sub symbol between "1" and "9", and the main symbol of "9" in the corresponding symbol sequence gradually changes in the direction of the scroll display. Coordinate information such as is set.

In a configuration in which a plurality of symbols corresponding to the information set in the display symbol adjustment area are set as the display target and the parameter information of the plurality of symbols is set in the task content information, the display symbol adjustment area Is an area that can be rewritten by the control of the display CPU 72 after the execution target table is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73. This rewriting is performed according to the type of the symbol to be displayed in the corresponding symbol columns Z1 to Z3 at the timing when the use of the corresponding execution target table is started. Further, by scrolling the symbols, the types of the three symbols to be displayed in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3 change with the passage of time. The switching timing of the three symbol types to be displayed is predetermined in each execution target table T10 to T12. Therefore, when rewriting the adjustment area of the display symbol, the pointer information corresponding to the first pointer information to the next switching timing is set as one pointer group, and is included between the one switching timing and the next switching timing. When the pointer information is set to one pointer group, the same symbol information is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to each pointer information included in one pointer group, and different symbols are set between different pointer groups. Information is set.

Information for specifying the type of the symbol to be displayed is set in the display symbol adjustment area in each execution target table T10 to T12 as described above, but the information to be set in the display symbol adjustment area is displayed CPU72. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 24B, the work RAM 73 is provided with a first adjustment counter 111, a second adjustment counter 112, and a third adjustment counter 113 as an area for specifying the above. There is. The first adjustment counter 111 corresponds to the upper symbol row Z1, the second adjustment counter 112 corresponds to the middle symbol row Z2, and the third adjustment counter 113 corresponds to the lower symbol row Z3. ..

In each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113, information on the type of the symbol existing at the head when the symbol moves from right to left in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is set. The display CPU 72 changes the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 corresponding to the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 each time the symbols existing at the head of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 are changed to the symbols in the next order. Update to the information of the type of the later symbol. As a result, the information set in the adjustment counters 111 to 113 always corresponds to the type of the symbol existing at the head of the corresponding symbol strings Z1 to Z3. When the display CPU 72 starts controlling the variation display of the symbol by the predetermined execution target table, the display CPU 72 displays the information corresponding to the information of the symbol type set in the adjustment counters 111 to 113 in the predetermined execution target table. Set in the symbol adjustment area.

When the variation display of the symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 is started and the first symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 is the main symbol of "3" as shown in FIG. 23 (a), the value of the first adjustment counter 111. Is "5". Here, the relationship between the values set in the adjustment counters 111 to 113 and the type of the leading symbol will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 27. As already explained, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have a total of 18 symbols including the main symbol and the sub symbol, whereas the middle symbol row Z2 has the main symbol and the sub symbol. Since a total of 20 symbols are arranged in total, the number of types of values that can be taken by the corresponding adjustment counters 111 to 113 is different.

In the case of the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), the values of "1" to "18" can be taken, and each value is the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol. There is a one-to-one correspondence with each of the 18 symbols in each of the columns Z3. In this case, the odd number corresponds to the main symbol and the even number corresponds to the sub symbol. Further, in the upper symbol row Z1, the main symbols are arranged in descending order with respect to the scroll direction from right to left, whereas in the lower symbol row Z3, the main symbols are arranged in the scroll direction from right to left. Although they are arranged in ascending order, the relationship between the values that can be taken by the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113 and the type of the first symbol is the relationship between the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113. Is the same as.

In the case of the second adjustment counter 112, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), values of "1" to "20" can be taken, and each value is paired with a total of 20 symbols in the middle symbol sequence Z2. It corresponds with 1. In this case, the relationship between the values of "1" to "18" and the type of the first symbol is the same as in the case of the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113. Further, the value of "19" corresponds to the main symbol of "4" additionally arranged between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1", and the value of "20" corresponds to the corresponding. It corresponds to the sub-symbol between the main symbol of "4" and the main symbol of "1".

The setting mode of information for the adjustment area of the display symbol will be described by taking as an example the case of setting the mode of variable display of the symbol in the acceleration period, the high speed period, and the low speed period in the above symbol sequence Z1. FIG. 28A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period, and FIG. 28B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period. In addition, as for the setting mode of the information for the adjustment area of the display symbol of the execution target table corresponding to each of the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the upper symbol row Z1 has the symbol arrangement mode in descending order. The symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 differ in that the symbol arrangement mode is in ascending order, but the other points are the information setting mode for the display symbol adjustment area of the execution target table corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1. It is the same.

When the effect for game rounds is started in the state shown in FIG. 23A, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is “5”. Further, in the upper symbol row Z1, the symbols are arranged so that the main symbols are in descending order with respect to the scroll direction from right to left. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), the display symbol adjustment area in the table T10 for the acceleration period read from the storage area 101 for the acceleration period and corresponding to the upper symbol column Z1. , "5" corresponding to the current first symbol is set for the first pointer group, and the symbol to be controlled in this case is between the main symbol of "3" and "3" and "2". It becomes the sub symbol of and the main symbol of "2". Further, for the pointer group in the next order, "4" corresponding to the symbol in the next order is set for the current first symbol, and for the pointer group in the next order, the next order is set. "3" corresponding to the symbol of the next order is set for the symbol of the next order, and "2" corresponding to the symbol of the next order for the symbol of the next order is set for the pointer group of the next order. Is set. That is, the numerical values are set for the adjustment area of the display symbol so that the numerical values are in descending order toward the pointer group on the rear side.

When the control of the acceleration period of the upper symbol sequence Z1 by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period in which the adjustment area of the displayed symbol is set is completed, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 becomes "1". ing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28B, the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period read from the storage area 102 for the first high-speed period is set with respect to the first pointer group. Therefore, "1" corresponding to the current first symbol is set, and "18" corresponding to the next order symbol is set for the current first symbol for the pointer group in the next order. .. That is, in the upper symbol string Z1, 18 symbols are circulated while scrolling from right to left, so that the pointer group in which "1" is set in the adjustment area of the displayed symbol is in the following order. "18" is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol in the existing pointer group. Further, for the pointer group after that, the value is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so as to be a serial number and in descending order of the numbers.

Here, as described above, the high-speed period that can be controlled by the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period is the longest among the plurality of high-speed periods of the upper symbol sequence Z1 defined in relation to the variation display time of the game times. It is a period longer than the high-speed period of. In this case, when the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period is used, all of the display symbol adjustment areas in the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period are irrelevant to the current high-speed period. Although the value is set for, the control by the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period is terminated when the control by the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the high-speed period is completed, and the first low-speed period is completed. Switch to control by the execution target table T12 for. In this case, when the control corresponding to the last pointer information in the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current high-speed period is completed, the control by the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period ends.

This also applies to the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period. That is, as described above, the acceleration period that can be controlled by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period is the longest among the plurality of types of acceleration periods of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 defined in relation to the fluctuation display time of the game times. It is a period longer than the acceleration period. In this case, when the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period is used, the value is applied to all the adjustment areas of the display symbols in the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period regardless of the acceleration period this time. However, when the control by the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current acceleration period is completed, the control by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period is terminated, and the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period is terminated. Switch to control by. In this case, when the control corresponding to the last pointer information in the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current acceleration period is completed, the control by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period ends.

When the pointer group in which "17" is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol in FIG. 28B corresponds to the end timing of the current high-speed period, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is "16". It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29, the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period read from the storage area 103 for the first low speed period is the current state for the first pointer group. "16" corresponding to the first symbol of is set, and for the pointer group after that, the value is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so as to be a serial number and in descending order of the numbers.

As described above, the values of the adjustment areas of the display symbols in the execution target tables T10 to T12 are set by using the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113. As a result, even if the execution target tables T10 to T12 are configured to be used for a plurality of types of situations, the variation display of the symbol is controlled in a manner corresponding to the type of the symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. It becomes possible to do.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for controlling the variable display of the symbol while also using the execution target table will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a command correspondence process executed by the display CPU 72. The command correspondence process is executed in step S603 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18).

When the command for starting the fluctuation is received from the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 (step S901: YES), the execution target table for the acceleration period is read out from the storage area 101 for the acceleration period to the work RAM 73 (step S902). In this case, since the execution target table for the acceleration period is read out corresponding to each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3, the work RAM 73 has a total of three execution target tables for the acceleration period. Is read out. However, these three execution target tables for the acceleration period are all the same type of table.

After that, the execution target tables for the high-speed period for each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 are read out from the high-speed period storage areas 102, 104, 106 to the work RAM 73 (step S903). Specifically, the execution target table for the first high-speed period corresponding to the upper symbol column Z1 is read from the storage area 102 for the first high-speed period, and the second high-speed period storage area 104 corresponds to the middle symbol string Z2. 2 The execution target table for the high-speed period is read, and the execution target table for the third high-speed period corresponding to the lower symbol column Z3 is read from the storage area 106 for the third high-speed period.

After that, it is determined from the information of the fluctuation display time in the current game round included in the command for starting the fluctuation whether or not the reach effect occurs in the current game round (step S904). When the reach effect does not occur (step S904: NO), each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 is subjected to the execution target table for the low speed period corresponding to the variation display time of the current game times. Read from the low-speed period storage areas 103, 105, 107 to the work RAM 73 (step S905). As described above, a plurality of types of low-speed periods are set in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the low-speed period corresponds to the variation display time of the game times. Therefore, in step S905, the execution target table for the low-speed period corresponding to the variation display time of the current game times is read out. Specifically, the execution target table for the first low-speed period corresponding to the current fluctuation display time (that is, the low-speed period of the upper symbol column Z1 this time) is read from the storage area 103 for the first low-speed period, and the second low-speed period The execution target table for the second low-speed period corresponding to the current fluctuation display time (that is, the low-speed period of the middle symbol column Z2 this time) is read from the storage area 105, and the fluctuation display of this time is displayed from the storage area 107 for the third low-speed period. The execution target table for the third low-speed period corresponding to the time (that is, the low-speed period of the lower symbol column Z3 this time) is read.

When the reach effect occurs (step S904: YES), the execution target table for the low speed period corresponding to the variation display time of the current game times is stored for the first low speed period for each of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. Read from the area 103 and the storage area 107 for the third low speed period to the work RAM 73 (step S906). Specifically, the execution target table for the first low-speed period corresponding to the current fluctuation display time (that is, the low-speed period of the upper symbol column Z1 this time) is read from the storage area 103 for the first low-speed period, and the third low-speed period The execution target table for the third low-speed period corresponding to the current fluctuation display time (that is, the low-speed period of the lower symbol column Z3 this time) is read from the storage area 107. After that, the dedicated execution target table corresponding to the current reach effect is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S907).

When the process of step S905 or step S907 is executed, the information corresponding to the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 is used for the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table for each acceleration period read in step S902. The setting process is executed (step S908). In the setting process, the execution target table for the acceleration period read out for controlling the variation display of the symbol in the upper symbol column Z1 is the first for the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the first pointer group. The value of the adjustment counter 111 is set, and for the pointer group after that, the value is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so as to be a serial number for each pointer group and in descending order of the numbers. Further, for the execution target table for the acceleration period read out for controlling the fluctuation display of the symbols in the middle symbol column Z2, the second adjustment counter for the adjustment area of the display symbols corresponding to the first pointer group. The value of 112 is set, and for the pointer group after that, the value is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so that the pointer group has a serial number and the numerical order is in ascending order. Further, for the execution target table for the acceleration period read out for controlling the fluctuation display of the symbols in the lower symbol column Z3, the third adjustment counter for the adjustment area of the display symbols corresponding to the first pointer group. The value of 113 is set, and for the pointer group after that, the value is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so as to be a serial number for each pointer group and in ascending order of the numbers.

When a negative determination is made in step S901, or when the process of step S908 is executed, other processes are executed (step S909). In other processing, when a command different from the command for starting fluctuation is received, the processing corresponding to the received command is executed.

Next, the normal variation arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal variation calculation process is executed in the symbol calculation process of step S705 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the game turn effect is executed and the reach effect is not performed. ..

First, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1001). The update timing of the first adjustment counter 111 is the pointer information in the last order in the pointer group in which the pointer information currently referred to in the execution target table used for the upper symbol string Z1 is one. This is the case. When it is the update timing of the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1001: YES), the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is subtracted by 1 (step S1002). Then, when the value of the first adjustment counter 111 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1003: YES), the maximum value "18" is set in the first adjustment counter 111 (step). S1004).

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 or the third adjustment counter 113. The update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 is the pointer information in the last order in the pointer group in which the pointer information currently referred to in the execution target table used for the middle symbol column Z2 is one. This is the case. The update timing of the third adjustment counter 113 is the pointer information in the last order in the pointer group in which the pointer information currently referred to in the execution target table used for the lower symbol column Z3 is one. This is the case.

When it is the update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 or the third adjustment counter 113 (step S1005: YES), the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated this time are added by 1 (step S1006). In this case, only one of the second adjustment counter 112 and the third adjustment counter 113 may be the update target, and both the second adjustment counter 112 and the third adjustment counter 113 are the update targets. In some cases. After that, it is determined whether or not the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated after the 1 addition exceed the maximum value (step S1007). In this case, the maximum value of the second adjustment counter 112 is "20", and the maximum value of the third adjustment counter 113 is "18". When the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated exceed the maximum value, the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 whose maximum value exceeds the maximum value are set to "1" which is the minimum value (step S1008).

In step S1009, it is determined whether or not there is a table whose switching timing is set in the execution target tables used in each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3. .. If the switching timing is the acceleration period, the current pointer information in the execution target table for the acceleration period is the last pointer of the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the acceleration period corresponding to the variation display time of the current game times. This applies when it is information. Since the acceleration period is constant in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the switching timing from the execution target table for the acceleration period to the execution target table for the high-speed period occurs simultaneously in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Further, if the switching timing is a high-speed period, the current pointer information in the execution target table for the high-speed period corresponds to the end timing of the high-speed period corresponding to the variation display time of the current game times in the corresponding symbol columns Z1 to Z3. This applies when it is the last pointer information of the pointer group corresponding to. Since the high-speed period is different in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the switching timing from the execution target table for the high-speed period to the execution target table for the low-speed period occurs individually in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

When it is the switching timing of the execution target table for any of the upper symbol column Z1, the middle symbol column Z2, and the lower symbol column Z3 (step S1009: YES), the execution target table change process is executed (step S1010). ). In this case, the execution target table to be used is changed for all of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 corresponding to the switching timing. In the change process, when the execution target table for the acceleration period is used, the execution target for the high-speed period that has already been read into the work RAM 73 in step S903 in the command correspondence process (FIG. 30). When the usage target is changed to the table and the execution target table for the high-speed period is the usage target, it has already been read into the work RAM 73 in steps S905 to S907 in the command correspondence process (FIG. 30). Change the usage target to the execution target table.

After that, the setting process based on the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 corresponding to the execution target table is executed for the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table newly determined as the execution target. The content of the setting process is as described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. As a result, the content of the execution target table newly determined as the target of use is changed to the mode corresponding to the display content of the current symbol.

When a negative determination is made in step S1009, or when the process of step S1011 is executed, the pointer update process is executed (step S1012). In the pointer update process, the pointer information to be referenced in the execution target table to be used is updated to the pointer information in the following order for each of the upper symbol column Z1, the middle symbol column Z2, and the lower symbol column Z3. do. However, the pointer information update processing is not executed for the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 whose execution target table to be used is changed in the current processing time of the normal fluctuation calculation processing.

After that, for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the type of image data corresponding to the symbol to be displayed is grasped (step S1013). In grasping this, from the value of the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the current pointer information in the execution target table used in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbol columns Z1 to corresponding to the execution target table. The type of the first symbol in Z3 is grasped, and the types of the following two kinds of symbols are grasped. In addition, grasping the type of such a symbol is performed for all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

After that, various parameter information of all the symbols to be displayed this time is grasped from the contents of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the execution target table used in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The parameter information includes the coordinates of the three symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the coordinates of the three symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, and the coordinates of the three symbols in the lower symbol row Z3.

When the normal fluctuation calculation process is executed as described above, the symbol grasped in step S1013 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). .. In addition, parameter information applied to those symbols is set in the drawing list.

As described above, since the execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbol is also used in various situations, it is possible to reduce the number of execution target tables stored in advance in the memory module 74. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for storing the execution target table in advance in the memory module 74. Further, even if the execution target table is also used, the type of the symbol to be displayed is adjusted by using the adjustment counters 111 to 113, so that the variable display of the symbol can be appropriately controlled. It will be possible.

There is only one type of execution target table for the acceleration period, and the acceleration period that can be controlled by the execution target table for the acceleration period is the longest of the multiple types of acceleration periods defined in relation to the fluctuation display time of the game times. The period is longer than the acceleration period. Then, regardless of the type of acceleration period, the execution target table for the acceleration period is used, and the range of pointer information referred to in the execution target table is changed in relation to the type of the acceleration period of the execution target. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storing the execution target table in advance in the memory module 74. In particular, one type of execution target table for the acceleration period is commonly used for all symbol columns Z1 to Z3. From this point as well, it is possible to reduce the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period.

There is only one type of execution target table for the high-speed period prepared for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the high-speed period that can be controlled by the execution target table for each high-speed period corresponds to the corresponding symbol columns Z1 to Z1. For Z3, it is a period equal to or longer than the longest high-speed period among a plurality of types of high-speed periods defined in relation to the variable display time of the game times. Then, with respect to one symbol column Z1 to Z3, the execution target table for one type of high-speed period is used regardless of any type of high-speed period, and the execution target is related to the type of high-speed period of the execution target. The range of pointer information referenced in the table is changed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of execution target tables for the high-speed period, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storing the execution target table in advance in the memory module 74.

Even if the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period and the execution target table for the high-speed period is kept small as described above, switching of the execution target tables is the last order in the pointer group to be referenced. It is performed at the timing when the control by the pointer information of is completed. As a result, in the execution target table newly used, the control may be started from the pointer information in the first order in one pointer group, so that the execution target table can be appropriately switched.

In each execution target table, a display symbol adjustment area is set so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the task content in each pointer information. Then, by adjusting the information set in the adjustment area of the display symbol, the type of the symbol to which the content of each task is applied is changed. As a result, it is possible to grasp the type of the target symbol to which the information of the task content is applied at each update timing only by referring to each execution target table.

Further, when the use of the execution target table is started, the symbol type information is set for each of the display symbol adjustment areas included in the execution target table. As a result, it is not necessary to execute the process for changing the information of the adjustment area of the display symbol for the execution target table during the execution of the control using the execution target table. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration.

<Another form related to the combined use of the execution target table>
-The table may be configured so that the display symbol adjustment area is not provided. In this case, the type of the symbol to be displayed is for adjustment by setting at least the information of the trigger for switching the values of the corresponding adjustment counters 111 to 113 and the information of the task in the execution target table. It becomes possible to grasp from the counters 111 to 113. According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the execution target table in that it is not necessary to set the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table.

-When all types of individual images are controlled during the control period using one execution target table, the type of individual image to which the execution target table is applied is always constant, but the execution target table The order of the individual images to be applied may be different for each game. Therefore, in this case, the type of the individual image to be applied to the execution target table is not adjusted, but the order of the individual images to be applied to the execution target table is adjusted.

-A configuration that also serves as an execution target table may be applied to a configuration in which a specific variation display is performed using only one type of individual image among a plurality of types of individual images. In this case, in the execution target table, information for determining the operation content of the individual image to be executed for the specific variation display is set in chronological order, and the type of the individual image to which the information is applied is adjusted. The Rukoto.

-Instead of the configuration in which the execution target table for the acceleration period is provided in common for all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the execution target table for the acceleration period is provided for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. May be. Further, the execution target table for the high-speed period may be provided so as to be commonly used for all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

-Switching between the execution target table for the acceleration period and the execution target table for the high-speed period is limited to the configuration performed at the timing when the control by the pointer information of the last order in the pointer group to be referenced is completed. It may be the timing when the control by other pointer information is completed. However, regardless of which acceleration period or high-speed period the switching occurs, it is preferable that the timing is set as the timing at which the control by the pointer information in a predetermined order in the pointer group is completed.

<Structure for performing loop display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a loop display effect will be described.

32 (a) and 32 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the loop display effect. In the loop display effect, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the loop display character G4 is displayed behind the symbols G1 to G3 that enable notification of the content corresponding to the result of the hit / fail determination in the MPU 62 of the main control device 50. At the same time, the loop display background G5 is displayed behind the loop display character G4. In the loop display effect, the types of symbols G1 to G3 are different from those in FIG. 4 (b), and the mode of variable display of symbols in a plurality of columns of symbols is also different from that in FIG. 4 (b). Is in a different aspect. Specifically, three cubic-shaped base symbol images G6 to G8 are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and numerical symbols G1 to G3 are displayed in front of each base symbol image G6 to G8. To. Then, when displaying the variation of the symbol, the base symbol images G6 to G8 rotate in the vertical direction around the rotation axis extending in the horizontal direction so as to pass through the center of the base symbol images G6 to G8, and each base is rotated along with the rotation. The symbols G1 to G3 displayed on the front surface of the symbol images G6 to G8 are changed. The trigger for changing between the display mode of the symbol shown in FIG. 4 (b) and the display mode of the symbol shown in FIG. 32 (a) is arbitrary, but for example, there are a plurality of types of display modes, and the first display mode is present. In the second display mode, the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 4 (b) may be used, and the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 32 (a) may be displayed in the second display mode.

In the loop display effect, the loop display character G4 is displayed so as to repeatedly perform a series of operations. Specifically, in a situation where the rotation display of the base symbol images G6 to G8 is not performed, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the base symbol images G6 to G8 are stopped for a unit period of staying in a display state as if they were stopped. The loop display character G4 is displayed so as to perform the operation and repeat the stopped operation (the display content is also referred to as a stopped display). As the stationary operation, for example, an operation in which the loop display character G4 moves up and down with the arms folded can be considered. On the other hand, in the situation where the rotation display is performed in any of the base symbol images G6 to G8, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), in the display state of moving in a predetermined direction, during the moving unit period. The loop display character G4 is displayed so as to perform the moving operation and repeat the moving operation (note that the display content is also referred to as the moving display). As the moving operation, for example, an operation in which the loop display character G4 is running in a predetermined direction can be considered.

In the loop display effect, the loop display background G5 does not cause background scrolling as shown in FIG. 32 (a) when the loop display character G4 is operating while the loop display character G4 is stationary. It is displayed so that the player can recognize that the background is continuously displayed. On the other hand, in a situation where the loop display character G4 is performing an operation during movement, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), the loop display character G4 is displayed as if it is moving in a predetermined direction. Along with this, the loop display background G5 is displayed so that the background image scrolls in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction. In this case, the background G5 for loop display is displayed so that a series of background images scroll over the background movement unit period, and the series of scrolling of the background image is repeated every time the background movement unit period elapses. Is displayed.

The flow of the loop display effect will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 33. 33 (a) shows the execution period of the game times, and FIG. 33 (b) shows the periodic display flow of the loop display character G4 in the situation where the moving operation is performed, and FIG. 33 (c) shows. Shows the periodic display flow of the loop display character G4 in the situation where the stationary operation is performed, and FIG. 33 (d) shows the scroll display flow of the loop display background G5.

At the timing of t1, the game rotation is started as shown in FIG. 33 (a), so that the variable display of the symbols G1 to G3 is started. Further, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (c), the loop display character G4 starts the moving operation from the state in which the stopped operation is being performed, and is also shown in FIG. As shown in 33 (d), the scroll display is also started in the loop display background G5.

After that, the moving operation is repeated in the loop display character G4 until the timing of t6, which is the timing at which the current game round ends, and the scroll display of a series of background images is repeated in the loop display background G5. Specifically, the loop display character G4 has one execution time of the moving operation in each moving unit period Tc1 of t1 timing to t2 timing, t2 timing to t3 timing, and t3 timing to t4 timing. Is done. In this case, the next one execution time of the moving operation is started at the timing of t2 when one execution time of the moving operation ends, and the next one execution time of the moving operation ends at the timing of t3 when the one execution time of the moving operation ends. One execution time is started, and the next one execution time of the moving operation is started at the timing of t4 when one execution time of the moving operation is completed. Further, the display mode of the loop display character G4 at the start timing of each execution time of the moving operation is the same, and the loop display character at the timing when the same time has elapsed from the start timing of the execution time of the moving operation. The display mode of G4 is the same.

Further, in the loop display background G5, one execution of a series of scroll display of the background image is performed in the background movement unit period Tc2 from the timing of t1 to the timing of t5. In this case, the next one execution of the scroll display is started at the timing of t5 when one execution of the scroll display of the series of background images ends. Further, the display mode of the loop display background G5 at the start timing of each execution time of the scroll display is the same, and the loop display background at the timing when the same time has elapsed from the start timing of the execution time of the scroll display. The display mode of G5 is the same.

In the above configuration, the moving unit period Tc1 is shorter than the background moving unit period Tc2. Therefore, even if one execution time of the moving operation in the loop display character G4 and one execution time of the scroll display of the series of background images in the loop display background G5 are started at the same time, the end timing of each execution time is It will be different. Further, the number of times that one execution of the moving motion is performed in one game time may be different from the number of times that one execution time of scroll display of a series of background images is performed in one game time.

After that, at the timing of t6, the end timing of the game round is reached as shown in FIG. 33 (a), so that the loop display character G4 is moving as shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (c). The operation is switched from the state in which the operation is performed to the state in which the operation is stopped, and as shown in FIG. 33 (d), the background G5 for loop display is stopped and displayed from the state in which the scroll display of a series of background images is performed. Can be switched to the current state. In this case, although the timing of t6 is the timing in the middle of one execution of the moving operation in the loop display character G4, the moving operation is ended at the timing in the middle and the stopped operation is started. Further, the timing of t6 is the timing in the middle of one execution in the scroll display of a series of background images in the background G5 for loop display, and the stop display of the background G5 for loop display is displayed in the state of being displayed at the timing of t6. It will be started.

The stopped operation is started in the loop display character G4 at the timing of t6, and the stopped operation is repeated in the loop display character G4 until the timing of t10, which is the timing at which the next game round is started. Specifically, the loop display character G4 has one execution time of the stopped operation in each of the stopped unit periods Tc3 of the timing of t6 to the timing of t7, the timing of t7 to the timing of t8, and the timing of t8 to the timing of t9. Is done. In this case, the next one execution of the stopped operation is started at the timing of t7 when one execution of the stopped operation ends, and the next one of the stopped operation is started at the timing of t8 when one execution of the stopped operation ends. One execution time is started, and the next one execution time of the stopped operation is started at the timing of t9 when one execution time of the stopped operation is completed. Further, the display mode of the loop display character G4 at the start timing of each execution time of the stopped operation is the same, and the loop display character at the timing when the same time has elapsed from the start timing of the execution times of the stopped operation. The display mode of G4 is the same. The stationary unit period Tc3 is shorter than the moving unit period Tc1. Therefore, when compared in the same execution period, the number of times of one execution of the stationary operation is larger than the number of times of one execution of the moving operation.

After that, at the timing of t10, the game round is newly started as shown in FIG. 33 (a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the timing of the t10 is the timing in which the loop display character G4 is in the middle of one execution of the stopped operation, but the loop display character G4 performs the stopped operation. The operation while moving is started from the state in the middle of the movement. Then, the loop display character G4 repeatedly executes the moving operation as in the case of the timing of t1 to the timing of t6.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), the loop display background G5 is stopped and displayed with the contents of the background image at that time when the previous game round ends at the timing of t6, and the stopped display is displayed. Is continued until the timing of t10. Therefore, at the timing of t10 when the new game round is started, the scroll display of the series of background images is restarted from the stopped display state. That is, the scroll display of the series of background images is temporarily stopped from the timing of t6 to the timing of t10, and the scroll display of the series of background images is performed in the state where the flow up to the timing of t6 is taken over at the timing of t10. It will be restarted.

When the scroll display effect is executed as described above, the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 are both displayed behind the symbols G1 to G3, and the loop display character G4 and the loop are displayed during the game round. Although a series of displays over a predetermined period are repeated in both the display backgrounds G5, the loop display character G4 repeats the stationary operation in the situation where the game round is not executed, whereas the loop display background is repeated. In G5, the scroll display of a series of background images is stopped and displayed. In this case, if the table for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 is set as the same table, a table during the non-gaming round is prepared and the non-gaming round is being prepared. It becomes necessary to prepare a number of tables corresponding to all the timings that can be stopped and displayed in the loop display background G5, or to fix the timing of stop display in the loop display background G5. If an attempt is made to prepare a table during non-game rotation for a number of minutes corresponding to all the timings that can be stopped and displayed in the loop display background G5, the number of the tables increases and the storage capacity of the memory module 74 is compressed, resulting in a loop. If an attempt is made to fix the timing at which the display background G5 is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the loop display background G5 during the non-game round is standardized regardless of the timing at which the game round ends.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a table for displaying and controlling the loop display character G4 and a table for displaying and controlling the loop display background G5 are separately prepared. Hereinafter, the contents of the data stored in advance in the memory module 74 for executing the loop display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 34 (a).

As shown in FIG. 34A, the image data group 121 for loop display is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as data for performing the loop display effect. The image data group 121 for loop display includes image data for displaying base symbol images G6 to G8, image data for displaying symbols G1 to G3 in base symbol images G6 to G8, and loop display character G4. Image data for displaying and image data for displaying the background G5 for loop display are included. In this case, the image data for displaying the loop display character G4 includes a plurality of types of image data used when performing a stationary operation and a plurality of types of images used when performing a moving operation. Contains data. In addition, there are a plurality of types of image data for displaying the loop display background G5.

In the memory module 74, in addition to the image data group 121 for loop display, a character retention table 122, a character movement table 123, and a background table 124 are stored in advance. The character staying table 122 is a table referred to for causing the loop display character G4 to repeatedly perform the staying operation. The character movement table 123 is a table referred to for causing the loop display character G4 to repeatedly perform an operation during movement. The background table 124 is a table referred to for scrolling a series of background images in a situation where a moving operation is performed by the loop display character G4.

35 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the character retention table 122, FIG. 35 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the character movement table 123, and FIG. 35 (c) is for the background. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table 124. As shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c), pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame is set in each of the tables 122 to 124, and the pointer information corresponds to each pointer information. Information on the contents of the task is set. In the task content information, information for specifying the type of image data to be displayed in each corresponding frame is set, and the position of the image data set as the display target (that is, the frame buffer) is set. Parameter information such as coordinate information indicating the frame areas 82a and 82b to be written in 82) and scale information indicating the size of the image data set as the display target is set.

In detail, the character stationary table 122 is set with pointer information (“0” to “99”) for the number of frames corresponding to the stationary unit period Tc3. The content of the task corresponding to each pointer information includes the image data of the loop display character G4 for displaying the loop display character G4 at one timing of the stopped operation in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. The type and parameter information to be applied to the image data are set. When the drawing timing of an image for one frame is reached, the next pointer information becomes the reference target this time with respect to the pointer information that was the reference target in the previous drawing timing, and a loop is performed according to the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information. By executing the display control of the display character G4, the loop display character G4 performs a stationary operation. Further, when the display control corresponding to the last pointer information of the character staying table 122 is completed during the period in which the loop display character G4 is made to perform the staying operation, the pointer information to be referred to is the first of the character staying table 122. It will return to the pointer information of. As a result, it is possible to repeatedly execute the stopped operation by using the character stopping table 122 in which the display control data corresponding to one execution of the stopped operation is set.

In the character movement table 123, pointer information (“0” to “199”) for the number of frames corresponding to the moving unit period Tc1 is set. The content of the task corresponding to each pointer information includes the image data of the loop display character G4 for displaying the loop display character G4 at one timing of the moving operation in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. The type and parameter information to be applied to the image data are set. When the drawing timing of an image for one frame is reached, the next pointer information becomes the reference target this time with respect to the pointer information that was the reference target in the previous drawing timing, and a loop is performed according to the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information. By executing the display control of the display character G4, the moving operation is performed in the loop display character G4. Further, when the display control corresponding to the last pointer information of the character moving table 123 is completed during the period in which the loop display character G4 is made to perform the moving operation, the pointer information to be referred to is the first of the character moving table 123. It will return to the pointer information of. This makes it possible to repeatedly execute the moving operation by using the character moving table 123 in which the display control data corresponding to one execution of the moving operation is set.

In the background table 124, pointer information (“0” to “599”) corresponding to the number of frames corresponding to the background movement unit period Tc2 is set. The content of the task corresponding to each pointer information includes the type of image data of the loop display background G5 for displaying the scroll display at one timing in the loop display background G5 in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. And the parameter information to be applied to the image data is set. When the drawing timing of an image for one frame is reached, the next pointer information becomes the reference target this time with respect to the pointer information that was the reference target in the previous drawing timing, and a loop is performed according to the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information. By executing the display control of the display background G5, a series of scroll displays of the background image is performed in the loop display background G5. Further, when the display control corresponding to the last pointer information of the background table 124 is completed during the period in which the background G5 for loop display performs the scroll display, the pointer information to be referred to is the first pointer of the background table 124. It will return to the information. This makes it possible to repeatedly execute the scroll display by using the background table 124 in which the display control data corresponding to one execution of the scroll display is set.

In a configuration in which the tables 122 and 123 for display control of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for display control of the loop display background G5 are separately provided, the stationary operation of the loop display character G4 is performed. FIG. 34 (b) is to synchronize the start and the stop of the scroll display of the loop display background G5 with the start of the moving operation of the loop display character G4 and the start of the scroll display of the loop display background G5. ), The work RAM 73 is provided with an interlocking flag 125. The state in which "1" is set in the interlocking flag 125 corresponds to the situation in which the moving operation is performed in the loop display character G4, and the state in which "1" is set in the interlocking flag 125. Is a scroll display of the background G5 for loop display. On the other hand, the state where the interlocking flag is "0" corresponds to the situation where the loop display character G4 is performing the stationary operation, and the state where the interlocking flag 125 is "0" corresponds to the loop display. The scroll display of the background G5 is stopped.

As described above, the tables 122 and 123 for displaying and controlling the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for displaying and controlling the loop display background G5 are separately prepared, so that the game round ends. When the timing comes, the background G5 for loop display is stopped and displayed by stopping the update of the pointer information for the background table 124, while the pointer information of the character staying table 122 is updated and the character G4 for loop display is updated. By controlling the display of, it is possible to make the loop display character G4 perform the stationary display. Therefore, it is possible to end the scroll display of the loop display background G5 at an arbitrary timing and start the stop display at the timing when the game round ends. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of types of tables during non-game rounds corresponding to the arbitrary timing, the number of tables for controlling the loop display effect is suppressed, and the tables are stored in advance. It is possible to suppress the storage capacity of the table.

It should be noted that there are four or more types of timings at which the scroll display of the loop display background G5 is stopped in relation to the timing at which the game round ends.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the loop display effect will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for a character loop executed by the display CPU 72. The operation process for the character loop is executed in the operation operation process of step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in the situation where the loop display effect should be executed.

When it is specified that it is the start timing of the game round based on the currently read execution target table (step S1101: YES), the character movement table 123 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 and set as the table to be used. (Step S1102). After that, "1" is set in the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 (step S1103), and the pointer information of the reference target in the character movement table 123 is cleared to "0" (step S1104). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the content of the task corresponding to the first pointer information of the character movement table 123 is grasped as the image data to be used this time. Further, in step S1113, the parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time is derived by using the information set in the content of the task corresponding to the first pointer information of the character movement table 123. To grasp.

When it is specified that the end timing of the game round is based on the currently read execution target table (step S1105: YES), the character retention table 122 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 and set as the table to be used. (Step S1106). After that, the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 is cleared by "0" (step S1107), and the pointer information of the reference target in the character retention table 122 is cleared by "0" (step S1108). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the content of the task corresponding to the first pointer information of the character retention table 122 is grasped as the image data to be used this time. Further, in step S1113, the parameter information applied to the image data to be used this time is derived and grasped by using the information set in the content of the task corresponding to the first pointer information of the character retention table 122. do.

When this time is neither the start timing nor the end timing of the game round (step S1101 and step S1105: NO), the pointer information is updated for the table to be used among the character moving table 123 and the character stopping table 122 (step S1101 and step S1105: NO). Step S1109). Specifically, the update process is executed so as to add 1 to the value of the pointer information. Then, when the pointer information after the update exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the table to be used (step S1110: YES), "0" is cleared in order to return the pointer information to the initial value (step). S1111). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information of the tables 122 and 123 to be used is used as the image data to be used this time. grasp. Further, in step S1113, the parameter information applied to the image data to be used this time is used by using the information set in the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information of the tables 122 and 123 to be used. Is derived and grasped.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for a background loop executed by the display CPU 72. The operation process for the background loop is executed by the operation process for the background in step S703 in the task process (FIG. 19) in the situation where the loop display effect should be executed.

When "1" is set in the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 (step S1201: YES), the pointer information to be referred to in the background table 124 is updated (step S1202). Specifically, the update process is executed so as to add 1 to the value of the pointer information. Then, when the pointer information after the update exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the background table 124 (step S1203: YES), "0" is cleared in order to return the pointer information to the initial value (step S1204). After that, the image data of the loop display background G5 set in the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information of the background table 124 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1205). Further, by using the information set in the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information of the background table 124, the parameter information applied to the image data to be used this time is derived and grasped (step S1206). ..

When "1" is not set in the interlocking flag (step S1201: NO), the image data of the loop display background G5 set in the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information of the background table 124 is used this time. By grasping as the image data of the object to be used, the image data of the background G5 for loop display similar to the previous time is grasped as the image data of the object to be used this time (step S1207). Further, by grasping the parameter information set in the area for storing the parameter information applied to the image data in the work RAM 73 as the parameter information applied to the image data to be used this time, the same as the previous time. The parameter information of the loop display background G5 is grasped as the parameter information to be used this time (step S1208).

When the arithmetic processing for the character loop and the arithmetic processing for the background loop are executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) includes steps S1112 and step S1205 or The image data grasped in step S1207 is set as a drawing target. In addition, parameter information applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

As described above, the tables 122 and 123 for displaying and controlling the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for displaying and controlling the loop display background G5 are separately prepared, so that the game round ends. When the timing comes, the background G5 for loop display is stopped and displayed by stopping the update of the pointer information for the background table 124, while the pointer information of the character staying table 122 is updated and the character G4 for loop display is updated. By controlling the display of, it is possible to make the loop display character G4 perform the stationary display. Therefore, it is possible to end the scroll display of the loop display background G5 at an arbitrary timing and start the stop display at the timing when the game round ends. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of types of non-gaming tables corresponding to the arbitrary timing, the number of tables for controlling the loop display effect is suppressed, and the tables are stored in advance. It is possible to suppress the storage capacity of the table.

Dedicated pointer information is set in the tables 122 and 123 for displaying and controlling the loop display character G4, and dedicated pointer information is set in the table 124 for displaying and controlling the loop display background G5. By doing so, it is possible to continue updating the pointer information of the other or keep the pointer information of the other in the predetermined information while not using one of the tables 122, 123, 124. Become.

As a table for controlling the display of the loop display character G4, a character staying table 122 for causing the loop display character G4 to perform a stationary display and a loop display character G4 for performing a moving display are performed. A character movement table 123 is provided separately. As a result, when switching the variable display mode of the loop display character G4, it is only necessary to switch the tables 122 and 123 to be used, and it is possible to preferably switch between these variable display modes. Further, as the switching timing, it is possible to set an arbitrary timing while suppressing the number of tables.

By repeatedly looping and using the character stopping table 122, the loop display character G4 is repeatedly displayed while being stopped, and by repeatedly looping and using the character moving table 123, the loop display character G4 is being moved. Repeat the display. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of the tables 122 and 123.

By repeatedly looping and using the background table 124, the scroll display of the loop display background G5 is repeated. In this case, the number of image update timings required for the loop display background G5 to make one round is different from the number of image update timings required for the moving display of the loop display character G4 to make one round. In this configuration, a character moving table 123 for causing the loop display character G4 to perform a moving display and a background table 124 for causing the loop display background G5 to perform a scroll display are individually provided. As a result, it is possible to set only the information corresponding to one lap in each of the tables 123 and 124, and it is not necessary to set unnecessary information exceeding one lap.

When the character movement table 123 is used and the moving display is started in the loop display character G4, "1" is set in the interlocking flag 125, so that the loop display background G5 using the background table 124 is used. When the scroll display of the loop display character G4 is started and the moving display of the loop display character G4 is terminated, the interlocking flag 125 is cleared to "0", so that the scroll display of the loop display background G5 using the background table 124 is performed. Is terminated. As a result, in the execution target table for controlling the overall flow of the loop display effect, it is only necessary to set the information on the start timing and the end timing of the moving display for the loop display character G4, and for the loop display. It is not necessary that the information on the start timing and the end timing of the scroll display for the background G5 is set. Therefore, it is possible to link the movements of the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 while suppressing the amount of data preset in the data table.

<Another form related to loop display production>
-When the loop display character G4 is performing a stationary operation, the relative position of the building image with respect to the loop display character G4 in the loop display background G5 is not changed, but the light hitting condition of the building image and the sky view. The hue of the image and the display mode such as the presence / absence of a cloud image in the sky and the display position may be changed. In this case, even if the scroll display is stopped in the loop display background G5, the display mode of the loop display background G5 is changed. Therefore, the display control of the loop display background G5 in the situation is performed. It is preferable that a table for this purpose is provided separately.

The scroll display of the loop display background G5 may be continued regardless of whether or not the moving display is performed in the loop display character G4. Even in this case, by making the table different between the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5, it is possible to prepare a table corresponding to the operation of one round of each individual image G4 and G5. Therefore, it is not necessary to set useless information exceeding one lap. This is the same even when the loop display character G4 continues the moving display and the loop display background G5 continues the scroll display.

-The type of the loop display background G5 may be changed in a situation where the loop display character G4 continues to be displayed while moving. Even in this configuration, by separately providing a table for controlling the loop display character G4 and a table for controlling the loop display background G5, the loop can be switched when the loop display background G5 is switched. It is only necessary to switch the table for controlling the display background G5, and the table for controlling the loop display character G4 can be used as it is.

-In the execution target table for controlling the entire loop display effect without the interlocking flag 125, together with the information on the switching timing between the stopped display and the moving display in the loop display character G4. Information on the start timing and stop timing of the scroll display in the loop display background G5 may be set.

<Structure for performing group display production>
Next, a configuration for performing a group display effect will be described.

38 (a) and 38 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the group display effect. The group display effect is an effect in which a large number of group display characters G11 are displayed as a group and moves in the direction for group display. The group display character G11 is displayed so that the player can recognize that a person having a face, a torso, both hands, and both feet is represented. Further, each group display character G11 is displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being the same or similar character although the movement contents such as limbs are different. Then, the group display character G11 is displayed so as to cross the symbol display device 41 as a group in one direction over a group display period (for example, 3 seconds). Comparing the case of FIG. 38 (a) and the case of FIG. 38 (b), the display position of the group display character G11 shown in FIG. 38 (a) is generally left in FIG. 38 (b). It is off in the direction. Further, each group display character G11 is displayed in a shape in which the player recognizes that the character G11 is moving in a direction of movement as a group.

The moving direction of the group display character G11 is not limited to the horizontal direction and may be the vertical direction, and some group display characters G11 are directed from a predetermined end of the symbol display device 41 toward the center. The remaining group display character G11 may be displayed so as to move from the end opposite to the predetermined end of the symbol display device 41 toward the center.

As the image data for displaying the group display character G11 in the group display effect, the moving image data 131 for group display is used. The moving image data is image data that is compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data with reference to one frame of still image data, and is encoded by, for example, the MPEG2 method. When the moving image data is decoded, it is expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the moving image data 131 for group display. As shown in FIG. 39, in the moving image data 131 for group display, file data is set at the first address, and then compressed data of each frame is set. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data includes I picture data for one frame corresponding to the reference data, P picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the first difference data, and B picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the second difference data. And have.

The I-picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by itself at the time of decoding. The P-picture data is data that can create still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to the I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before decoding. .. The B-picture data is bidirectionally predicted by referring to the I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before and the I-picture data or P-picture data after one frame or a plurality of frames at the time of decoding. It is data that can create still image data for one frame.

In the compressed data in the moving image data 131 for group display, I-picture data is set as the data of the first frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the second frame, ..., The first frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data in the mth frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the m + 1th frame, ..., The n-1th frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the nth frame. The arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above and is arbitrary.

By executing the decoding process on the moving image data 131 for group display, still image data (hereinafter, also referred to as decoded image data) for a plurality of update timings is created from the moving image data 131 for group display. The Rukoto. In this case, the moving image data 131 for group display has a longer cycle in which the decoded image data can be used than the image update cycle in the symbol display device 41 because of the relationship with the compression rate of the image data.

The relationship between the update cycle of the image and the cycle in which the still image data can be used will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 40 (a). 40 (a1) shows the update timing of the image in the symbol display device 41, FIG. 40 (a2) shows the usable timing of the image data stored in advance in the memory module 74 as still image data, and FIG. 40 (a3). ) Indicates the usable timing of the decoded image data by the moving image data 131 for group display.

The image update cycle Td1 in the symbol display device 41 is 20 msec as described above, and as shown in FIG. 40 (a1), the timing of t1, the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, and the timing of t5. , The image in the symbol display device 41 is updated at each of the timing of t6 and the timing of t7. Further, since the image data stored in advance in the memory module 74 can be used as it is as still image data, as shown in FIG. 40 (a2), at each timing from the timing of t1 to the timing of t7. It can be used.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40 (a3), the usable cycle Td2 of the decoded image data by the moving image data 131 for group display is twice the update cycle Td1 of the image in the symbol display device 41. Therefore, although the decoded image data can be used at the timing of t1, the timing of t3, the timing of t5, and the timing of t7, new decoded image data is used at the timing of t2, the timing of t4, and the timing of t6. Cannot be used.

In this case, at each of the timing of t2, the timing of t4, and the timing of t6, the same decoded image data as the decoded image data used at each of the timing of t1, the timing of t3, and the timing of t5, which are the immediately preceding timings. It is also possible to use. However, if the same decoded image data is simply used, the image may rattle, and smooth moving image display cannot be performed. On the other hand, at two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data is used, the range to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the same decoded image data is different. It reduces the occurrence of rattling in the image.

40 (b) and 40 (c) are explanatory views for explaining how the range to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn is different in the same decoded image data 132.

When drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP76, the data is written to all the unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a and 82b is 800 × 600. It is the number of dots. On the other hand, each of the decoded image data 132 obtained by executing the decoding process on the moving image data 131 for group display has a larger number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b in the size of the initial magnification after the decoding process. It is the number of pixels. The range that can be drawn by each decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification is larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b in both the horizontal dimension and the vertical dimension. As a result, even in a configuration in which the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b is changed according to the moving direction of the group display character G11 at the update timing of the same decoded image data 132 twice in succession, the symbol display device 41 can be used. It is possible to display the group display character G11 as a whole.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the direction in which the group display character G11 moves as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in the range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 is the direction in the frame areas 82a and 82b. Although it is set wider than the above, the direction different from the direction in which the group display character G11 moves as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction has the same or shorter dimensions as the direction in the frame areas 82a and 82b. It may be a certain configuration.

At the front update timing of the two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data 132 is used, the group display character G11 moves as a group in the decoded image data 132 as shown in FIG. 40 (b). The drawing range for the frame areas 82a and 82b is set toward the end on the front side in the direction of the image, that is, the end on the left side. On the other hand, at the update timing on the rear side, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), in the decoded image data 132, the group display character G11 is moved toward the original end in the direction of movement as a group, that is, the right end. Therefore, the drawing range for the frame areas 82a and 82b is set. That is, in the update timing on the rear side with respect to the update timing on the front side, the drawing range to the frame areas 82a and 82b in the decoded image data 132 is on the opposite side to the direction in which the group display character G11 moves as a group. Moving. As a result, the group display character G11 displayed at a predetermined position at the update timing on the front side is displayed at a position moved to the left side of the predetermined position at the update timing on the rear side. Therefore, even if the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, the group display character G11 moves in a group movement between the two update timings. It is possible to perform such a display. In the decoded image data 132, the range outside the drawing range for the frame areas 82a and 82b is excluded from the drawing target.

Here, when the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, the movement amount of the group display character G11 at the rear update timing with respect to the group display character G11 at the front update timing is predetermined. It is the amount of movement. On the other hand, in the decoded image data 132 corresponding to the next use timing with respect to the group display character G11 at the rear update timing, the movement amount of the group display character G11 at the front update timing is also the predetermined movement amount. It is the same.

That is, the first decoded image data 132 at one use timing and the second decoded image data 132 at the next use timing are two update timings displayed using the decoded image data 132 at one use timing. Between the movement amount of the group display character G11 and the update timing of the rear side displayed using the first decoded image data 132 and the update timing of the front side displayed using the second decoded image data 132. The movement amount of the group display character G11 is set to be the same as the movement amount of the predetermined movement amount. More specifically, in both the case where the first decoded image data 132 is used and the case where the second decoded image data 132 is used, when the comparison is made at the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 to be displayed. From the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the front update timing when the first decoded image data 132 is used, the predetermined group display character at the front update timing when the second decoded image data 132 is used. The amount of movement to the display position of G11 is from the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the update timing on the front side when the first decoded image data 132 is used, after the case where the first decoded image data 132 is used. It is twice the amount of movement of the predetermined group display character G11 to the display position at the update timing on the side. Further, in order to enable such a setting of the movement amount, at least the group display character G11 moves as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in the range that can be drawn by each decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification. The dimension in the direction (specifically, the dimension in the lateral direction) is set to be at least larger than the dimension in the direction in the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b by the predetermined movement amount. With such a configuration, it is possible to keep the amount of movement of the group display character G11 between one update timing and the next update timing constant, and it is possible to smoothly move the group display character G11. Will be.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the group display effect will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for group display effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the group display effect is executed by the effect calculation process in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in the situation where the group display effect should be executed.

When it is time to execute the decoding process on the moving image data 131 for group display (step S1301: YES), the address of the moving image data 131 for group display in the memory module 74 is grasped (step S1302), and the group thereof. The address of the work RAM 73 for expanding the moving image data 131 for display as the decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1303), and the decoding designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 72 (step S1304). Further, the value of the same use flag provided in the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1305). The same use flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the same decoded image data 132 as the previous update timing is used in one update timing by the display CPU 72, and the value of the same use flag is "0". In some cases, it is specified that the new decoded image data 132 is used, and in the case where the value of the same use flag is "1", it is specified that the same decoded image data 132 as the previous update timing is used. ..

When the processes of steps S1302 to S1305 are executed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605) is set with the address information of the moving image data 131 for group display. At the same time, the information of the expansion destination address of the moving image data 131 for the group display is set, and the decoding designation information is further set. Upon receiving the drawing list, the moving image decoder 93 of the VDP 76 executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42 (a). In detail, the address of the moving image data 131 for group display is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S1401), and the moving image data for group display is obtained from the information specified in the drawing list. The address of the area where 131 is expanded as the decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1402). Then, the moving image data 131 for group display is read from the address of the memory module 74 grasped in step S1401, and the moving image data 131 for group display is decoded. Then, each decoded image data 132 of the decoded result is written in each area of the address grasped in step S1402 (step S1403).

Returning to the explanation of the arithmetic processing for group display effect (FIG. 41), when a negative determination is made in step S1301 or when the processing of step S1305 is executed, is the value of the same use flag of the work RAM 73 "0"? It is determined whether or not (step S1306). When the value of the same use flag is "0" (step S1306: YES), it means that the update timing is for the new decoded image data 132 to be used this time. In this case, first, among the plurality of decoded image data 132 that have been decoded, the address of the work RAM 73 in which the decoded image data 132 corresponding to the current usage order is expanded is grasped (step S1307).

After that, the "A, A" coordinates are grasped as the coordinate information (step S1308). Here, the coordinate information is information for determining at which position the central pixel in the image data to be used is arranged with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. When the coordinates are "A, B", the set position of the decoded image data 132 with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b is the position shown in FIG. 40 (b), and the frame areas 82a and 82b are located on the left side of the decoded image data 132. The drawing range of is set. The value of A and the value of B are the same regardless of the type of decoded image data 132. After that, after updating and grasping the parameter information other than the coordinate information (step S1309), "1" is set in the same use flag of the work RAM 73 (step S1310). As a result, at the next update timing, the same decoded image data 132 as the current update timing will be used.

When "1" is set in the same use flag (step S1306: NO), it means that the update timing is the same as the previous update timing for the decoded image data 132 to be used this time. In this case, the address of the work RAM 73 in which the same decoded image data 132 as the previous time is expanded is grasped (step S1311).

After that, the "A-1, B" coordinates are grasped as the coordinate information (step S1312). When the coordinates are "A-1, B", the set position of the decoded image data 132 with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b is the position shown in FIG. 40 (c), and the frame areas 82a and 82b are located to the right of the decoded image data 132. The drawing range of is set. After that, after grasping the parameter information other than the coordinate information (step S1313), the same use flag of the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1314). As a result, the new decoded image data 132 will be used at the next update timing.

When the processes of step S1307 to step S1310 or steps S1311 to S1314 are executed, the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). The information of the address of the work RAM 73 in which the data is stored is set, and the parameter information applied to the decoded image data 132 including the coordinate information is set. When the drawing list is received, the VDP 76 executes a setting process for group display as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S804 of the drawing process (FIG. 21). FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing a setting process for group display.

In the setting process for group display, first, the information of the address where the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list (step S1501). Further, the coordinate information applied to the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is grasped from the drawing list (step S1502), and other parameter information applied to the decoded image data 132 is grasped from the drawing list (step S1503). ).

By executing the setting process for group display as described above, in the subsequent write process (step S805), the current decoding is performed with the parameters applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. Image data 132 is drawn. In this case, if the coordinate information is "A, B", the range shown in FIG. 40 (b) is drawn, and if the coordinate information is "A-1, B", the range shown in FIG. 40 (c) is drawn. The coordinates. Then, the image signal is output to the symbol display device 41 based on the drawing data, so that the group display effect is executed.

As described above, even if the cycle in which the decoded image data 132 by the moving image data 131 for group display can be used is twice the update cycle of the image in the symbol display device 41, the same decoded image data 132 is used. In the two consecutive update timings at which the above is used, the range to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b is different in the same decoded image data 132. This makes it possible to reduce the occurrence of rattling in the image.

In the two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data 132 is used, the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 at the front update timing and the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 at the rear update timing are one. The parts are duplicated. This makes it possible to cause a slight change in the image between two consecutive update timings while using the same decoded image data 132.

At the two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data 132 is used, each group display character G11 is used in the group display image at the rear update timing with respect to the group display image at the front update timing. The range to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn is changed in the same decoded image data 132 so that the position is shifted to the front side in the moving direction. This makes it possible to give continuity to the movement of the group display character G11 even in a configuration in which the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings.

Of the horizontal and vertical directions within the range that can be drawn by each decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification, at least the direction in which the group display character G11 moves as a group is set wider than the direction in the frame areas 82a and 82b. ing. As a result, even in a configuration in which the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b is changed according to the moving direction of the group display character G11 at the update timing of the same decoded image data 132 twice in succession, the symbol display device 41 can be used. It is possible to display the group display character G11 as a whole.

The first decoded image data 132 at one use timing and the second decoded image data 132 at the next use timing are between two update timings displayed using the decoded image data 132 at one use timing. Group display between the movement amount of the group display character G11 and the update timing of the rear side displayed using the first decoded image data 132 and the update timing of the front side displayed using the second decoded image data 132. It is set so that the movement amount of the character G11 is the same as that of the character G11. As a result, the amount of movement of the group display character G11 between one update timing and the next update timing can be made constant, and the group display character G11 can be smoothly moved.

The image displayed by using the same decoded image data 132 at two consecutive update timings is an image in which a large number of group display characters G11 move in the same direction. This makes it less noticeable that the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings.

<Another form of group display production>
-The dimension in the specific direction (specifically, the dimension in the horizontal direction) in which at least the group display character G11 moves as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in the range that can be drawn by each decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification. The frame region 82a, 82b is not limited to a configuration in which the dimension is set to be at least a predetermined movement amount larger than the dimension in the specific direction, and the decoded image data 132 after decoding is enlarged from the size of the initial magnification. Thereby, at least the dimension in the specific direction may be set to be larger than the dimension in the specific direction in the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b by at least a predetermined movement amount. In this case, although it is necessary to execute the size enlargement processing on the decoded image data 132, the display position of the group display character G11 is predeterminedly moved between two consecutive update timings using the same decoded image data 132. It is possible to change the amount.

The moving direction of the group display character G11 is not limited to the horizontal direction and may be the vertical direction. In this case, at least the vertical dimension in the range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification or the decoded image data 132 after the enlargement processing from the size of the initial magnification is the vertical dimension in the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b. It is necessary that the setting is at least larger than the predetermined movement amount.

-The group display character G11 is not limited to humans, and may be other animals such as cats, fish, and dogs, or may be pictograms of objects other than animals.

-Multiple identical group display characters G11 have the same configuration in which the same image data is used at a plurality of consecutive update timings and the drawing range to the frame areas 82a and 82b is different at each update timing. It may be applied to an image other than an image that moves as a whole in a direction. For example, the above configuration may be applied when a moving image is displayed in which a large single image exceeding the size of the liquid crystal display unit 41a of the symbol display device 41 moves in a predetermined direction.

Decoding obtained by decoding the moving image data 131 in a configuration in which the same image data is used at a plurality of consecutive update timings and the drawing range to the frame areas 82a and 82b is different at each update timing. It may be applied to image data other than image data 132. For example, the above configuration may be applied to still image data stored in advance in the memory module 74.

<Structure for displaying the validity period>
Next, a configuration for performing the valid period display effect will be described.

43 (a) and 43 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the content of the valid period display effect. The valid period display effect is an operation-compatible effect that changes the effect content depending on whether the effect operation device 48 is operated or not during the effective period in which the operation of the effect operation device 48 is enabled. When it is performed, it is an effect of displaying the valid period on the symbol display device 41.

In the valid period display effect, the operation promotion image G21 for making the player recognizable that the effect operation device 48 should be operated by the symbol display device 41 is displayed, and the effect operation device 48 is displayed. The valid period image G22 for allowing the player to recognize the remaining period during which the operation of is valid is displayed. As the operation promotion image G21, specifically, an image representing the effect operation device 48 is displayed, and an image that is recognized that the effect operation device 48 is being operated is displayed. If the player can recognize that the situation is such that the device 48 should be operated, the specific display content is arbitrary.

As the valid period image G22, a frame image G23, a band image G24, and a blinking image G25 are displayed. The frame image G23 is an image for displaying the frame portion of the valid period image G22, and is displayed in a horizontally long square frame shape. The band image G24 is displayed so as to extend to the right with the left end of the frame portion as the base end in the frame portion by the frame image G23, and further, the valid period display effect is started as shown in FIG. 43 (a). If this is the case, the frame image G23 is displayed so as to fill the entire frame portion, and as the remaining valid period decreases, the tip position, which is the rightmost position, becomes as shown in FIG. 43 (b). It gradually moves toward the left end and is displayed so that the range filled in the frame by the frame image G23 becomes narrower. The blinking image G25 is displayed so as to be added to the tip position of the band image G24, and is displayed so as to move according to the tip position when the tip position of the band image G24 gradually moves to the left end. Further, the blinking image G25 is displayed as if the entire image is blinking.

Here, in the case of a configuration in which the blinking display is performed while the blinking image G25 moves according to the movement of the band image G24, the data for controlling the display of the movement of the band image G24 and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 are controlled. If one of the moving speed of the tip of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is to be changed, the other is also changed in conjunction with the change of the data of the above and the blinking cycle of the band image G24. It ends up. The case where the event occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 44A shows how the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 changes, and FIG. 44B shows how the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 changes.

By starting the valid period display effect, at the timing of t1, the movement display of the tip portion of the band image G24 is started as shown in FIG. 44 (a) and blinks as shown in FIG. 44 (b). The blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1. Then, from the timing of t1 to the timing of t5, the movement display of the band image G24 by the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 by the first blinking cycle Te1 are performed.

After that, at the timing of t5, the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed, which is faster than the first speed, as shown in FIG. 44 (a). The change of the speed is the data of the specific order after the display control is performed by referring to the data of the predetermined order among the reference data set in the time series in the data for displaying and controlling the movement of the band image G24. This is done by shortening the time required to control the display by referring to. Specifically, when the pointer information set by the serial number and the information of the task content are set so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the pointer information as the data for display control, it is predetermined. After controlling the display of the band image G24 by referring to the information of the task contents corresponding to the pointer information of the order, the information of the contents of the task corresponding to the pointer information of the specific order which is the order after the predetermined order. By varying the number of times the image update timing occurs until the display control of the band image G24 is performed with reference to, the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is changed. In this case, if the data for displaying and controlling the band image G24 and the data for controlling the display of the blinking image G25 are collectively set in the display control data, the tip portion of the band image G24 moves. In order to change the speed, display control is performed by referring to the information of the contents of the task corresponding to the pointer information in the predetermined order, and then the task corresponding to the pointer information in the specific order which is the order after the predetermined order. If the number of occurrences of the image update timing that occurs before the display control is performed with reference to the content information is changed, the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 will be changed accordingly.

That is, when the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is changed from the first speed to the second speed at the timing of t5 in FIG. 44 (a), the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is shown in FIG. 44 (b). Is also changed from the first blinking cycle Te1 to the second blinking cycle Te2. This also applies when the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed. When the data for each display control is set collectively, when the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed, the tip portion of the band image G24 The movement speed will also be changed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the data for controlling the display of the band image G24 and the data for controlling the display of the blinking image G25 are not collectively provided. It is provided individually. Hereinafter, the contents of the data stored in advance in the memory module 74 for executing the valid period display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 45.

As data for performing the valid period display effect, as shown in FIG. 45, the memory module 74 has a frame display image data 141 for displaying the frame image G23 and a band display for displaying the band image G24. The image data 142, the lighting image data 143 for displaying the blinking image G25 in the lighting state, and the extinguishing image data 144 for displaying the blinking image G25 in the off state are stored in advance. By drawing the frame display image data 141 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, the frame image G23 can be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

The band display image data 142 is set to a size that can fill the entire frame portion of the frame image G23 at the initial magnification, so that the left end portion of the band image G24 coincides with the left end portion of the frame portion of the frame image G23. By setting the coordinate information for the frame areas 82a and 82b of the band display image data 142 at the initial magnification, the band image G24 is displayed so as to fill the entire frame portion of the frame image G23. Then, while gradually reducing the horizontal size of the band display image data 142 from the initial magnification, the band display image of the size so that the left end portion of the band image G24 coincides with the left end of the frame portion of the frame image G23. By setting the coordinate information for the frame areas 82a and 82b of the data 142, an image in which the tip portion of the band image G24 gradually moves toward the left end is displayed.

The lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144 are both image data for displaying the blinking image G25, and the images displayed by the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144 are the same at the initial magnification. It will be the size and shape. However, the lighting image data 143 displays a relatively bright blinking image G25, and the extinguishing image data 144 displays a relatively dark blinking image G25. Only one of the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144 is used at each update timing of the image, and the image data 143 and 144 used as the target have a blinking image G25 at the tip of the band image G24. Coordinate information for the frame areas 82a and 82b is set so as to be superimposed and displayed from the front side. Then, the period in which the lighting image data 143 is used and the period in which the extinguishing image data 144 is used are alternately repeated, so that the blinking image G25 in the lighting state and the blinking image G25 in the off state are displayed. The display will be repeated alternately. This makes it possible to display the blinking image G25 as if the light is blinking.

In addition to the various image data 141 to 144, the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 are stored in the memory module 74 in advance. The band display table 145 is data for executing display control of the band image G24, and specifically, the horizontal size information of the band display image data 142 and the position information of the tip portion of the band image G24 are determined. It is the data that was created. The blinking display table 146 is data for executing display control of the blinking image G25, and specifically, the image data to be used for the blinking image G25 is determined among the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144. It is the data that was created. The band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 will be described in detail.

FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the band display table 145. As shown in FIG. 46A, pointer information is set in the band display table 145 so as to be a serial number, and the horizontal size of the band display image data 142 corresponding to each pointer information. A combination of the information and the position information of the tip portion of the band image G24 is set. By reducing the size of the band display image data 142 by the magnification of the size information corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to, the horizontal display range of the band image G24 is narrowed. Then, the band display image data 142 is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b so that the left end portion of the band image G24 overlaps the left end portion of the frame portion of the frame image G23, so that the tip portion of the band image G24 is gradually left end. The image moving toward is displayed. Further, the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to is the tip portion of the band image G24 when the band display image data 142 is reduced and drawn by the magnification of the size information corresponding to the pointer information. Corresponds to the position of. Then, the image data to be used among the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144 is drawn so as to be a position corresponding to the tip position information, so that the image data to be used overlaps the tip portion of the band image G24 from the front side. In this way, the blinking image G25 is displayed.

When the display control of the band image G24 is performed so that the tip portion of the band image G24 moves at the first speed, one image is updated over a specific number of times on the band side, which is a plurality of times (for example, 5 times). The same size information and tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are referred to. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information in the next order at the update timing of the next image with respect to the update timing of the image of the band side specific number of times, and the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are specified on the band side. It is referred to over the update timing of the image of the number of times. By updating the pointer information every time the update timing of the image on the band side a specific number of times elapses in this way, the band image G24 is displayed so that the tip portion moves at the first speed, and the tip portion thereof is displayed. The blinking image G25 is displayed so as to overlap from the front side.

On the other hand, when the display control of the band image G24 is performed so that the tip portion of the band image G24 moves at a second speed faster than the first speed, the band side predetermined number of times is less than the band side specific number of times ( The same size information and tip position information corresponding to one pointer information are referred to over the update timing of the image (for example, twice). Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information in the next order at the update timing of the next image with respect to the update timing of the image a predetermined number of times on the band side, and the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are predetermined on the band side. It is referred to over the update timing of the image of the number of times. By updating the pointer information every time the update timing of the image on the band side elapses in this way, the band image G24 is displayed so that the tip portion moves at the second speed faster than the first speed. At the same time, the blinking image G25 is displayed so as to overlap the tip portion from the front side.

FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the blinking display table 146. As shown in FIG. 46B, pointer information is set in the blinking display table 146 so as to be a serial number, and the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144 correspond to each pointer information. Of these, the image data to be used is set. The image data 143 and 144 set as the target of use in the pointer information to be referenced is the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information to be referenced in the band display table 145 at the update timing of the image. By drawing at the position, the blinking image G25 in a state corresponding to the image data 143 and 144 to be used is superimposed and displayed on the tip portion of the band image G24 from the front side.

In the blinking display table 146, lighting image data 143 is set as image data to be used for pointer information of "0" to "9", and for pointer information of "10" to "19". The image data 144 for turning off is set as the image data to be used. When display control using the blinking display table 146 is performed, the pointer information to be referred to is added by 1 each time the pointer information is updated, and the value of the pointer information after the addition is the maximum value. If it exceeds "19", the value of the pointer information of the reference target is cleared to "0". That is, while the valid period display effect is being performed, the pointer information to be referred to in the blinking display table 146 starts from "0" to become "19" as one reference cycle. Will be repeated multiple times. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data in the blinking display table 146.

When the display control of the blinking image G25 is performed so that the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 becomes the first blinking cycle Te1, the image is updated at a specific number of times on the blinking side, which is a plurality of times (for example, twice). The same target image data 143 and 144 corresponding to the pointer information of the above are referred to. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information in the next order at the update timing of the next image with respect to the update timing of the image of the blinking side a specific number of times, and the same image data 143, 144 of the same target corresponding to the pointer information is updated. Is referred to over the update timing of the image on the blinking side a specific number of times. In this way, the pointer information is updated every time the update timing of the image of the blinking side a specific number of times elapses, so that the first blinking image G25 displayed so as to overlap the tip portion of the band image G24 from the front side. The blinking display is performed at the blinking cycle Te1.

On the other hand, when the display control of the blinking image G25 is performed so that the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 becomes the second blinking cycle Te2, the number of times of the blinking side predetermined number (for example, once) is smaller than the number of times specified by the blinking side. The same image data 143, 144 of the target to be used corresponding to one pointer information is referred to over the update timing of the image. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information in the next order at the update timing of the next image with respect to the update timing of the image on the blinking side a predetermined number of times, and the same image data 143, 144 of the same target corresponding to the pointer information is updated. Is referred to over the update timing of the image a predetermined number of times on the blinking side. In this way, the pointer information is updated every time the update timing of the image on the blinking side elapses, so that the second blinking image G25 displayed so as to overlap the tip portion of the band image G24 from the front side. The blinking display is performed at the blinking cycle Te2.

A state in which the valid period display effect is executed using both the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 47. 47 (a1) and 47 (a2) show the state of the moving speed of the tip portion in the band image G24, and FIGS. 47 (b1) and 47 (b2) show the state of the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25.

First, a case where the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is changed under a situation where the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is constant will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 (a1) and 47 (b1).

When the valid period display effect is started, the movement display of the tip portion of the band image G24 is started as shown in FIG. 47 (a1) at the timing of t11, and blinks as shown in FIG. 47 (b1). The blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1. Then, from the timing of t11 to the timing of t15, the movement display of the band image G24 by the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 by the first blinking cycle Te1 are performed.

After that, at the timing of t15, the number of occurrences of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the band display table 145 is changed to the band side predetermined number of times, which is less than the band side specific number of times. As shown in FIG. 47 (a1), the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed, which is faster than the first speed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (b1), the number of occurrences of the image update timing required for the pointer information to be updated in the blinking display table 146 is maintained at the specified number of blinking sides up to that point. The blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1.

Next, a case where the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed under the condition that the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is constant will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 (a2) and 47 (b2).

By starting the valid period display effect, the movement display of the tip portion of the band image G24 is started as shown in FIG. 47 (a2) at the timing of t21, and blinks as shown in FIG. 47 (b2). The blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1. Then, from the timing of t21 to the timing of t25, the movement display of the band image G24 by the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 by the first blinking cycle Te1 are performed.

After that, at the timing of t25, the number of times the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the blinking display table 146 is changed to a predetermined number of times on the blinking side, which is less than the specified number of times on the blinking side. As shown in FIG. 47 (b2), the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed to the second blinking cycle Te2, which is shorter than the first blinking cycle Te1. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (a2), the number of occurrences of the image update timing required for the pointer information to be updated in the band display table 145 is maintained at the band-side specific number of times. The moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is maintained at the first speed.

As described above, the band display table 145 is provided as data for controlling the display of the display content of the band image G24, and the blinking display table 146 is provided as data for controlling the display of the display content of the blinking image G25. By providing it, it is possible to change one of the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 while not changing the other. As a result, the moving speed of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 can be changed independently, and it is possible to suitably realize diversification of the display mode of the valid period display effect. ..

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 are associated with the expectation that the operation-corresponding special effect is executed when the effect operation device 48 is operated during the valid period. Has been done. Specifically, the first display content is a case where the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is maintained at the first speed until the end and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1 until the end. When the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed in the middle and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1 until the end, the second display content and the band image G24 When the moving speed of the tip portion is maintained at the first speed until the end and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed to the second blinking cycle Te2 in the middle, the third display content is the second display content. The expectation is higher than that of the first display content, and the third display content is set to have a higher expectation than the second display content. As a result, by confirming the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation that the operation-corresponding special effect will be executed when the effect operation device 48 is operated. , It is possible to increase the player's attention to the valid period display effect.

Further, when the operation-supporting special effect is executed when the effect operation device 48 is operated, the operation-compatible special effect is not executed for the effect operation device 48 when the effect operation device 48 is operated. The probability of occurrence of the special effect corresponding to the operation is set so that the expectation of a big hit result is higher in the corresponding game times than in the case. In this case, since the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 are associated with the execution expectation of the operation-compatible special effect as described above, the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 are also associated with the expectation of the jackpot result. It will be done. From this point as well, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the valid period display effect.

In addition, when the effect operation device 48 is operated during the valid period, one of a plurality of types of operation-compatible effects including the first operation-compatible effect and the second operation-compatible effect may be executed. In this case. , The display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 may be configured to be associated with the execution expectation degree of the predetermined operation correspondence effect.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the valid period display effect will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for displaying a valid period executed by the display CPU 72. The operation process for displaying the valid period is executed in the operation process for effect in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in the situation where the valid period display effect should be executed.

When it is the start timing of the valid period display effect (step S1601: YES), the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 are read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S1602). Then, as the process of setting the moving speed of the band image G24, the update cycle of the pointer information in the band display table 145 is set to the update cycle corresponding to the first speed (step S1603), and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is set. As a process, the update cycle of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is set to the update cycle corresponding to the first blinking cycle Te1 (step S1604).

After that, of the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144, the image data to be used, which is set in correspondence with the first pointer information in the blinking display table 146, is used to display the blinking image G25 this time. While grasping as image data (step S1613), the frame display image data 141 and the band display image data 142 are grasped as image data to be used this time (step S1614). After that, the size information set corresponding to the first pointer information in the band display table 145 is grasped as the size information for applying to the band display image data 142 (step S1615), and the band display table 145. The tip position information set in correspondence with the first pointer information is grasped as the position information for drawing the image data to be used this time among the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144 (step S1616). Further, the parameter information other than these is grasped (step S1617).

When the calculation process for displaying the valid period is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605) includes the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144. Among them, the image data of the target to be used, which is set corresponding to the first pointer information in the blinking display table 146, the frame display image data 141, and the band display image data 142 are set as drawing targets. Further, the parameter information grasped in steps S1615 to S1617 is set in the drawing list.

When it is not the start timing of the valid period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the pointer information on the band image G24 side (step S1605). When the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is set to the first speed, the number of times the image update timing has occurred since the last time the pointer information of the band display table 145 was updated is the band side specific number of times. When it is determined that it is the update timing of the pointer information on the band image G24 side and the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is set to the second speed, the pointer information of the band display table 145 is updated last time. When the number of occurrences of the image update timing from the above is a predetermined number of times on the band side, it is determined that the update timing of the pointer information on the band image G24 side is reached. When it is the update timing of the pointer information on the band image G24 side (step S1605: YES), the pointer information is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referred to in the band display table 145 is incremented by 1 (step S1606). ).

When it is not the start timing of the valid period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side (step S1607). When the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is set to the first blinking cycle Te1, the number of times the image update timing has occurred since the last time the pointer information of the blinking display table 146 was updated is the number of times the blinking side is specified. When it is determined that it is the update timing of the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is set to the second blinking cycle Te2, the pointer information of the blinking display table 146 has been updated since the last time. When the number of occurrences of the image update timing is a predetermined number of times on the blinking side, it is determined that it is the update timing of the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side. When it is the update timing of the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side (step S1607: YES), the pointer information is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referred to in the blinking display table 146 is added by 1 (step S1608). ).

When it is not the start timing of the valid period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to change the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 (step S1609). Whether or not the movement speed is changed and when the movement speed is changed, the change timing is determined at the start of the current valid period display effect, and whether or not the display CPU 72 is the timing determined at the start of the change. Is determined. Further, as a method of specifying the change timing, the number of occurrences of the image update timing that is the change timing is determined at the start of the current valid period display effect, and the determined number of occurrences of the image update timing is used. In that case, a method of specifying the above change timing can be considered. When it is the timing to change the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 (step S1609: YES), the update cycle of the pointer information in the band display table 145 is set to the second speed as the setting process of the moving speed of the band image G24. Set to the corresponding update cycle (step S1610).

When it is not the start timing of the valid period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 (step S1611). Whether or not the blinking cycle is changed and when the blinking cycle is changed, the change timing is determined at the start of the current valid period display effect, and whether or not the display CPU 72 is the timing determined at the start. To judge. Further, as a method of specifying the change timing, the number of occurrences of the image update timing that is the change timing is determined at the start of the current valid period display effect, and the determined number of occurrences of the image update timing is used. In that case, a method of specifying the above change timing can be considered. When it is the timing to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 (step S1611: YES), the update cycle of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 corresponds to the second blinking cycle Te2 as the setting process of the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25. The update cycle is set (step S1612).

After that, of the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144, the blinking image G25 displays the image data of the target to be used, which is set corresponding to the pointer information of the current reference target in the blinking display table 146. It is grasped as image data for this (step S1613). In this case, if the processing of step S1608 is not executed in the current processing time, the image data corresponding to the pointer information referred to in the previous processing time is grasped, and in the current processing time, step S1608 is performed. When the processing is executed, the image data corresponding to the pointer information newly updated and referred to this time is grasped. Further, the frame display image data 141 and the band display image data 142 are grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1614).

After that, the size information set in the band display table 145 corresponding to the pointer information of the current reference target is grasped as the size information for applying to the band display image data 142 (step S1615), and the band display is performed. The tip position information set in correspondence with the pointer information of the current reference target in the table 145 is used as the position information for drawing the image data to be used this time among the image data 143 for lighting and the image data 144 for turning off. grasp. In this case, if the processing of step S1606 is not executed in the current processing time, the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information referred to in the previous processing time are grasped, and the current processing time is performed. When the process of step S1606 is executed in step S1606, the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information newly updated and referred to this time are grasped. Further, the parameter information other than these is grasped (step S1617).

When the arithmetic processing for displaying the valid period is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) includes the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144. Of these, the image data to be used, which is set in correspondence with the pointer information of the current reference target in the blinking display table 146, the frame display image data 141, and the band display image data 142 are set as drawing targets. .. Further, the parameter information grasped in steps S1615 to S1617 is set in the drawing list.

As described above, the band display table 145 is provided as data for controlling the display of the display content of the band image G24, and the blinking display table 146 is provided as data for controlling the display of the display content of the blinking image G25. This makes it possible to change one of the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 while not changing the other. As a result, the moving speed of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 can be changed independently, and it is possible to suitably realize diversification of the display mode of the valid period display effect. ..

In particular, when changing the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24, only the update cycle of the pointer information in the band display table 145 is changed, so that the same band display is used regardless of the moving speed. Table 145 is used. Similarly, when changing the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, only the update cycle of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is changed, so that the same blinking display table 146 can be used regardless of the blinking cycle. used. For example, in a configuration in which data for controlling the display of the display content of the band image G24 and data for controlling the display of the display content of the blinking image G25 are collectively set in one table, the tip portion of the band image G24 If one of the blinking cycles of the moving speed and the blinking image G25 is to be changed without affecting the other, it becomes necessary to separately prepare a table corresponding to the change, and the table is a combination of the moving speed and the blinking cycle. You will need as many types as you like. Then, the storage capacity of the memory module 74 required to store the table in advance increases. On the other hand, since the same band display table 145 is used regardless of the moving speed and the same blinking display table 146 is used regardless of the blinking cycle, the memory module. It is possible to realize diversification of display modes of the valid period display effect while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of 74.

In the band display table 145, tip position information corresponding to the position information for setting the image data to be used among the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144 is set. As a result, information for arranging the blinking image G25 at the position of the tip portion of the band image G24 is set in relation to the information that determines the display mode of the band image G24. Therefore, in a configuration in which the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 are separately provided, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for adjusting the relative positions of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25. ..

<Another form related to the validity period display effect>
-The pointer information of the blinking display table 146 is only "0" and "1", one of those "0" and "1" corresponds to the lighting image data 143, and the other is the extinguishing image data. The configuration corresponding to 144 may be used. In this case, the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is set to either the first blinking cycle Te1 or the second blinking cycle Te2 by adjusting the update cycle of the pointer information between "0" and "1". It becomes possible. According to this configuration, the amount of data in the blinking display table 146 can be made smaller.

When the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, 1 is added to the pointer information of the reference target in the band display table 145 at each image update timing, and the tip portion of the band image G24 is added. When the moving speed of is the second speed, a value of 2 or more may be added to the pointer information of the reference target in the band display table 145 at each image update timing. That is, the value added to the pointer information of the reference target in the band display table 145 may be different for each update timing of the image at the first speed and the second speed. Even with this configuration, it is possible to change the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 between the first speed and the second speed while using the same band display table 145.

When the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1, 1 is added to the pointer information of the reference target in the blinking display table 146 at each image update timing, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed. In the case of the second blinking cycle Te2, a value of 2 or more may be added to the pointer information of the reference target in the blinking display table 146 at each update timing of the image. That is, the value added to the pointer information of the reference target in the blinking display table 146 may be different for each image update timing between the first blinking cycle Te1 and the second blinking cycle Te2. Even with this configuration, it is possible to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 between the first blinking cycle Te1 and the second blinking cycle Te2 while using the same blinking display table 146.

The image data for displaying the blinking image G25 is not limited to two types and may be three or more types, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is not limited to two types and may be three or more types. There may be. Further, the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types.

-Instead of the configuration in which the blinking display table 146 is used to determine the type of image data used to display the blinking image G25, the blinking image G25 is displayed by programmatic processing without using the table. It may be configured to determine the type of image data used for this purpose.

In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the size of the band image G24 changes with the passage of time, at least one of the shape and color of the band image G24 may change with the passage of time. Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the type of image data for displaying the blinking image G25 changes with the passage of time, at least one of the size, shape, and color of the blinking image G25 changes with the passage of time. It may be a configuration that changes.

<Structure for performing number display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a numerical display effect will be described.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the numerical display effect. The number display effect is an effect of displaying the number of game balls acquired by the player (hereinafter referred to as the acquired number) from the start of the open / close execution mode in the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode on the symbol display device 41. .. The acquired number is the number of differences between the total number of game balls paid out to the player from the start of the open / close execution mode and the total number of game balls fired to the game area PA from the start of the open / close execution mode. That is. In addition, the display of the acquired number by the number display effect is started when the opening period is started in the open / close execution mode, and when the game ball is paid out to the player in the open / close execution mode and the game ball is launched. If is performed, the displayed content will be changed accordingly. Regarding FIG. 49 in detail, the number display image G31 is displayed on the edge side of the symbol display device 41 in a situation where the display effect for the open / close execution mode is being executed by the symbol display device 41. By checking the number display image G31, the player can grasp the number of game balls acquired in the open / close execution mode.

FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing a numerical display effect.

The winning detection sensors 151 to 154, the launch ball detection sensor 155, and the return ball detection sensor 156 are electrically connected to the MPU 52 of the main control device 50. The prize detection sensors 151 to 154 are sensors for detecting the occurrence of a prize that triggers the payout of the game ball, and are used in the general prize opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. There are multiple types with a one-to-one correspondence. The MPU 52 of the main control device 50 receives detection signals from each of a plurality of types of winning detection sensors 151 to 154. Then, when the MPU 52 receives a signal corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball entering in the corresponding entry portion from any of the winning detection sensors 151 to 154, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning is received. A prize ball command for instructing payout is transmitted to the payout control device 55.

The payout control device 55 includes a payout control board 158 on which the MPU 159a is mounted. The MPU 159a is a ROM 159b that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 159a, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 159b is executed. A certain RAM 159c, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in. A payout device 56 is electrically connected to the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55, and the MPU 159a drives the payout motor 56a provided in the payout device 56 when a prize ball command is received from the main control device 50. By starting the output of the signal, the payout of the game ball is started. Then, in the MPU 159a, when the number of game balls to be paid out measured based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 56b provided in the payout device 56 is the number corresponding to the information of the number of pieces set in the prize ball command. In addition, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 56a is stopped to stop the payout of the game ball. Further, each time the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55 detects one game ball by the payout detection sensor 56b, a payout completion signal indicating that one game ball has been paid out to the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 is completed. To send.

The launch ball detection sensor 155 is provided in the game ball launch mechanism 161 for launching the game ball toward the game area PA when the launch operation device 28 is operated. FIG. 51 is a front view of the inner frame 13 showing an enlarged lower region of the inner frame 13. The game ball launch mechanism 161 is provided below the game board 24 on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The game ball launch mechanism 161 is an electric actuator that launches a launch rail 162 formed on the game board 24 toward the guide rail and a game ball supplied from the upper plate 46a onto the launch rail 162 toward the guide rail. It is provided with a certain solenoid 163 and a holding member 164 for holding one game ball B1 supplied on the launch rail 162 at a position capable of launching by the solenoid 163. When the firing operation device 28 is operated, a drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 163 every time a predetermined firing cycle (for example, 60 msec) is reached, and the game ball is launched by the solenoid 163.

In the game ball launch mechanism 161 the launch ball detection sensor 155 is provided so as to detect a game ball passing through the position of the most downstream portion of the launch rail 162. That is, the launch ball detection sensor 155 is provided so as to detect the game ball launched from the most downstream portion of the launch rail 162 toward the guide rail, and the game ball detected by the launch ball detection sensor 155 is the launch rail. 162 does not flow backwards.

The launch ball detection sensor 155 is composed of an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and when the game ball B1 is in the detection range, it outputs a HI level signal as a launch ball detection signal and outputs the game ball. When B1 is not in the detection range, a LOW level signal is output as a launch ball non-detection signal. Therefore, the launch ball detection sensor 155 makes it possible to specify the number of game balls launched toward the guide rail after passing through the position of the most downstream portion of the launch rail 162. The relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. Further, the launch ball detection sensor 155 is not limited to the optical sensor, and may be a sensor of another detection method.

The return ball detection sensor 156 is provided in the return ball recovery unit 165 that collects the game balls that have been launched from the most downstream portion of the launch rail 162 toward the guide rail but have flowed back through the guide rail without reaching the game area PA. Has been done. The return ball recovery unit 165 is formed in a region formed by laterally separating the guide rail and the launch rail 162 on the front surface of the inner frame 13, and exists between the two rails. The return ball recovery unit 165 is formed as a space having a predetermined depth dimension, and the space is formed so as to be open upward. The return ball collection unit 165 is communicated with the lower plate 47a, and the game ball B1 collected by the return ball collection unit 165 is discharged to the lower plate 47a by its own weight.

In the return ball recovery unit 165, the return ball detection sensor 156 is provided so as to detect a game ball passing through the position of the most downstream portion of the return ball recovery unit 165. That is, the return ball detection sensor 156 is provided so as to detect the game ball flowing down from the most downstream portion of the return ball recovery unit 165 toward the lower plate 47a.

The return ball detection sensor 156 is composed of an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and outputs an HI level signal as a return ball detection signal when the game ball is in the detection range, and the game ball is In a situation where it does not exist in the detection range, a LOW level signal is output as a return ball non-detection signal. Therefore, the return ball detection sensor 156 makes it possible to specify the number of game balls collected by the return ball collection unit 165. The relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. Further, the return ball detection sensor 156 is not limited to the optical sensor, and may be a sensor of another detection method.

Returning to the description with reference to FIG. 50, the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 receives the payout completion signal from the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55, the reception result of the launch ball detection signal from the launch ball detection sensor 155, and the return ball. A command corresponding to each of the reception results of the return ball detection signal from the detection sensor 156 is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 62. In detail about these commands, the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 measures the number of times the payout completion signal is received, and when the payout completion signal is received 10 times, the payout of 10 game balls is completed. The prize ball completion command in which the information indicating the above is set is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 62. Further, if the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 does not receive the next payout completion signal even after the reception standby period (for example, 2 sec) has elapsed since the previous receipt of the payout completion signal, the MPU 52 transmits the prize ball completion command last time. Then, even if the number of times the payout completion signal is received has not reached 10 times, the prize ball completion command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 62. Information indicating the number of payout completion signals received since the last transmission of the prize ball completion command is set in this prize ball completion command. Further, the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 transmits a launch execution command indicating that one game ball has been launched to the sound light side MPU 62 when the launch ball detection signal is received from the launch ball detection sensor 155. Then, when the return ball detection signal is received from the return ball detection sensor 156, a return ball generation command indicating that one return ball has been generated is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 62.

When the sound light side MPU 62 is in the open / close execution mode, the number of acquired balls can be displayed each time the prize ball completion command, the launch execution command, and the return ball generation command are received from the MPU 52 of the main control device 50. Perform measurement processing. Then, the measurement command corresponding to the result of the measurement process is transmitted to the display CPU 72 of the display control device 70 when the transmission timing of the measurement command is reached. The display CPU 72 displays the number display image G31 on the symbol display device 41 in a state of reflecting the contents of the received measurement command.

Hereinafter, the processing contents executed by the sound / light side MPU 62 and the display CPU 72 in order to perform the numerical display effect will be described. First, the processing contents executed by the sound light side MPU 62 will be described.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a counting process executed by the sound light side MPU 62. The counting process is executed by the table setting process in step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

When the prize ball completion command is received in the open / close execution mode (step S1701 and step S1702: YES), the prize ball completion command received this time is set in the measurement counter 166 provided in the sound light side RAM 64. A value corresponding to the completed number of payouts of the existing game balls is added (step S1703). The measurement counter 166 is a counter used to measure the number of acquisitions generated from the transmission timing of one measurement command to the transmission timing of the next measurement command in the open / close execution mode. For example, when a prize ball completion command indicating that the payout of 10 game balls is completed is received, the value of "10" is added to the measurement counter 166, and the payout of 3 game balls is completed. When the prize ball completion command indicating the above is received, the value of "3" is added to the measurement counter 166.

When a firing execution command is received in the open / close execution mode (step S1701 and step S1704: YES), "1" is subtracted from the measurement counter 166 (step S1705). The measurement counter 166 is configured to be capable of measuring both positive and negative values. For example, when the value of the measurement counter 166 is "5" and a firing execution command is received, measurement is performed. The value of the counter 166 is "4", and when the value of the measurement counter 166 is "0" and the launch execution command is received, the value of the measurement counter 166 is "-1". Further, when the return ball generation command is received in the open / close execution mode (step S1701 and step S1706: YES), "1" is added to the value of the measurement counter 166 (step S1707).

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an output setting process of a measurement command executed by the sound light side MPU 62. The counting process is executed by the command selection process in step S302 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

In the measurement command output setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the measurement command (step S1801). The output timing of the measurement command occurs when the command output cycle elapses in the open / close execution mode. The command output cycle is set as a cycle longer than the update cycle of the number display image G31, and more specifically, the update cycle of the number display image G31 is longer than the cycle of doubling the update cycle of the number display image G31. It is set as a cycle shorter than the cycle multiplied by three. The update cycle of the number display image G31 is set to be longer than 20 msec, which is the update cycle of the image for one frame, and is set to, for example, 300 msec. However, the update timing of the number display image G31 generated by the lapse of the update cycle of the number display image G31 corresponds to the update timing of the image for one frame.

When it is the output timing of the measurement command (step S1801: YES), the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to the increase in the number of acquisitions by determining whether or not the value of the measurement counter 166 is “0” or more. It is determined whether or not this is done (step S1802). When the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to the increase in the number of acquisitions (step S1802: YES), the increase measurement command is read from the sound / light side ROM 63, and the measurement counter is used for the read increase measurement command. Information corresponding to the current value of 166 is set (step S1803). Then, the increase measurement command after the information setting is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S1804). As a result, it is specified that the number of acquired items has increased in the display CPU 72, and the number of the increased number is specified.

When it is the output timing of the measurement command and the value of the measurement counter 166 is less than "0" (step S1801: YES, step S1802: NO), the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to the decrease in the number of acquisitions. It means that you are doing it. In this case, the reduction measurement command is read from the sound / light side ROM 63, and the information corresponding to the current value of the measurement counter 166 is set for the read reduction measurement command (step S1805). Then, the reduction measurement command after the information setting is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S1806). As a result, it is specified that the number of acquired items has decreased in the display CPU 72, and the number of the decreased number is specified.

When the process of step S1804 or step S1806 is executed, the value of the measurement counter 166 is cleared to "0" (step S1807). As a result, the information on the acquired number of pieces to be set in the measurement command is deleted from the measurement counter 166.

Next, the processing contents executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a measurement command correspondence process executed by the display CPU 72. The measurement command correspondence process is executed by the command correspondence process in step S603 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18).

When an increase measurement command is received from the sound / light side MPU 62 (step S1901: YES), the increase in the number of acquisitions set in the increase measurement command received this time in the reflection counter 167 provided in the work RAM 73. Add the values corresponding to the number (step S1902). The reflection counter 167 is a counter for the display CPU 72 to specify the number of increments / decreases to be reflected in the display of the acquired number currently displayed as the number display image G31. When the reduction measurement command is received from the sound / light side MPU 62 (step S1903: YES), the value of the reflection counter 167 corresponds to the number of reductions in the number of acquisitions set in the reduction measurement command received this time. The value is subtracted (step S1904).

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for measurement display executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for measurement display is executed by the effect calculation process in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19).

When it is the update timing of the number display image G31 (step S2001: YES), if the value of the reflection counter 167 is less than 0 (step S2002: YES), the subtraction process of the total counter 168 provided in the work RAM 73 is performed. Execute (step S2003). The total counter 168 is a counter that determines the value of the acquired number to be displayed as the number display image G31, and the value stored in the total counter 168 is displayed as the number display image G31. Therefore, as the value of the total counter 168 fluctuates, the content of the number display image G31 fluctuates accordingly. In the subtraction process of the total counter 168, the value of the decrease in the number of acquired pieces set in the current reflection counter 167 is subtracted from the current value of the total counter 168. That is, when the value of the reflection counter 167 is a value corresponding to the decrease in the number of acquisitions, all the values of the decrease in the number of acquisitions set in the reflection counter 167 are for total use regardless of the value. It is reflected in the value of the counter 168. As a result, when a decrease in the number of acquired items occurs, all of the decreased amount is collectively reflected in the display of the number of acquired items in the number display image G31. After that, the value of the reflection counter 167 is cleared to "0" (step S2004).

When the value of the reflection counter 167 is "0" or more at the update timing of the number display image G31 (step S2001: YES, step S2002: NO), whether or not the value of the reflection counter 167 is 1 or more. (Step S2005). When the value of the reflection counter 167 is not 1 or more (step S2005: NO), it means that the value of the reflection counter 167 is “0”. In this case, the total counter 168 does not increase or decrease at the current update timing of the number display image G31. Therefore, the display content of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is maintained as it is.

When the value of the reflection counter 167 is 1 or more (step S2005: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the reflection counter 167 is 1 or more (step S2006). Here, when increasing the acquired number displayed on the number display image G31, the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31 is limited to a predetermined limit value. As a result, when the number of acquired items increases, it becomes possible to facilitate a long period of updating so that the display of the number of acquired items increases in the number display image G31, and the number of acquired items increases in the open / close execution mode. It becomes easier to give the player the impression of being there.

A plurality of types of values to be added to the acquired number are set at one update timing of the number display image G31. Specifically, the value to be added is "5", which is the first addition target value. , "3", which is a second addition target value smaller than the first addition target value, and "1", which is a third addition target value smaller than the second addition target value, are set. When the value of the reflection counter 167 is larger than the value of "12" preset as the first reference value, "5" is selected as the value to be added, and the value of the reflection counter 167 is set. If it is larger than the value of "5" preset as the second reference value, which is smaller than the first reference value, "3" is selected as the value to be added, and the value of the reflection counter 167. If is equal to or less than the value of "5", "1" is selected as the value to be added. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the increase in the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 from becoming an extremely large value without being reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31. At the same time, it is possible to diversify the mode of increasing the number of acquired images in the number display image G31.

Incidentally, when the payout motor 56a is operating at a normal speed, the payout device 56 pays out the game balls at a rate of one in 24 msec. The firing cycle of the game ball is 60 msec. On the other hand, the output cycle of the measurement command by the sound light side MPU 62 is about 720 msec. Then, since the maximum value of "18" is set as the value for the increase in the number of acquired pieces included in the measurement command for increase, the situation where the value of the reflection counter 167 is larger than the first reference value is Can occur.

For details on the arithmetic processing for measurement display, when the value of the reflection counter 167 is larger than the first reference value (step S2006: YES), the first addition target value is added to the total counter 168 (step S2007). ), The first addition target value is subtracted from the reflection counter 167 (step S2008). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 increases by the first addition target value, and the value of the increase of the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 increases by the first addition target value. Decrease.

When the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the first reference value and larger than the second reference value (step S2006: NO, step S2009: YES), the second addition target value is added to the total counter 168 (step S2006: NO, step S2009: YES). Step S2010), the second addition target value is subtracted from the reflection counter 167 (step S2011). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 increases by the second addition target value, and the value of the increase of the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 increases by the second addition target value. Decrease.

When the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the second reference value (step S2009: NO), the third addition target value is added to the total counter 168 (step S2012), and the reflection counter 167 to the third addition target. The value is subtracted (step S2013). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 increases by the third addition target value, and the value of the increase of the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 increases by the third addition target value. Decrease.

When the process of step S2004 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S2005, when the process of step S2008 is executed, when the process of step S2011 is executed, or when the process of step S2013 is executed, the total counter. The image data corresponding to the value of 168 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2014). Then, the parameter information applied to the image data is grasped (step S2015). As a result, image data for displaying the image corresponding to the value of the current total counter 168 as the number display image G31 is drawn in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). Set as a target. In addition, parameter information applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

Next, a state in which the numerical display effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 56 (a) shows the transmission timing of the measurement command from the sound light side MPU 62, FIG. 56 (b) shows how the value of the reflection counter 167 fluctuates, and FIG. 56 (c) shows the number display image G31. Indicates the update timing.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 56A, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound / light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72. In this case, the measurement command is an increase measurement command in which "17" is set as the increase in the number of acquired items. Therefore, at the timing of t1, the value of the reflection counter 167 is set to “17” as shown in FIG. 56 (b). However, since the timing of t1 is not the update timing of the number display image G31, the value set in the reflection counter 167 is not reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31.

After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), the number display image G31 is updated. In this case, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is “17”, which is a value larger than the first reference value, the value of the reflection counter 167 is the first addition target value as shown in FIG. 56 (b). "5" is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to the value obtained by adding the first addition target value to the values up to that point.

After that, at each of the timing of t3 and the timing of t4, the update timing of the number display image G31 is set as shown in FIG. 56 (c). In these cases, the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the first reference value and larger than the second reference value. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56B, the value of the reflection counter 167 is higher than the value of the second reference value. 2 The addition target value "3" is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to the value obtained by adding the second addition target value to the values up to that point.

After that, at the timing of t5, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound / light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. 56 (a). In this case, the measurement command is a reduction measurement command in which "3" is set as the reduction amount of the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the value of the reflection counter 167 is updated to “3” by subtracting “3” from “6” as shown in FIG. 56 (b).

After that, at each of the timing of t6 and the timing of t7, the update timing of the number display image G31 is set as shown in FIG. 56 (c). In these cases, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the second reference value, “1”, which is the third addition target value, is subtracted from the value of the reflection counter 167 as shown in FIG. 56 (b). Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to the value obtained by adding the third addition target value to the previous value.

After that, at the timing of t8, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound / light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. 56 (a). In this case, the measurement command is an increase measurement command in which "5" is set as the increase in the number of acquired items. Therefore, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 56B, the value of the reflection counter 167 is incremented by 5 from "1" and updated to "6".

After that, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), the number display image G31 is updated. In this case, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is again larger than the second reference value, as shown in FIG. 56B, the value of the reflection counter 167 is the second addition target value “3”. Is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to the value obtained by adding the second addition target value to the values up to that point.

After that, each of the timing of t10, the timing of t12, and the timing of t13 becomes the update timing of the number display image G31 as shown in FIG. 56 (c). In these cases, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the second reference value, “1”, which is the third addition target value, is subtracted from the value of the reflection counter 167 as shown in FIG. 56 (b). Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to the value obtained by adding the third addition target value to the values up to that point. Although the measurement command is transmitted at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 56 (a), since "0" is set as the information for the increase / decrease in the number of acquired pieces in the measurement command, the reflection counter. The value of 167 has not changed.

After that, at the timing of t14, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56 (c), but the value of the reflection counter 167 is “0” as shown in FIG. 56 (b). The value of the reflection counter 167 is maintained as it is, and the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is also maintained as it is.

After that, at the timing of t15, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound / light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. 56 (a). In this case, the measurement command is a reduction measurement command in which "5" is set as the reduction amount of the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing of t15, the value of the reflection counter 167 is subtracted by 5 from “0” and updated to “-5” as shown in FIG. 56 (b).

After that, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), the number display image G31 is updated. In this case, the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to a decrease in the number of acquired items. When the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to the decrease in the number of acquired items, it is reflected in the display of the number of acquired items at one time regardless of the value. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56B, the value of the reflection counter 167 is cleared to "0".

As described above, as a number display effect, the number of game balls acquired since the opening / closing execution mode is started is displayed while changing according to the increase / decrease in the actual number of acquisitions, so that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. However, the player can grasp the number of game balls that have been acquired up to that point. In this case, when increasing the acquired number displayed on the number display image G31, the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31 is limited to a predetermined limit value. As a result, when the number of acquired items increases, it becomes possible to facilitate a long period of updating so that the display of the number of acquired items increases in the number display image G31, and the number of acquired items increases in the open / close execution mode. It becomes easier to give the player the impression of being there.

A plurality of types of values to be added to the acquired number are set at one update timing of the number display image G31. The larger the value of the reflection counter 167, the larger the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31, and the smaller the value of the reflection counter 167, the larger the value of the number display image G31. The value to be added to the acquired number at the update timing of the times is a small value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the increase in the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 from becoming an extremely large value without being reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31. At the same time, it is possible to diversify the mode of increasing the number of acquired images in the number display image G31.

Even if the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes equal to or less than the first reference value and the second addition target value is added to the display of the acquired number of the number display image G31, the value of the reflection counter 167 is subsequently changed. When the value is larger than the first reference value, the situation returns to the situation where the first addition target value is added to the display of the acquired number of the number display image G31. This makes it possible to update the display of the acquired number in an appropriate manner for the situation at each update timing of the number display image G31.

When the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to the decrease in the number of acquired items, the value of the decrease is collectively acquired in the number display image G31 regardless of the value of the reflection counter 167. It is reflected in the display of the number. This makes it possible to prevent the period of being updated so that the display of the acquired number is reduced to continue for a long time. Further, when the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes a negative value, the value of the reflection counter 167 can be cleared to "0" at one update timing of the number display image G31, and then reflected. It is possible to make it easy for the value of the counter 167 to be a positive value. Therefore, it is possible to generate many opportunities to be updated so that the display of the acquired number increases.

<Further alternative form related to number display production>
-Instead of the configuration in which the prize ball completion command is transmitted from the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 to the MPU 62 on the sound light side, when the prize ball command is transmitted to the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55, the same prize ball command is sounded. It may be configured to transmit to the side MPU 62. In this case, the number of game balls to be paid out, although not actually paid out, is added to the display of the number of acquired pieces.

-The number of launching game balls detected by the launch ball detection sensor 155 and the number of return balls of the game ball detected by the return ball detection sensor 156 are reflected in the display of the acquired number. One or both may be configured not to be reflected in the display of the acquired number.

-The number display effect is configured to start when the opening period starts in the open / close execution mode, but instead, it starts when the opening period ends and the first round game round starts. It may be configured.

-The number display effect is configured to end when one open / close execution mode ends, but if the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, the number display effect in the high frequency support mode. Is continued, and if the open / close execution mode occurs multiple times without sandwiching the low frequency support mode, the number of game balls acquired since the first open / close execution mode is started is continuously displayed. May be. In addition, when the jackpot generation lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, the number display effect is continued in the high probability mode, and the open / close execution mode is generated multiple times without sandwiching the low probability mode. If this is the case, the number of game balls acquired since the first opening / closing execution mode is started may be continuously displayed.

-It is possible to specify whether or not the launch operation is being performed on the launch operation device 28, and the number display image G31 is determined according to whether or not the launch operation is being performed on the launch operation device 28. The value to be added to the acquired number may change at one update timing of. For example, even if the values to be added to the acquired number are the same, the number display image G31 is updated once in the situation where the firing operation is performed than in the situation where the firing operation is not performed. The value to be added to the acquired number may be a large value or a large value at the timing, or may be a small value or a small value. The touch sensor that detects that the player is touching the launch operation device 28 is configured to be able to specify whether or not the launch operation is being performed on the launch operation device 28. When the touch sensor is ON, it may be configured to specify that the firing operation is being performed, and in addition to or in place of the configuration, the rotation operation amount of the firing operation device 28 A configuration in which a variable resistor is provided to identify the situation in which a firing operation is performed when the detection result of the variable resistor corresponds to a result in which the rotation operation amount is equal to or more than a predetermined amount. May be.

<Further alternative form related to number display production>
-The target to which the number display effect is applied is not limited to the effect for displaying the acquired number of game balls in the open / close execution mode, and is arbitrary. For example, in a slot machine, when the number of remaining continuous games in an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as an RT game, an AT game, or an ART game, can increase in the middle of the advantageous gaming state, the remaining continuation as a number display effect. It may be configured to execute an increase display effect showing how the number of games is increasing. The arithmetic processing for the increase display executed by the display CPU 72 in order to perform the increase display effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57.

When an opportunity to increase the number of continuous games remaining in the advantageous gaming state occurs, the increase display effect is started. When it is the start timing of the increase display effect (step S2101: YES), the division process of the target increase value is executed (step S2102). In the division process of the target increase value, the target increase value determined as the number of games to be increased to the remaining number of continuous games in the advantageous gaming state is divided by "100" which is a predetermined division value. Multiple types of target increase values are set, and all of these multiple types of target increase values are set so that the quotient value when divided by the divided value is 8 or less, and when divided by the divided value. The quotient values of are set to differ from each other. Specifically, "50", "100" and "250" are set as the target increase values. When the target increase value is "50", the result of division by the division value is "0" and the remainder is "50", and when the target increase value is "100", the division value is divided. As a result, when the quotient is "1" and the remainder is "0", and the target increase value is "250", the result of division by the division value is "2" and the remainder is "50".

When the division process of the target increase value is executed, the value obtained by adding "1" to the value of the quotient derived by the division process is stored in the work RAM 73 as the unit increase value (step S2103). The unit increase value is a value that increases the display of the remaining number of continuous games displayed on the symbol display device 41 as an increase display effect at one update timing of the display. As described above, since the quotient of the result of division by the divided value differs depending on the type of the target increase value, the unit increase value also differs depending on the type of the target increase value.

After that, the setting process of the unit increase counter provided in the work RAM 73 is executed (step S2104). The unit increase counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the display by the increase display effect is updated by the display CPU 72 in the increase display effect this time. In step S2104, the target increase value this time is divided by the unit increase value derived in step S2103. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division is set in the unit increase counter. For example, when the target increase value is "250", the unit increase value is "3", and when the target increase value is divided by this unit increase value, the quotient is "83" and the remainder is "1". In this case, "83" is set in the unit increase counter. If the remainder is 1 or more as a result of dividing the target increase value by the unit increase value, the remainder is stored in the work RAM 73 as a residual value (step S2105).

When the process of step S2105 is executed, or when the update timing of the increase display effect is reached (step S2106: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the unit increase counter of the work RAM 73 is 1 or more (step S2107). When the value of the unit increase counter is 1 or more (step S2107: YES), the unit increase value calculated in step S2103 is added to the current value of the total counter provided in the work RAM 73 (step S2108). ). The total counter is a counter that determines the value when the remaining number of continuous games is displayed as a game number image, and the value stored in the total counter is displayed as a game number image. When the increase display effect is started, the number of continuous games remaining at that time is set in the total counter.

In step S2108, the unit increase value is added to the current value of the total counter, so that the value of the number of games image is increased by the unit increase value from the current value. After that, the value of the unit increase counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2109).

When the value of the unit increase counter is "0" (step S2107: NO), the remaining value is added to the total counter on condition that the remaining value is stored in the work RAM 73 (step S2110: YES) (step S2110: YES). Step S2111). As a result, the value of the number of games image is increased by the remaining value from the current value.

When the process of step S2109 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S2110, or when the process of step S2111 is executed, the image data corresponding to the value of the total counter is grasped as the image data to be used this time. (Step S2112). Then, the parameter information applied to the image data is grasped (step S2113). As a result, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605), image data for displaying an image corresponding to the value of the current total counter as a game number image is used as a drawing target. Set. In addition, parameter information applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

According to the above configuration, when the effect of increasing the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state is executed, the unit increase value changes according to the target increase value, so that the target increase value is added to the number of continuous games. In this case, it is possible to diversify the mode of increasing the number of games at each update timing of the image.

Further, even when the mode of increasing the number of continuous games is diversified in this way, the processing configuration for determining the unit increase value, the processing configuration for setting the value of the unit increase counter, and the game number image are provided. The processing configuration for updating is constant regardless of the target increase value. This makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration.

Further, since the unit increase value is set according to the target increase value, it is possible to make the player predict the target increase value by confirming the unit increase value. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the update mode of the game number image, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the increased display effect.

In addition, a plurality of types of division values for executing the division process of the target increase value (step S2102) may be prepared, and the division process may be executed using the division value determined by the lottery. In this case, even if the target increase value is the same, it is possible to diversify the mode of increasing the number of games at each update timing of the number of games image when the target increase value is added to the number of continuous games.

<Structure for performing pseudo video production>
Next, a configuration for performing a pseudo moving image effect will be described.

The pseudo moving image effect is an effect in which the moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 over the pseudo moving image effect period. In the pseudo moving image effect period, a specific update number (for example, 600 times) occurs in which at least a part of the image displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed at a plurality of image update timings. At each update timing of the image in the pseudo moving image production period, one still image data 171 to 173 to be used at the update timing is drawn with respect to the entire frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. , The image by the one still image data 171 to 173 is displayed over the entire symbol display device 41. In this case, the number of still image data 171 to 173 to be used during the pseudo moving image effect period is smaller than the number of specific updates.

Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 58, the memory module 74 includes the image data 171 for the first character and the effect image data 172 as still image data 171 to 173 for executing the pseudo moving image effect. , Image data 173 for the second character is stored in advance. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59A, the image data 171 for the first character is, as the image G41 for the first character, the first pseudo-moving character G42 representing a person and the first pseudo-moving character G42. The symbol display device 41 is a second pseudo-moving character G43 representing a person different from the above, and a pseudo-moving background G44 displayed behind the first pseudo-moving character G42 and the second pseudo-moving character G43. It is image data to be displayed on the whole of. The first character image G41 is an image captured by an image pickup device such as a camera.

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59B, the effect image data 172 displays a ray image G47 showing a state in which light is emitted from the light source to the surroundings in front of the effect background G46 as the effect image G45. This is image data for displaying the image on the entire symbol display device 41. The effect image G45 is an image for enhancing the visual effect, and is an image showing a blast, an image showing water droplets, and an aura showing as if the surroundings of the character are emitting light, in addition to the ray image G47. Images and the like can be mentioned. The effect image G45 is an image created by using software for creating an image.

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59 (c), the second character image data 173 includes the first pseudo moving character G42 and the first pseudo-moving character G42 as the second character image G48, similarly to the first character image G41. 2 This is image data for displaying the pseudo-moving character G43 and the pseudo-moving background G44 on the entire symbol display device 41. The second character image G48 is an image captured by an image pickup device such as a camera.

However, the display mode of the first pseudo-moving character G42 and the second pseudo-moving character G43 by the second character image data 173 is the first pseudo-moving character G42 and the second pseudo-moving by the first character image data 171. It is different from the display mode of the character G43. Specifically, the shape of the hand region representing a hand, which is a part of the first pseudo-moving character G42, the orientation of the body region representing the torso, the relative position of the hand region with respect to the torso region, and the like are the first characters. The image G41 for the second character and the image G48 for the second character are different. Further, the shape of the hand region representing the hand, which is a part of the second pseudo-moving character G43, the orientation of the body region representing the torso, the relative position of the hand region with respect to the torso region, and the like are the images G41 for the first character. And the image G48 for the second character are different.

There is no continuity in the display mode of the first pseudo moving character G42 between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48, and similarly, the display mode of the second pseudo moving character G43 is also continuous. There is no. The fact that the display mode of the first pseudo-moving character G42 is not continuous means that the shape of a predetermined area such as the hand area of the first pseudo-moving character G42 in the second character image G48, and the predetermined area and the first pseudo. It means that the relative position with respect to the other region of the moving image character G42 is different from the mode in the update timing of the next image assumed from the display mode of the first character image G41. Similarly, the fact that the display mode of the second pseudo-moving character G43 is not continuous means that the shape of a predetermined area such as the hand area of the second pseudo-moving character G43 in the image G48 for the second character and the predetermined area. It means that the relative position between the second pseudo moving character G43 and the other region of the second pseudo moving character G43 is different from the mode in the update timing of the next image assumed from the display mode of the first character image G41.

A second display period for displaying the effect image G45 is set between the first display period for displaying the first character image G41 and the third display period for displaying the second character image G48. As a result, for each pseudo moving image between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48, rather than the case where the second character image G48 is displayed immediately after the first character image G41 is displayed. The discontinuity of the characters G42 and G43 becomes inconspicuous. Then, while making the discontinuity of the pseudo moving characters G42 and G43 inconspicuous, the pseudo moving characters G42 and G43 are displayed in different display modes in the first display period and the third display period, respectively. As a result, the number of character image data 171 and 173 is small with respect to the image update timing, and the operations of the pseudo moving characters G42 and G43 are not continuous, while using the character image data 171 and 173. It is possible to make the player recognize that the moving images of the moving characters G42 and G43 are being displayed.

In the first display period for displaying the image G41 for the first character, the second display period for displaying the effect image G45, and the third display period for displaying the image G48 for the second character, the image update timing occurs a plurality of times. Each display period is the same period as each other. In a configuration in which image update timings occur multiple times in each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, one type of image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period is as described above. Only. However, in each of the display periods, the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame areas 82a and 82b is changed at each update timing. Specifically, in each image data 171 to 173, the range to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn is sequentially different. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the range to be drawn is different in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in each of the image data 171 to 173.

When drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP76, the data is written to all the unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a and 82b is 800 × 600. It is the number of dots. On the other hand, the image data 171 for the first character, the effect image data 172, and the image data 173 for the second character are larger than the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b in the size stored in the memory module 74. It is the number of pixels. The range that can be drawn by the image data 171 to 173 of the initial magnification is larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b in both the horizontal dimension and the vertical dimension. This makes it possible to make the range to be drawn different in one type of image data 171 to 173 that is the target of use in each display period. Further, even if the range to be drawn is different in the one type of image data 171 to 173 to be used in this way, the one type of image data 171 to 173 is applied to the entire design display device 41. It is possible to display the image corresponding to.

The sizes of the image data 171 for the first character, the effect image data 172, and the image data 173 for the second character stored in the memory modules 74 are the same as each other. The mode in which the range to be drawn is different in each image data 171 to 173 is the same regardless of any of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period. Specifically, at the start timing of each display period, a range close to a predetermined angle side in the image data 171 to 173 to be used is set as a range to be drawn. Then, at the subsequent update timing of the image, the range to be drawn is changed so that the range to be drawn gradually moves toward the angle opposite to the predetermined angle. It has been set.

As shown in FIG. 58, the data for changing the range to be drawn is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as the pseudo moving image table 174. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pseudo moving table 174. As shown in FIG. 61, pointer information that becomes a serial number is set in the pseudo moving image table 174, and drawing range information that determines a range to be drawn corresponding to each pointer information is set. .. The pointer information is set for the number of image update timings that occur in each display period. Thereby, by referring to the pseudo moving image table 174 in each display period, it is possible to derive the drawing range information corresponding to all the update timings. Further, since the pseudo moving image table 174 is also used in each display period, the pseudo moving image table 174 is stored in advance as compared with the configuration in which the pseudo moving image table 174 is prepared in advance corresponding to each display period. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storage.

FIG. 62 is a time chart showing how the pseudo moving image effect is executed. 62 (a) shows the first display period, FIG. 62 (b) shows the second display period, FIG. 62 (c) shows the third display period, and FIG. 62 (d) is used in each display period. It shows how the range to be drawn of the target image data 171 to 173 is changed.

By starting the pseudo moving image effect at the timing of t1, the first display period is started as shown in FIG. 62 (a). The first display period continues from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, and during that period, the range to be drawn in the image data 171 for the first character is as shown in FIG. 62 (d). It is gradually changed while having a certain direction.

At the timing of t2, the first display period ends as shown in FIG. 62 (a), and the second display period starts as shown in FIG. 62 (b). The second display period continues from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, and during that period, the range to be drawn in the effect image data 172 is in a certain direction as shown in FIG. 62 (d). It is gradually changed while having sex. This directionality and the amount of deviation of the drawing range between continuous update timings are the same as in the case of the first display period.

At the timing of t3, the second display period ends as shown in FIG. 62 (b), and the third display period starts as shown in FIG. 62 (c). The third display period continues from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, and during that period, the range to be drawn in the second character image data 173 is as shown in FIG. 62 (d). It is gradually changed while having a certain direction. The amount of deviation of the drawing range between this directionality and continuous update timing is the same as in the case of the first display period and the second display period.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the pseudo moving image effect will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for pseudo moving image production executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the pseudo moving image effect is executed by the effect calculation process in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in the situation where the pseudo moving image effect should be executed.

When it is the first display period (step S2201: YES), it is determined whether or not this time is the start timing of the first display period (step S2202). It should be noted that the display CPU 72 reads the execution target table for controlling the overall flow of the pseudo moving image effect from the memory module 74 when starting the pseudo moving image effect, and by referring to the execution target table, any of the following times. It identifies whether it corresponds to the display period and whether it is the start timing of each display period.

When it is the start timing of the first display period (step S2202: YES), the pseudo moving image table 174 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S2203). When a negative determination is made in step S2202 or when the process of step S2203 is executed, the image data 171 for the first character is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2204). Further, the drawing range information set corresponding to the pointer information currently referred to in the pseudo moving image table 174 is grasped (step S2205). After that, after grasping the parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2206), the pointer information of the reference target is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented by 1. S2207).

When the arithmetic processing for pseudo moving image production is executed as described above, the image data 171 for the first character is set as the drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). Will be done. Further, the parameter information grasped in step S2205 and step S2206 is set in the drawing list.

When it is the second display period (step S2201: NO, step S2208: YES), it is determined whether or not this time is the start timing of the second display period (step S2209). When it is the start timing of the second display period (step S2209: YES), the value of the pointer information of the reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 already read in the work RAM 73 in the first display period is cleared to "0". (Step S2210). As a result, the drawing range information set corresponding to the first pointer information in the pseudo moving image table 174 becomes the target of use at the start timing of the second display period.

When a negative determination is made in step S2209, or when the process of step S2210 is executed, the effect image data 172 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2211). Further, the drawing range information set corresponding to the pointer information currently referred to in the pseudo moving image table 174 is grasped (step S2212). After that, after grasping the parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2213), the pointer information of the reference target is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented by 1. S2214).

When the calculation process for pseudo moving image production is executed as described above, the effect image data 172 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). Further, the parameter information grasped in step S2212 and step S2213 is set in the drawing list.

When it is the third display period (step S2201 and step S2208: NO), it is determined whether or not this time is the start timing of the third display period (step S2215). When it is the start timing of the third display period (step S2215: YES), the value of the pointer information of the reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 already read in the work RAM 73 in the first display period is cleared to "0". (Step S2216). As a result, the drawing range information set corresponding to the first pointer information in the pseudo moving image table 174 becomes the target of use at the start timing of the third display period.

When a negative determination is made in step S2215 or when the process of step S2216 is executed, the image data 173 for the second character is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2217). Further, the drawing range information set corresponding to the pointer information currently referred to in the pseudo moving image table 174 is grasped (step S2218). After that, after grasping the parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2219), the pointer information of the reference target is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented by 1. S2220).

When the arithmetic processing for pseudo moving image production is executed as described above, the image data 173 for the second character is set as the drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). Will be done. Further, the parameter information grasped in step S2218 and step S2219 is set in the drawing list.

Here, the image data 171 for the first character and the image data 173 for the second character are used individually in an effect different from the pseudo moving image effect. Specifically, the image data 171 for the first character and the image data 173 for the second character are used as display images of the round effect executed during different round games in the open / close execution mode which is the high frequency winning mode. .. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for round effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the round effect is executed by the effect operation process in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in the situation where the round effect should be executed.

When it is the execution period of the first round game (step S2301: YES), the image data 171 for the first character is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2302), and other image data is used as the image data to be used this time. Grasp (step S2303). After that, the parameter information applied to these image data is grasped (step S2304). When the arithmetic processing for round effect is executed in this way, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) is grasped by the first character image data 171 and step S2303. Image data is set as the drawing target. Further, the parameter information grasped in step S2304 is set in the drawing list.

In the case of the execution period of the eighth round game (step S2305: YES), the image data 173 for the second character is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2306), and the other image data is used as the image data this time. (Step S2307). After that, the parameter information applied to these image data is grasped (step S2308). When the arithmetic processing for round effect is executed in this way, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) is grasped by the second character image data 173 and step S2307. Image data is set as the drawing target. Further, the parameter information grasped in step S2308 is set in the drawing list.

If it is not the first round game or the eighth round game, other processing is executed (step S2309). In this case, the image data 171 for the first character and the image data 173 for the second character are not selected as the image data to be used.

As described above, a second display period for displaying the effect image G45 is set between the first display period for displaying the first character image G41 and the third display period for displaying the second character image G48. ing. As a result, for each pseudo moving image between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48, rather than the case where the second character image G48 is displayed immediately after the first character image G41 is displayed. The discontinuity of the characters G42 and G43 becomes inconspicuous. Then, while making the discontinuity of the pseudo moving characters G42 and G43 inconspicuous, the pseudo moving characters G42 and G43 are displayed in different display modes in the first display period and the second display period, respectively. As a result, the number of character image data 171 and 173 is small with respect to the image update timing, and the operations of the pseudo moving characters G42 and G43 are not continuous, while using the character image data 171 and 173. It is possible to make the player recognize that the moving images of the moving characters G42 and G43 are being displayed.

In particular, the image data 171 for the first character and the image data 173 for the second character are image data prepared for displaying images for round effect in different round games, and are for the first character for the purpose of use thereof. The continuity of the movements of the pseudo moving characters G42 and G43 between the image G41 and the second character image G48 is not required. In this case, the image for round effect is produced by causing the display period of the first character image G41 and the display period of the second character image G48 so as to sandwich the display period of the effect image G45 as described above. It is possible to execute a pseudo moving image effect by using the image data 171 for the first character and the image data 173 for the second character prepared for display.

The drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame areas 82a and 82b in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect is changed at each update timing. This makes it possible to display a moving image while using one type of image data 171 to 173 in each display period.

The pseudo moving image table 174 for changing the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame areas 82a and 82b in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect is also used in each display period. This makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while suppressing the storage capacity required for the memory module 74.

<Another form related to pseudo video production>
The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which only two types of character image data 171 and 173 for displaying the pseudo moving characters G42 and G43 exist, and a configuration in which three or more types exist may be used. For example, apart from the image data 171 for the first character and the image data 173 for the second character, the characters G42 and G43 for pseudo moving images are displayed, and the images G41 for the first character and the image G48 for the second character are pseudo. The image data for the third character, which makes the display modes of the moving characters G42 and G43 different, may be stored in the memory module 74 in advance. In this case, as the pseudo moving image effect period, the first display period in which the image data 171 for the first character is used, the second display period in which the effect image data 172 is used, and the image data 173 for the second character are used. There is a third display period to be used, a fourth display period to which the effect image data 172 or different effect image data is used, and a fifth display period to which the image data for the third character is used. Will be done.

-The display periods of the pseudo-movie effects are not limited to the same period, and the display periods may be substantially the same period although they are different from each other. At least one of the display periods may be configured to be a period significantly different from the other display periods. For example, although the first display period and the second display period are the same or substantially the same period, the effect period may be a period longer or shorter than the first display period and the second display period. If each display period is different from each other, by creating a pseudo-video table 174 so as to correspond to all update timings of the display period that is the longest period of each display period, this can be done in other display periods as well. It is possible to also use the pseudo moving image table 174.

If the drawing range information derived from the pseudo-movie table 174 has continuity between the start timing and the end timing, it is assumed that the pseudo-movie table 174 is used multiple times in one display period in the pseudo-movie production. Does not cause any discomfort. In this case, it is not necessary that the data corresponding to the entire one display period is set in the pseudo moving image table 174, and it is sufficient that only the data corresponding to a part of the one display period is set. be.

The image data 171 for the first character, the effect image data 172, and the image data 173 for the second character are configured to have a size larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b in the size of the initial magnification stored in the memory module 74. It is not limited, and the size of the initial magnification is the same as or smaller than the frame areas 82a and 82b, and is expanded so as to be larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b after being read from the memory module 74. It may be configured so that the process is executed. In this case, when it is used to display the image for the round effect, the image data 171 for the first character and the image data 173 for the second character are used at the size of the initial magnification, and the image for the pseudo moving image effect is used. When it is used for display, the image data 171 for the first character and the image data 173 for the second character may be used in a size enlarged from the size of the initial magnification.

A method for changing the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame areas 82a and 82b in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect at each update timing is the drawing target in the image data 171 to 173. It is not limited to the method of making the range different. For example, a method may be used in which the range to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173 is gradually narrowed so that the image to be displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed as a result. Further, it may be a method of gradually widening the range to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173 so that the image to be displayed is gradually reduced and displayed as a result.

-In the first display period of the pseudo moving image effect, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which only the image data 171 for the first character is the image data to be used, and in the first display period, the image data 171 for the first character is framed. After drawing in the areas 82a and 82b, other image data may be drawn in a part of the frame areas 82a and 82b. Even in this case, the image G41 for the first character is displayed behind the other image data, and the effect image G45 is generated between the image G41 for the first character and the image G48 for the second character. By displaying the images, it is possible to make the player recognize that the moving images of the pseudo moving characters G42 and G43 are displayed.

<Further alternative form related to pseudo video production>
-As an aspect of the pseudo moving image effect, the aspect shown in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c) can be considered. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (c), the pseudo moving character G51 is displayed in the pseudo moving image effect. The first pseudo-moving image data and the second pseudo-moving image data are stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data for displaying the pseudo-moving character G51, and the first pseudo-moving image data is used. The first pseudo moving image G52 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (a) by being the target, and the second pseudo moving image image data is used as shown in FIG. 65 (c). The pseudo moving image G53 is displayed.

In the first pseudo moving image G52, as shown in FIG. 65A, a state before the predetermined portion G51a (specifically, both arms) of the pseudo moving character G51 moves in a predetermined motion path is displayed, and the second is displayed. In the simulated moving image G53, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), a state after the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo moving character G51 moves in a predetermined operation path is displayed. However, the positions of the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo-moving character G51 between the first pseudo-moving image G52 and the second pseudo-moving image G53 are separated to such an extent that it is difficult for the player to recognize the continuity of movement. ..

On the other hand, between the display period of the first pseudo moving image G52 and the display period of the second pseudo moving image G53, the pseudo moving effect image G54 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (b). .. In this pseudo moving image effect image G54, a large number of small individual images G54a such as bubbles are displayed. Further, the pseudo moving image effect image G54 is displayed over a predetermined period, and during the predetermined period, a large number of small individual images G54a move in the predetermined operation path of the pseudo moving character G51 in the predetermined portion G51a. The video is displayed so that it moves in the same direction as.

With the above configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize the continuity of movement at the position of the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo-moving character G51 between the first pseudo-moving image G52 and the second pseudo-moving image G53. Even if the configurations are separated to some extent, the visual effect of the movement of the small individual image G54a in the effect image G54 for pseudo moving image causes between the image G52 for first pseudo moving image and the image G53 for second pseudo moving image. It is possible to make the player recognize that the predetermined portion G51a has moved along the predetermined movement path. As a result, even if the number of pseudo moving image data for displaying the pseudo moving character G51 is small, the predetermined portion G51a between the first pseudo moving image G52 and the second pseudo moving image G53 It is possible to make the player recognize that the pseudo-moving character G51 is being displayed as a moving image while making the discontinuity of the positions of the above inconspicuous.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the electrical configuration related to display control is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration in this embodiment.

The configuration shown in FIG. 66 includes a main control device 50 as in the first embodiment. Further, the main control device 50 has a payout control device 55 that controls the payout device 56, and a power supply that has a function of supplying electric power to each device including the main control device 50 and drives and controls the game ball launch mechanism 58. The launch control device 57, the special figure unit 37 that displays the result of the game round, and the normal figure unit 38 that displays the result of the public electric power opening lottery are electrically connected. Further, a voice emission control device 60 for driving and controlling the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50 is provided, and the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 is further provided. A display control device 200 that controls the symbol display device 41 based on the symbol display device 41 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 66, the display control device 200 includes a display control board 206 on which a display CPU 201, a work RAM 202, a memory module 203, a VRAM 204, and a video display processor (VDP) 205 are mounted. ..

The display CPU 201 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 200, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program or the like. Specifically, the display CPU 201 is connected to the input port 207 mounted on the display control board 206 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 201 through the input port 207. Will be done.

The display CPU 201 is connected to the work RAM 202, the memory module 203, and the VRAM 204 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 based on a command received from the voice emission control device 60. Give a transfer instruction. Further, the display CPU 201 is connected to the VDP 205 via a bus, and gives a drawing instruction for displaying a three-dimensional image (3D image) on the symbol display device 41 based on a command received from the voice emission control device 60. conduct. Hereinafter, the memory module 203, the work RAM 202, the VRAM 204, and the VDP 205 will be described.

The memory module 203 stores in advance control data including a control program and fixed value data, and also stores various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image in advance. The memory module 203 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention. Incidentally, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is performed well. Further, the memory module 203 is used as a non-write and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The various image data stored in the memory module 203 include object data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, texture data pasted on the object data, and the backmost image in one frame of the image. The image data for the back surface that constitutes the image of the above is included.

Here, the object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in the world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of vertices having three-dimensional coordinates. For example, in order to apply a surface model to the object data, the vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with the reference coordinates set in advance for each object data as the origin. That is, in each object data, the relative position (that is, the direction and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in the self-contained local coordinate system.

The texture data is an image to be pasted on each polygon of the object data, and when the texture data is pasted on the object data, an image corresponding to the object data, for example, a display image including a pattern, a character, or the like is generated. The way of holding the texture data is arbitrary, but includes at least a combination of, for example, bitmap format data and a color palette referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image.

The rearmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The way of holding the image data for the back surface is arbitrary, but for example, the two-dimensional still image data is stored and held as compressed JPEG format data. Incidentally, when the image data for the back surface is arranged in the world coordinate system, the plate-shaped object data (that is, the plate polygon) is used.

The work RAM 202 is a storage means for temporarily storing control data read from and transferred from the memory module 203, and for temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 202 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storage retention, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the work RAM 202 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 201 to the memory module 203. Then, the display CPU 201 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 202 into the internal memory area (register group) as needed, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 204 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 204 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage retention, and in detail, SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the VRAM 204 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 204 includes an expansion buffer 211, and image data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 205 to the memory module 203. Further, the VRAM 204 is provided with a frame buffer 212 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 205.

The VDP 205 is an image generation device that draws on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the expansion buffer 211 based on the drawing instruction from the display CPU 201. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 41b incorporated so as to drive and control a liquid crystal display unit 41a in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP205 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 205 includes a geometry calculation unit 221, a rendering unit 222, a register 223, and a display circuit 225. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to the I / F 226 for the display CPU 201 and the I / F 227 for the VRAM 204.

The I / F 226 for the display CPU 201 stores the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 201 in the register 223. The geometry calculation unit 221 reads various image data stored in the memory module 203 into the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 based on the drawing list stored in the register 223. Further, the geometry calculation unit 221 arranges the object data designated as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system. Further, the geometry calculation unit 221 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after arranging the object data in the world coordinate system. Finally, the object is clipped so as to correspond to the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface P.

The rendering unit 222 adjusts the light source and attaches the texture data to each clipped object data based on the drawing list stored in the register 223, and determines the appearance of the object data. Further, the rendering unit 222 projects each object data on a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, and makes various adjustments based on the depth information to frame the drawing data for one frame which is the two-dimensional data. Create in buffer 212. The drawing data for one frame is the data required to display the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. say.

In addition, all the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may be provided by the drawing list, and a memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the VDP 205, and the control program and the drawing list are provided. The geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may execute the processing depending on the contents of the above. Further, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 203. Further, the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may be configured to execute the process only by the operation of the hard circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using the program.

Here, the frame buffer 212 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 212a and 212b. Specifically, a first frame region 212a and a second frame region 212b are provided. Each of these frame areas 212a and 212b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 212a and 212b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, a full-color method is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) at each dot. Corresponding to this, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

The method is not limited to the full-color method. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed at each dot, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 212 is provided with the first frame area 212a and the second frame area 212b, drawing on the symbol display device 41 is executed using the drawing data created in one frame area. , Creation of drawing data to be used in the future is executed for other frame areas. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 212.

In the display circuit 225, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 212a or the second frame area 212b, and the image signal is transmitted to the display circuit 225. It is output to the symbol display device 41 via the connected output port 208. Specifically, drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 212a and 212b to the display circuit 225. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 41. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output based on the gradation data. A synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal is also output from the display circuit 225.

<Basic processing in display CPU 201>
Next, the basic processing in the display CPU 201 will be described.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing in the present embodiment. In the V interrupt process, when this time is the start timing of power supply to the display CPU 201 (step S2401: YES), all the texture data stored in advance in the memory module 203 is provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. It is read out to the texture area 211a (step S2402).

When a negative determination is made in step S2401 or when the process of step S2402 is executed, the command analysis process is executed (step S2403). Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 202 are analyzed. Here, when the display CPU 201 receives the strobe signal from the sound / light side MPU 62, the display CPU 201 executes the command interrupt processing regardless of the processing being executed at that time. In the command interrupt process, the command received on the input port 207 is transferred to the command buffer provided in the work RAM 202.

After that, the command correspondence process is executed on condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving a new command (step S2404: YES) (step S2405). In the command correspondence process, the execution target table for executing the program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 203. The execution target table is a group of information in which processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing of an image is defined when a moving image corresponding to a received command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. be.

The commands received by the display CPU 201 from the sound / light side MPU 62 include a command at the start of fluctuation, a command at the start of the advance notice effect, a command at the start of normal reach, and a command at the start of super reach, as in the first embodiment. There are a command at the start of the final effect, a command at the start of the standby display, a command at the start of the final display, and the like. When these commands are received, the execution target table required to execute the effect for the game round corresponding to each command on the symbol display device 41 is read out.

When a negative determination is made in step S2404, or when the process of step S2405 is executed, the task process is executed (step S2406). In the task processing, by referring to the control data of the current processing times in the data table set as the target of use, a drawing instruction is given to the VDP 205 in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing. Set various data required above. Specifically, as the various data, the address information of the area where the image data of the control target is stored in the memory module 203, the address information of the area where the image data of the control target is transferred in the VRAM 204, and the image data of the control target are used. There is information on the target frame areas 212a and 212b for which drawing data should be created, and various information for creating a 3D image using a virtual three-dimensional space.

After that, the drawing list output process is executed (step S2407). In the drawing list output processing, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to VDP205. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 205 creates drawing data in the frame areas 212a and 212b of the VRAM 204 according to this drawing list.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the task processing of step S2406.

In the task process, first, the setting process for starting control is executed (step S2501). In the setting process for starting control, a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) is executed in the display CPU 201 at this processing time. The individual image is a 2D image defined by still image data such as image data for the back surface, or a 3D image defined by a combination of image data for an object and image data for a texture. That is.

Specifically, regarding the setting process for control start, first, based on the execution target table currently set, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be controlled start in this process. If it exists, the work RAM 202 searches for a free buffer area for performing various operations in controlling the individual image, and has a one-to-one correspondence with the individual image grasped as the control start target. Allocate free buffer area so that. Further, the initialization process is executed for all the reserved free buffer areas, and the parameters for starting control according to the individual images are set for the initialized free buffer areas.

After that, the control update target is grasped (step S2502). The control update target is an individual image for which the control start processing has been completed and may be included in the image for one frame after the current processing.

After that, the background arithmetic processing is executed (step S2503). In the background calculation process, the coordinates, rotation angle, scale, light information for adding light and shade, and projection in the world coordinate system are performed for the backmost image that constitutes the background image and the background character. It executes a process of calculating and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information to be performed and Z test designation.

After that, the effect calculation process is executed (step S2504). In the effect calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the above-mentioned various parameters for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect is executed.

After that, the symbol calculation process is executed (step S2505). In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the above-mentioned various parameters is executed for the image of the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner in each game.

Incidentally, in each process of step S2503 to step S2505, a process of updating the control start parameter set in step S2501 is executed. Further, in each process of steps S2503 to S2505, animation data set to change various parameters of individual images according to a specific pattern each time the image update timing is reached are used. This animation data is defined according to the type of individual image. Further, the animation data is stored in the memory module 203 in advance, and is pre-transferred to the work RAM 202 by the time when the display CPU 201 needs to read the data.

After that, the process of grasping the object to be arranged in the world coordinate system is executed (step S2506). In the process of grasping the object to be placed in the world coordinate system, the process of grasping the individual image set as the drawing target in the current drawing list among the individual images targeted for control update by each process of steps S2503 to S2505. To execute. The grasp is performed based on the currently set execution target table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

That is, since the number of individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 201 is set to be larger than the number of individual images to be controlled by the VDP 205, the adjustment is performed in step S2506. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled by the display CPU 201 may be the same as the individual image to be controlled by the VDP 205. In this case, the process of step S2506 is executed. No need.

<Basic processing in VDP205>
Next, the basic processing executed by the VDP 205 will be described.

In VDP205, a process of setting the value of the register 223 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 201, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 212a and 212b of the frame buffer 212 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 201, At least the process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 212a and 212b.

Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 223 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 226 for the display CPU 201. Further, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) in cooperation with the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222. Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 225 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 201 to the VDP 205 will be described. 69 (a) to 69 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information on the target buffer, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 212a and the second frame area 212b is to be created for the image for one frame related to the drawing list, is set. There is. In addition, various designated information is set in the header information.

In addition to the above header information, multiple types of image data to be placed in the world coordinate system when creating the drawing data this time are set in the drawing list, and information on the drawing order of each image data and information on the drawing order of each image data. Parameter information of each image data is set. In detail, the information of the drawing order is set so as to be the numerical information of the serial number, and the parameter information is set so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information.

In the drawing list of FIG. 69 (a), the image data for the back surface is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second object, the background object B is set as the third object, and so on. There is. Further, the image data for the effect is set in the order after the image data for the background, for example, the object A for the effect is set as the mth, the object B for the effect is set as the m + 1th, and so on. There is. Further, the image data for the design is set in the order after the image data for the effect. For example, the object A for the design is set as the nth, the object B for the design is set as the n + 1th, and so on. There is.

The order in which each image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the above, and the order in which the image data is set may be the reverse of the above. The image data for the effect or the image data for the background may be set after the data, and the image data for the design is set in the order between the image data for the predetermined effect and the image data for the other effect. It may have been done.

Parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), ..., P (m), P (m + 1), ..., P (n), P (n + 1), ... , Multiple types of parameter information are set. Regarding the parameter information P (1) of the image data for the back surface, specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the information of the address of the area where the image data for the back surface is stored in the memory module 203 and the back surface. Coordinate information (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating a position in the world coordinate system when setting image data for, and world coordinates when setting image data for the back Information on the rotation angle indicating the rotation angle in the system, information on the scale indicating the magnification when setting in the world coordinate system with respect to the scale set as the initial state of the image data for the back surface, and information on the back surface. Information with a uniform α value indicating the entire transparency information (or transparency information) when setting image data is set.

Here, the coordinate information is set individually for all the vertices of the object data. Moreover, although the information of this coordinate is set for the object data, it is not set for the texture data. In the texture data, the coordinate values of each pixel are predetermined in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 203 in a state of being attached to the combination of the object data and the texture data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by VDP205 when texture mapping.

In the parameter information (P1), the camera information including the coordinates and orientation information of the virtual camera when the image data for the back surface is projected on the virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing, and the image data for the back surface are rendered. Light information, including information on the position and orientation of the virtual light source that determines the shadow in the case, is set.

In the parameter information (P1), information specified by the Z test indicating whether or not the Z buffer method, which is a kind of method for erasing the hidden surface, is applied is set. The Z-buffer method is a pixel (or voxel, pixel, polygon) lined up on the Z-axis when a large number of objects or 2D images overlap in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system. This is a processing method for depth adjustment in which the distance from the viewpoint is sequentially referred to, and the numerical information set in the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set in the corresponding unit area in the frame areas 212a and 212b.

In addition to the Z-buffer method, a Z-sort method is set as a method for erasing the hidden surface. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which the numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in the corresponding unit area in the frame areas 212a and 212b for each pixel arranged on the Z axis. When applying the Z sort method, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis. In this state, the addition processing of the numerical information and the arithmetic processing for fusion are executed. Although the description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sorting is omitted, it is activated when the effect image is displayed.

In the parameter information (P1), information on α data designation indicating whether or not α data is applied and an application target, and information on fog designation indicating whether or not fog is applied and an application target are set.

Here, the α value is the transparency information of the corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the above-mentioned uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transparent information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 201. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparent information applied to each pixel of two-dimensional still image data and texture data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 203 as image data. In the α data, the transparency information can be different for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same texture data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

By setting a uniform α value and α data as described above, the transparency of two-dimensional still image data and texture data is not controlled finely on a pixel-by-pixel basis, but is controlled uniformly for all pixels. In a good situation, it is possible to reduce the required data capacity by being able to handle with a uniform α value, and it is also possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units by applying α data.

The fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction, specifically, a position in the Z-axis direction in the world coordinate system. Fog is used to represent fog or the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, the fog is applied to the image for one frame in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, if the same fog as other objects is applied to the object located on the back side in the Z-axis direction, it will be too dark and the texture will not be obtained. In this case, another fog is set for the object. It is good to have a configuration. This makes it possible to obtain the effect of setting the fog while not impairing the texture.

In other parameters such as parameter information P (2), as shown in FIG. 69 (c), among the various information in FIG. 69 (b), the object information and the texture are replaced with the image data information for the back surface. Information and is set. As these information, information on the address of the area where the object or texture is stored is set in the memory module 203.

The drawing process in the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70. In the following description, a state in which drawing data is created with the execution of the drawing process will be described with reference to FIG. 71.

First, it is determined whether or not a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 201 (step S2601). If a new drawing list has been received, the background setting process is executed (step S2602).

In the background setting process, among the image data specified in the drawing list this time, the image data for the back surface for displaying the background image and the object data for displaying the character are grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and the object data are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

If it is not arranged, the free buffer area to be referred to for placement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if the free buffer area is secured, the initialization process of that area is executed. After that, the memory module 203 grasps and reads out the address where the image data is stored, and at the same time, the coordinate values of the local coordinate system for the image data so as to be the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale specified in the drawing list. Is executed in the world conversion process for converting to the coordinate values of the world coordinate system, and is set in the buffer area secured above.

If it is placed, the update processing of various parameters set in the buffer area already secured is executed. Further, in the background setting process, the control end process for erasing the background image data not specified in the drawing list this time among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

After that, the setting process for the effect is executed (step S2603). In the setting process for the effect, among the image data specified in the drawing list this time, the object data for displaying the effect image is grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the setting process for the background. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for the effect, the control end process for erasing the image data for the effect that is not specified in the drawing list of this time among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

After that, the setting process for the symbol is executed (step S2604). In the setting process for the symbol, among the image data specified in the drawing list this time, the object data for displaying the symbol is grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the setting process for the background. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for the symbol, the control end process for erasing the image data for the symbol that is not specified in the drawing list of this time among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

By executing the processes of steps S2602 to S2604, as shown in FIG. 71, they are designated as placement targets by the drawing list in the world coordinate system defined by the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis. The setting of the scene in which the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged at the coordinates, rotation angle, and scale also specified by the drawing list is completed. Note that FIG. 71 simply shows how the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and the various object data PCs 2 to PC10 are arranged.

After that, the conversion process to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed (step S2605). In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is set as the origin based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint. Convert to the camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 71, the viewpoint PC 11 shown in the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding to the viewpoint PC 11 is set.

Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (image data PC1 for the rearmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10), and the camera coordinate system actually exists for each individual image. .. By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, it is possible to switch the viewpoint individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 71 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

After that, the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed (step S2606). In the conversion process to the field of view coordinate system, each of the camera coordinate systems is converted into the field of view coordinate system corresponding to the field of view (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, for each individual image, if it is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image near the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

After that, clipping processing is executed (step S2607). In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S2606 is grasped with the corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. Then, each individual image extracted in step S2606 is based on the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 71) corresponding to the frame areas 212a and 212b (that is, the symbol display device 41) to be drawn in that state. To clip.

After that, the lighting process is executed (step S2608). In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and orientation of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and shadows, reflections, etc. are calculated for each object extracted by the clipping process based on the virtual light source. ..

After that, the color information setting process is executed (step S2609). In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting the color information in pixel units (that is, polygon units) or vertex units for each object extracted by the clipping process. In the color information setting process, basically, a texture mapping process of pasting the corresponding texture data to each object data extracted by the clipping process is executed. In addition, depending on the situation, processing such as bump mapping and transparency mapping is executed.

After that, in step S2610 and step S2611, each individual image extracted in step S2607 and further completed in the lighting process and the color information setting process is projected onto the screen area PC12 which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection). And parallel projection) to create drawing data.

Specifically, first, the drawing data creation process for the effect and the background is executed (step S2610). In the drawing data creation process for the effect and the background, the image data and the object data for the rearmost image set as the background image are projected onto the screen area PC 12 while the hidden surface is erased, so that the image data and the object data are used for the background. Create drawing data for. Further, drawing data for the effect is created by projecting the object data set as the effect image onto the screen area PC 12 while erasing the hidden surface.

Here, the VRAM 204 is provided with a screen buffer 214 as shown in FIG. 66, and the screen buffer 214 is used for effect and background in which drawing data for background and drawing data for effect are collectively written. A buffer and a buffer for the symbol to which drawing data for the symbol is written are set. Further, an area having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC 12 is set in the buffer for the effect and the background and the buffer for the design. The drawing data for the background and the drawing data for the effect created in step S2610 are stored in the buffer for the effect and the background so that the drawing data for the effect is overwritten in a part of the drawing data for the background. Written. If the image data for the background is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the background is not created, and if the image data for the effect is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the effect is used. No drawing data is created.

After that, the drawing data creation process for the design is executed (step S2611). In the drawing data creation process for the symbol, the object data set as the symbol is projected onto the screen area PC12 while the hidden surface is erased, so that the buffer for the symbol in the screen buffer 214 is used for the symbol. Create drawing data. If the image data for the design is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the design is not created.

After that, the drawing data composition process is executed (step S2612). In the drawing data synthesizing process, the drawing data for the effect and background, which are individually created in the screen buffer 214 by the processes of steps S2610 and S2611, and the drawing data for the design are combined, and the synthesizing result is obtained. It is written as drawing data for one frame in the frame areas 212a and 212b to be drawn.

In this case, the writing order is defined so as to be arranged from the back side to the front side in the order of drawing data for effect and background → drawing data for design. Therefore, the drawing data for the effect and the background is first written in the frame areas 212a and 212b to be drawn, and then the drawing data for the design is written. At this time, if a completely transparent α value is set for the pixel to be drawn, the image on the back side is used as it is, and if a semi-transparent α value is set, the α value is used. The image on the back side and the image on the front side are fused at the reference ratio, and when the opaque α value is set, the image on the front side is overwritten on the image on the back side. , The operation for blending is executed.

Incidentally, although each drawing data is defined to have an area for one frame, a completely transparent α value is set for a blank portion in which projection is not performed in the drawing data for a pattern.

The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within the range of the 20 msec cycle. Further, an image signal is output from the display circuit 225 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data. However, since the double buffer method is adopted as described above, the output of the image signal is output to the output. It is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data corresponding to the update timing after one frame for the corresponding frame. Further, the display circuit 225 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame areas 212a and 212b to be referred to each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed, and the drawing data is switched by the switching by the selector circuit. The frame areas 212a and 212b to be drawn are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting image signals.

The steps S2602 to S2607 are the processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 221, and the steps S2608 to S2612 are the processes executed by the rendering unit 222.

<Structure for time-based production>
Next, the configuration for performing the time-corresponding effect will be described.

The time-corresponding effect is an effect in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-corresponding effect state for a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) each time a predetermined time is reached. As the predetermined time, it is conceivable that the time is set to be one hour interval, for example, 10 o'clock, 11 o'clock, 12 o'clock, and so on. Specifically, regarding the time-corresponding effect state, the time-corresponding background image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the music output mode from the speaker unit 45 are also time-corresponding. It becomes an aspect. In addition, when the time-corresponding production state is reached, the probability that the special correspondence image can be displayed in the game times that result in the big hit, or the special correspondence image is displayed in the game times that result in the big hit is time-corresponding. It will be higher than in the non-directed state. By configuring the pachinko machines 10 to be in a time-corresponding effect state at a predetermined time, for example, when a plurality of the pachinko machines 10 are installed in the game hall, the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed. It is possible to perform time-of-day production at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 66, the voice emission control device 60 is provided with an RTC 65 in order to enable execution of the time-corresponding effect. The RTC65 can output time information to the sound light side MPU 62. The RTC65 has its own backup power supply, and can manage the passage of time even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. By acquiring the time information from the RTC 65 as needed, the sound / light side MPU 62 can specify whether or not the time at the acquisition timing is the time corresponding to the start trigger of the time correspondence effect. Then, when the time information acquired from the RTC65 is the time corresponding to the start trigger of the time correspondence effect, the sound / light side MPU 62 executes the process for starting the time correspondence effect.

The state in which the time-corresponding effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. 72 (a) shows a normal period during which the time-enabled effect is not executed, FIG. 72 (b) shows a preparation period which is a part of the execution period of the time-enabled effect, and FIG. 72 (c) shows. Indicates a special period that is part of the execution period of the time-based effect and starts after the preparation period. Further, FIG. 73 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the normal period, and FIG. 73 (b) is an explanation for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the preparation period. FIG. 73 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the special period.

As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the time information supplied from the RTC 65 to the MPU 62 becomes the time information corresponding to the start trigger of the time correspondence effect at the timing of t1 in the normal period when the time correspondence effect is not executed. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b), the normal period ends and the preparation period starts at the timing of t1. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the display mode corresponding to the normal period as shown in FIG. 73 (a) to the display mode corresponding to the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73 (b). ..

The content of the rearmost image displayed in the background image differs between the display mode corresponding to the normal period and the display mode corresponding to the preparation period, and the type of the individual background image displayed in front of the rearmost image. Is different. Specifically, the number of individual background images G61a and G61b displayed in the display mode corresponding to the normal period is two, whereas the individual background images G62a to displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preparation period are displayed. There are four G62d. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 becomes more flashy during the preparation period than during the normal period, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the symbol display device 41. Further, in the preparation period, the remaining time notification image G63 for notifying the information corresponding to the remaining time until the special period starts is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As the remaining time notification image G63, the remaining time until the special period starts is displayed by a subtraction formula. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the start of the special period is approaching. Although the display mode of the symbol is the same in the normal period and the preparation period, the display mode of the symbol may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 72 (c), the preparation period ends and the special period starts at the timing of t2. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the display mode corresponding to the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73 (b) to the display mode corresponding to the special period as shown in FIG. 73 (c). ..

The content of the rearmost image displayed in the background image differs between the display mode corresponding to the preparation period and the display mode corresponding to the special period, and the type of the individual background image displayed in front of the rearmost image. Is different. Specifically, the number of individual background images G62a to G62d displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preparation period is four, whereas the individual background images G64a to displayed in the display mode corresponding to the special period are displayed. G64g is 7 pieces. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 becomes more flashy during the special period than during the preparation period, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the symbol display device 41. Further, in the special period, the special notification image G65 for notifying that the special period is in effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that it is a special period. Although the display mode of the symbol is the same in the preparation period and the special period, the display mode of the symbol may be changed.

At the timing of t3, which is the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the special period, the special period ends as shown in FIG. 72 (c) and returns to the normal period as shown in FIG. 72 (a). .. After that, the time correspondence effect is executed at each of the timing of t4 to the timing of t6 and the timing of t7 to t9. In this case, the period from the start of the time-corresponding effect in the predetermined execution time to the start of the time-corresponding effect in the next execution time is constant at Tf1. In addition, the period from the start of the preparation period to the start of the special period in the execution times of each time-corresponding effect is also constant at Tf2. As a result, the time-corresponding effect can be started simultaneously in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, and the special period can be started simultaneously in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

As described above, the time-corresponding effect is periodically executed using the time information of RTC65, but when the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached during the open / close execution mode, the open / close execution mode continues. During the period, the rearmost image for the preparation period and the individual background images G62a to G62d for the preparation period are not displayed as the background image of the symbol display device 41, and further, they are special as the background image of the symbol display device 41. The rearmost image for the period and the individual images G64a to G64g for the background for the special period are not displayed. However, in the preparation period, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the image for the opening / closing execution mode from the front, and in the special period, the image for the opening / closing execution mode is displayed in front of a part of the image. The special notification image G65 is displayed so as to be superimposed on the image. As a result, the player is informed that the time-sensitive effect is being executed while the player is appropriately satisfied with the occurrence of the open / close execution mode by giving priority to the effect for the open / close execution mode. It becomes possible to recognize. In addition, even in the open / close execution mode, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the execution period of the time-corresponding effect is normally performed, and the RTC65 is abnormal when comparing a plurality of pachinko machines 10. It is possible to perform the work of confirming whether or not it has occurred regardless of whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, the display mode in the display light emitting unit 44 and the music output mode from the speaker unit 45 are time-corresponding modes from the start timing of the time-corresponding effect even in the open / close execution mode. As a result, the display mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of music from the speaker unit 45 can be arranged in a time-corresponding manner in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

If the open / close execution mode ends in a situation where the time-corresponding effect is normally started during the open / close execution mode and the time-corresponding effect is being executed, the end timing corresponds to the preparation period. If so, the display of the rearmost image for the preparation period and the individual background images G62a to G62d for the preparation period is started as the background image of the symbol display device 41, and the display of the remaining time notification image G63 is continued. If the end timing of the open / close execution mode corresponds to the special period, the backmost image for the special period and the individual background images G64a to G64g for the special period are used as the background image of the symbol display device 41. The display is started and the display of the special notification image G65 is continued. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the time-corresponding effect according to the original execution mode is executed.

The maximum duration of the open / close execution mode is longer than the preparation period but shorter than the special period. As a result, when the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached during the open / close execution mode, the open / close execution mode ends in the middle of the execution times of the time-corresponding effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the time-corresponding effect according to the original execution mode is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the maximum duration of the open / close execution mode may be longer than the execution period of the time-corresponding effect.

When the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for the game round is being executed, the time is supported in the situation where the effect for the game round is not executed and the effect for the open / close execution mode is not executed. The start mode of the time-corresponding effect is different from the case where the start timing of the effect is reached. Specifically, when the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for the game round is being executed, the background image, the effect image, and the pattern image are up to that point, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 74. Continue the display mode of the effect for the game round. That is, the display of the rearmost image for the preparation period and the individual background images G62a to G62d for the preparation period as the background image of the symbol display device 41 is not started. However, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the background image displayed as the effect for the game round from the front. Incidentally, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as not to overlap with the symbol so as not to reduce the visibility of the symbol.

Hereinafter, a state in which the time-corresponding effect is executed in relation to the execution status of the effect for the game round will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 75. FIG. 75 (a) shows the start timing of the time-corresponding effect, and FIG. 75 (b) shows the execution period of the demo display executed in a situation where neither the effect for the game round nor the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed. 75 (c) shows the execution period of the effect for the game round, FIG. 75 (d) shows the preparation period, and FIG. 75 (e) shows the delay in displaying the image as shown in FIG. 74. FIG. 75 (f) shows a period, FIG. 75 (f) shows a display period of a preparation period image in which an image as shown in FIG. 73 (b) is displayed as a background image, and FIG. 75 (g) shows a special period. (H) indicates a time-corresponding light emission control period.

First, a case where the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in a situation where the effect for the game round and the effect for the open / close execution mode are not executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 75 (b), it is the timing of t1 in the execution period of the demo display, and as shown in FIG. 75 (a), it is the start timing of the time-corresponding effect. In this case, at the timing of t1, the preparation period is started as shown in FIG. 75 (d), and the display of the preparation period image is started as shown in FIG. 75 (f). Further, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 75 (h), the display light emitting unit 44 starts light emission in a time-corresponding manner. The speaker unit 45 also starts outputting music in a time-corresponding manner at the timing of t1.

After that, at the timing of t2, which is in the middle of the preparation period, the production for the game round is started as shown in FIG. 75 (c). In this case, the variable display of the symbol is started while the background image for the preparation period is displayed. That is, the variable display of the symbol is started in a state where the display of the background image for the preparation period according to the mode according to the display pattern up to that point is continued.

After that, at the timing of t3 during the execution of the effect for the game round, the preparation period ends as shown in FIG. 75 (d) and the special period starts as shown in FIG. 75 (g). In this case, the display of the background image for the special period is started in a state where the variable display of the pattern according to the mode according to the display pattern up to that point is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (g), the execution period secured as the special period elapses at the timing of t4, which is the situation in which the demo display is executed as shown in FIG. 75 (b). The special period will end, and the time-corresponding production of this execution time will end accordingly. At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 75 (h), the light emission in the display light emitting unit 44 according to the time-corresponding mode is terminated. It should be noted that the speaker unit 45 also stops the output of music according to the time-corresponding mode at the timing of t4. In addition, when the execution period secured as a special period has elapsed in the situation where the effect for the game is being executed, the effect for the game is terminated and the effect for the game is newly started. The special period ends when the demo display starts.

Next, a case where the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is set in the situation where the effect for the game round is executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 75 (c), the timing of t5 is set during the execution period of the effect for game rounds, and the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is set as shown in FIG. 75 (a). In this case, although the preparation period is started as shown in FIG. 75 (d) at the timing of t5, the display of the background image for the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73 (b) is not started. , The delayed period begins as shown in FIG. 75 (e). During the delayed period, as described above, the remaining time notification image G63 is added while the image display of the effect for the game round by the display pattern up to that point is continued.

On the other hand, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 75 (h), the display light emitting unit 44 starts light emission in a time-corresponding manner. The speaker unit 45 also starts outputting music in a time-corresponding manner at the timing of t5. As a result, the display mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of music from the speaker unit 45 can be arranged in a time-corresponding manner in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), the effect for the game round that has been executed up to that point ends at the timing of t6, and a new effect for the game round is started at the timing of t7. At the timing of t7, the delayed period ends as shown in FIG. 75 (e), and the display of the background image for the preparation period starts as shown in FIG. 75 (f). That is, if the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached during the execution of the effect for the game, the background image for the preparation period is not displayed as a delayed period until the effect for the game is completed. When the effect for the game round is finished and a new effect for the game round is started, the display of the background image for the preparation period is started. Further, when the effect for the game round is finished and the new effect for the game round is not started, the display of the background image for the preparation period is started when the demo display is started. As a result, the display of the background image for the preparation period is started for the period from the end of the effect for the game round to the start of the new effect for the game round or the period until the demo display is started. It can be used as a control period for the operation. It should be noted that the demo display is started when 0.5 sec has elapsed without starting a new effect for the game round or an effect for the open / close execution mode after the effect for the game round is finished.

After that, at the timing of t8 during the execution of the effect for the game round, the preparation period ends as shown in FIG. 75 (d) and the special period starts as shown in FIG. 75 (g). In this case, the display of the background image for the special period is started in a state where the variable display of the pattern according to the mode according to the display pattern up to that point is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (g), the execution period secured as the special period elapses at the timing of t9, which is the situation in which the demo display is executed as shown in FIG. 75 (b). The special period will end, and the time-corresponding production of this execution time will end accordingly. At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 75 (h), the light emission in the display light emitting unit 44 according to the time-corresponding mode is terminated. It should be noted that the speaker unit 45 also stops the output of music according to the time-corresponding mode at the timing of t9.

When the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for the game round is being executed as described above, the display mode of the effect for the game round up to that point is continued for the background image, the effect image, and the pattern image. However, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the background image displayed as the effect for the game round from the front. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the time-corresponding effect is being executed while maintaining the display of the image according to the content already determined as the effect for the game round.

In particular, when the display of the background image for the preparation period is to be started in the situation where the super reach in which the character image for reach is displayed as the effect for the game round is performed, the image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. There is a possibility that the number of types of image data used for the image will be extremely large and the processing load will be extremely high. On the other hand, when the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for the game round is being executed, it is already determined as the effect for the game round by simply adding the remaining time notification image G63. The display of the image according to the contents is maintained. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely high as described above.

Here, the duration Tf3 of the preparation period is constant, and the duration Tf3 is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected in the production for the game round. As a result, even if the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for the game round is being executed, the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is irrelevant to the variable display time of the effect for the game round and the start timing of the time-corresponding effect. The production for the game during execution ends before the preparation period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to secure a period in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed before the special period starts.

When the special period is started by securing the period in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed in this way, the background image for the special period as shown in FIG. 73 (c) is started from the start timing. Can be started to be displayed. This makes it possible to facilitate the simultaneous start of displaying the background image for the special period on the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

Next, the data structure for executing the time-corresponding effect will be described.

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 76 (a), the data table 231 for time-corresponding effect is stored in advance in the sound / light side ROM 63. The data table 231 for the time-corresponding effect is a table referred to in order to control the execution of the time-corresponding effect in the sound / light side MPU 62. FIG. 76B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data table 231 for the time correspondence effect.

Pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame is set in the data table 231 for the time correspondence effect, and various timing information, light emission data, and sound output data are set corresponding to each pointer information. The combination is set. By referring to the information of various timings corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to, the start timing of the preparation period, the transfer timing of the image data group 233 for the special period, the end timing of the preparation period, and the start timing of the special period. , The return timing of the image data group for normal production and the end timing of the execution period guaranteed as the special period can be specified by the sound light side MPU 62. Further, by executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 by using the light emission data (PD (0), PD (1) ...) Corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to, the display light emitting unit 44 It is possible to make the light emission mode compatible with time, and the speaker unit 45 uses sound output data (SD (0), SD (1) ...) Corresponding to the pointer information to be referenced. By executing the sound output control, the mode of sound output from the speaker unit 45 can be set to the mode corresponding to time.

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 77, the memory module 203 of the display control device 200 has an image data group 232 for the preparation period, an image data group 233 for the special period, a remaining time correspondence table 234, and a preparation period table 235. , The special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237 are stored in advance. The image data group 232 for the preparation period includes image data for displaying the rearmost image for the preparation period, image data for displaying the individual background images G62a to G62d for the preparation period, and notification of the remaining time. Image data for displaying the image G63 is included. The image data group 233 for the special period includes image data for displaying the rearmost image for the special period, image data for displaying the individual background images G64a to G64g for the special period, and a special notification image. Image data for displaying G65 is included.

The remaining time correspondence table 234 is data for displaying and controlling the remaining time notification image G63 in the preparation period regardless of whether or not it is a delay period, and is used for each pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame. Correspondingly, the parameter information applied to the image data for displaying the remaining time notification image G63 is set. The preparation period table 235 is data for controlling the display of the background image for the preparation period in the preparation period that is not the delay period, and prepares by corresponding to each pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame. Parameter information to be applied to the image data for displaying the background image for the period is set. Since the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 are separately provided, the display control for the preparation period is performed in the delay period in which the background image for the preparation period is not displayed even in the preparation period. By referring only to the remaining time correspondence table 234, it is possible to display the remaining time notification image G63 in a situation where the background image for the preparation period is not displayed. On the other hand, in the preparation period other than the delay period, the remaining time is notified in the situation where the background image for the preparation period is displayed by referring to both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235. The image G63 can be displayed.

The special notification correspondence table 236 is data for displaying and controlling the special notification image G65 in the special period regardless of whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode, and is used for each pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame. Correspondingly, the parameter information applied to the image data for displaying the special notification image G65 is set. The special period table 237 is data for displaying and controlling the background image for the special period in the special period other than the open / close execution mode, and corresponds to each pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame. Parameter information to be applied to the image data for displaying the background image for the special period is set. Since the special notification support table 236 and the special period table 237 are provided separately, in order to control the display for the special period even during the special period when the background image for the special period is not displayed. By referring only to the special notification correspondence table 236, it is possible to display the special notification image G65 in a situation where the background image for the special period is not displayed. On the other hand, in the situation where the special period is not the open / close execution mode, the special notification is displayed in the situation where the background image for the special period is displayed by referring to both the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237. The image G65 can be displayed.

As already explained, the special period ends when the execution period secured as the special period has elapsed, but when the effect for the game round is executed or the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed. If the execution period guaranteed as a special period has elapsed, the effect for the game round during the execution or the effect for the open / close execution mode ends and the effect for the game round starts anew. It ends when it is displayed or when the demo display is newly started. Then, when the special period ends, it returns to the normal production. Correspondingly, the special period table 237 is set corresponding to a period equal to or longer than the longest period during which the special period can continue. As a result, even if the end timing of the special period occurs irregularly, the special period can be continued until the end timing occurs.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the time-corresponding effect will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the RTC correspondence process executed by the sound light side MPU 62. The RTC correspondence process is executed by the table setting process in step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

When it is the start timing of the preparation period (step S2701: YES), the setting process for starting the preparation period is executed (step S2702). In the setting process for starting the preparation period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 79, first, the data table 231 for the time correspondence effect is read from the sound light side ROM 63 to the sound light side RAM 64 (step S2801). After that, the read instruction command for the preparation period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2802).

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a command correspondence process executed by the display CPU 201. The command correspondence process is executed in step S2405 of the V interrupt process (FIG. 67). When the display CPU 201 receives the read instruction command for the preparation period data (step S2901: YES), the display CPU 201 transfers data other than the texture data from the image data group 232 for the preparation period from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. Transfer (step S2902). Of the image data group 232 for the preparation period, the texture data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 at the start of supplying the operating power to the display CPU 201. By executing the process of step S2902, all of the image data group 232 for the preparation period of the VRAM 204 at the start of the preparation period, regardless of whether or not the delay period is started when the preparation period is started. It is in the state of being read into the expansion buffer 211. This makes it possible to smoothly update the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 during the preparation period.

Returning to the description of the setting process for starting the preparation period (FIG. 79), after executing the process of step S2802, it is determined whether or not the current state is the delay target situation (step S2803). The situation in which the effect for the game round is executed or the situation in which the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed corresponds to the delay target situation. In the case of a delay target situation (step S2803: YES), "1" is set in the delaying flag provided in the sound / light side RAM 64 (step S2804). The delayed flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 62 to specify that it is a delay period. After that, the delay command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2805).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the delay command (step S2903: YES), the display CPU 201 transfers the remaining time correspondence table 234 from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2904). As a result, the display of the remaining time notification image G63 is started on the symbol display device 41.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for starting the preparation period (FIG. 79), when the current state is not the delay target situation (step S2803: NO), "1" is set in the preparation display flag provided in the sound light side RAM 64. (Step S2806). The preparation display flag is a flag for specifying on the sound / light side MPU 62 that the background image for the preparation period is being displayed. After that, the preparation display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2807).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the preparation display start command (step S2905: YES), the display CPU 201 executes the read processing for the preparation period (step S2906). In the read process for the preparation period, if the remaining time correspondence table 234 has already been read into the work RAM 202, the preparation period table 235 is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 to correspond to the remaining time in the work RAM 202. It is assumed that both the table 234 and the preparation period table 235 have been read. Further, in the read process for the preparation period, if the remaining time correspondence table 234 is not read to the work RAM 202, both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 are read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202. .. By reading both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 into the work RAM 202, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed in the situation where the background image for the preparation period is displayed.

Returning to the description of the RTC correspondence process (FIG. 78), if the preparation period is in progress (step S2703: YES), the setting process during the preparation period is executed (step S2704). In the setting process during the preparation period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 81, neither the end timing of the preparation period nor the data transfer timing (step S3001 and step S3002: NO) is set, and the delaying flag of the sound / light side RAM 64 is set. When "1" is set (step S3003: YES), it is determined whether or not it is the delay release timing (step S3004). If there is a delay period due to the start timing of the time-based effect in the situation where the effect for the game is being executed, the effect for the game is finished and the effect for the new game is newly performed. When is started or when the demo display is started, it is determined that the delay release timing is reached. In addition, if a delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time-corresponding effect in the situation where the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed, the effect for the open / close execution mode ends and a new game is played. When the effect of reusing is started or the demo display is started, it is determined that the delay release timing is reached.

When it is the delay release timing (step S3004: YES), the delaying flag of the sound light side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3005), and "1" is set to the preparation display flag of the sound light side RAM 64 (step S3005). Step S3006). After that, the preparation display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3007). The processing content of the display CPU 201 when the preparation display start command is received is as described above.

In the setting process during the preparation period, when it is determined that the data transfer timing is based on the data table 231 for the time correspondence effect (step S3002: YES), the read instruction command for the special period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3002: YES). Step S3008). As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the read instruction command for the special period data (step S2907: YES), the display CPU 201 stores data other than the texture data in the image data group 233 for the special period in the memory module. The data is transferred from 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2908). Of the image data group 233 for the special period, the texture data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 at the start of supplying the operating power to the display CPU 201. By executing the process of step S2908, all of the image data group 233 for the special period is read into the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 by the time the special period is started. This makes it possible to start displaying the background image and the special notification image G65 for the special period at an early stage at the start of the special period, and update the background image and the special notification image G65 for the special period during the special period. It will be possible to do it smoothly.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process during the preparation period (FIG. 81), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the preparation period based on the data table 231 for the time correspondence effect (step S3001: YES), the sound / light side RAM 64 is being delayed. The flag and the preparation display flag are cleared to "0" (step S3009), and "1" is set to the special period flag provided in the sound / light side RAM 64 (step S3010). The special period flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 62 to specify that it is a special period. After that, the special period start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3011).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period start command (step S2909: YES), the display CPU 201 transfers the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237 from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step). S2910). By reading the special notification correspondence table 236 to the work RAM 202, the display of the special notification image G65 is started in the symbol display device 41 regardless of whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is set. Further, if the situation is not the open / close execution mode, the display of the background image for the special effect is started on the symbol display device 41.

Returning to the description of the RTC correspondence process (FIG. 78), if the special period is in progress (step S2705: YES), the setting process during the special period is executed (step S2706). In the setting process during the special period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82, if it is not the end timing of the special period (step S3101: NO), whether or not the data return timing is based on the data table 231 for time-corresponding effect. Is determined (step S3102). When it is determined that it is the data return timing (step S3102: YES), the normal period data read instruction command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3103).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the normal period data read instruction command (step S2911: YES), the display CPU 201 displays a background image for the normal effect in a situation where the time-enabled effect is not executed. Data other than the texture data among the image data group for this purpose is transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2912).

Returning to the explanation of the setting process during the special period (FIG. 82), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period based on the data table 231 for the time correspondence effect (step S3101: YES). The process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not it is possible to return from the time-corresponding effect to the normal effect. The recoverable status is the end timing of the execution period when the demo is displayed at the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period, and the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period. If the effect for the game round or the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed, the effect for the game round or the effect for the open / close execution mode during the execution is completed and the effect for the game round is newly started. It is the timing when the demo display is started or the timing when the demo display is started.

When it is possible to recover (step S3104: YES), the light emission control and the sound output control for the special period are terminated (step S3105). As a result, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 according to the mode for the normal effect in the situation where the time-enabled effect is not executed, and the speaker unit 45 in the mode for the normal effect when the time-enabled effect is not executed. Sound output control is resumed. After that, the special period flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3106), and the special period end command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3107).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period end command (step S2913: YES), the display CPU 201 is a table for displaying a background image for a normal effect in a situation where the time-based effect is not executed. Is transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2914). As a result, the display of the background image for the special period is terminated in the symbol display device 41, and the display of the background image for the normal effect is resumed. In the command correspondence process, when another command is received, the corresponding process is executed (step S2915).

Next, the table setting process in the present embodiment executed by the sound light side MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 83. The table setting process is described in step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). Will be executed.

When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 52 (step S3201: YES), the game result storage process is executed (step S3202). Specifically, from the information contained in the type command, it is specified which is the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 52 at the start of this game round, and the identification thereof. The information is written to the sound / light side RAM 64.

After that, when the variation display time corresponding to the variation command received this time from the main MPU 52 is the variation display time corresponding to the occurrence of the reach effect (step S3203: YES), the lottery process for determining the type of the reach effect. Executes the selection process of the lottery table to be used in. Regarding the selection process of the lottery table, specifically, when "1" is set in the preparation display flag of the sound light side RAM 64 (step S3204: YES), the lottery table for the preparation period is set to the sound light side ROM 63. Is read into the sound / light side RAM 64 (step S3205). When "1" is set in the special period flag of the sound light side RAM 64 (step S3206: YES), the lottery table for the special period is read from the sound light side ROM 63 to the sound light side RAM 64 (step S3207). .. If "1" is not set in either the preparation display flag or the special period flag (step S3206: NO), the normal period lottery table is read from the sound light side ROM 63 to the sound light side RAM 64. Then, the reach effect lottery process is executed using the lottery table selected as the target of use this time among the preparation period lottery table, the special period lottery table, and the normal period lottery table (step S3209). In the reach effect lottery process, the value of the reach lottery counter at that time is acquired, and the acquired value is collated with the lottery table selected as the target of this use. Then, the reach lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the reach lottery counter is acquired as the result of the reach effect lottery process this time.

Here, a plurality of types of reach effects are set, and the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the reach effect image on the symbol display device 41 is different for each reach effect. The difference in processing load occurs depending on the type of image data used for displaying the reach effect image and the size of the image data. The reach effect includes a large load effect that has the largest processing load of the VDP205 for displaying the reach effect image, and a medium load effect that has a smaller processing load of the VDP205 for displaying the reach effect image than the large load effect. , A small load effect in which the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the reach effect image is smaller than that of the medium load effect is included. In this case, the lottery table for the normal period includes all of the large load effect, the medium load effect, and the small load effect as the types of reach effects to be selected. On the other hand, the lottery table for the preparation period does not include the large load effect and the medium load effect as the types of reach effects to be selected, but includes the small load effect. Further, the lottery table for the special period does not include the large load effect but includes the medium load effect and the small load effect as the types of reach effects to be selected.

Since the background image for the special period is displayed in the special period as described above, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 is larger than that in the preparation period and the normal period. On the other hand, in the special period, the heavy load effect is not selected as the reach effect. This makes it possible to prevent the situation where a large load effect is displayed while displaying the background image for the special period in the special period, and the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large. It is possible to prevent it from occurring.

When starting the special period, it is necessary to make initial settings in the world coordinate system for all the image data necessary to display the background image for the special period, so VDP205 compared to the case of updating the special period. The processing load of is increased accordingly. On the other hand, in the preparation period that occurs before the special period, the large load effect and the medium load effect are not selected as the reach effect. As a result, even if the transition to the special period occurs in the situation where the effect for the game round started in the preparation period is being executed, the transition to the special period is during the execution of the heavy load effect and the medium load effect. It is possible to prevent it from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

As described above, the execution period of the preparation period is set to be longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected as the effect for the game round. As a result, even if a large load effect or a medium load effect can be executed as the reach effect in the effect for the game round started in the normal period, the reach effect is completed by the end timing of the preparation period. And, as already explained, the heavy load effect and the medium load effect are not selected in the effect for the game round started in the preparation period. This makes it possible to prevent the transition to the special period from occurring in the situation where the heavy load effect or the medium load effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

In addition, the lottery table for the special period includes a reach effect in which a special corresponding image is displayed as a reach effect that can be selected in the game times that result in a big hit, and the lottery table for the normal period and the lottery table for the preparation period include. The reach effect in which the special correspondence image is displayed is not included. This makes it possible to set an effect that occurs only during the special period.

When a negative determination is made in step S3203 or when the process of step S3209 is executed, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S3210). The content of the stop symbol determination process is the same as that of step S407 of the table setting process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

After that, the control pattern table setting process is executed (step S3211). In the control pattern table setting process, it corresponds to the combination of the presence / absence of the reach effect, the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S3209) when the reach effect occurs, and the result of the stop symbol determination process (step S3210). The control pattern table is read from the sound light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound light side RAM 64.

After that, the variable display time determination process is executed (step S3212). In this process, information on the variation display time of the current game is specified from the content of the variation command received this time from the main MPU 52, and the information on the specified variation display time is provided in the sound / light side RAM 64. Set to the variable time counter. The variable time counter is a counter for the sound light side MPU 62 to specify the timing at which the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is terminated and the final display of the symbol is started in the current game round. The value set in the variable time counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started in the sound light side MPU 62, that is, every time 4 msec elapses.

After that, a variation pattern command including information corresponding to the control pattern table selected in step S3211 is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3213). As a result, the display CPU 201 starts the effect for the game round in the symbol display device 41, and advances the effect for the game round in an manner according to the effect content determined by the sound / light side MPU 62. In this case, if it is determined that the reach effect will be generated in the current game round, the reach effect selected in step S3209 will be executed by the symbol display device 41. In the table setting process, other processes are executed in step S3214 in addition to the above processes. The contents of the other processes are the same as those in step S415 of the table setting process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

When the time information of the RTC65 is the time corresponding to the start trigger of the time-corresponding effect as described above, the time-corresponding effect is started. As a result, it becomes possible to execute a predetermined effect when the predetermined time is reached. Further, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the game hall, the time-corresponding effects can be started all at once by the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

In this case, when the time-based effect is started, the preparation period occurs first, and when the preparation period elapses, the display content of the image on the symbol display device 41 becomes more flashy than the preparation period. A period will occur. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the special period will occur in the future, and it is possible to gradually increase the expectation that the special period will occur. Further, in the preparation period, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the remaining time notification image G63 displays the remaining time until the special period starts by a subtraction formula. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the start of the special period is approaching.

When the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for the game round is being executed, the background image, the effect image, and the pattern image are displayed while the display mode of the effect for the game round is continued. The remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the background image displayed as a diversion effect from the front. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the time-corresponding effect is being executed while maintaining the display of the image according to the content already determined as the effect for the game round.

In particular, when the display of the background image for the preparation period is to be started in the situation where the super reach in which the character image for reach is displayed as the effect for the game round is performed, the image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. There is a possibility that the number of types of image data used for the image will be extremely large and the processing load will be extremely large. On the other hand, when the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for the game round is being executed, it is already determined as the effect for the game round by simply adding the remaining time notification image G63. The display of the image according to the contents is maintained. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely large as described above.

The duration of the preparation period is constant, and the duration is set to be longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected in the production for the game round. As a result, even if the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for the game round is being executed, the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is irrelevant to the variable display time of the effect for the game round and the start timing of the time-corresponding effect. The production for the game during execution ends before the preparation period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to secure a period in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed before the special period starts.

By securing the period for displaying the background image for the preparation period in this way, when the special period starts, it is possible to start displaying the background image for the special period from the start timing. Become. This makes it possible to facilitate the simultaneous start of displaying the background image for the special period on the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

Since the background image for the special period is displayed in the special period, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 is larger than that in the preparation period and the normal period. On the other hand, in the special period, the heavy load effect is not selected as the reach effect. This makes it possible to prevent the situation where a large load effect is displayed while displaying the background image for the special period in the special period, and the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large. It is possible to prevent it from occurring.

When starting the special period, it is necessary to make initial settings in the world coordinate system for all the image data necessary to display the background image for the special period, so VDP205 compared to the case of updating the special period. The processing load of is increased accordingly. On the other hand, in the preparation period that occurs before the special period, the large load effect and the medium load effect are not selected as the reach effect. As a result, even if the transition to the special period occurs in the situation where the effect for the game round started in the preparation period is being executed, the transition to the special period is during the execution of the heavy load effect and the medium load effect. It is possible to prevent it from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

The execution period of the preparation period is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected as the effect for the game round. As a result, even if a large load effect or a medium load effect can be executed as the reach effect in the effect for the game round started in the normal period, the reach effect ends by the end timing of the preparation period. Then, in the effect for the game round started in the preparation period, the large load effect and the medium load effect are not selected. This makes it possible to prevent the transition to the special period from occurring in the situation where the heavy load effect or the medium load effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

Whether or not the light emission according to the time-corresponding mode in the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output according to the time-corresponding mode in the speaker unit 45 are in the middle of executing the effect for the game round when the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached. It starts regardless. As a result, when the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for the game round is being executed, the background image for the preparation period in the symbol display device 41 is displayed until the effect for the game round is completed. Even if the contents of the background images in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are not aligned due to the delay in the display, the light emission contents of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output contents from the speaker unit 45 are the same for the multiple pachinko machines. It is possible to start at the same time on the machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the time-corresponding effects have been started all at once on the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

<Another form of time-of-day production>
-In the preparation period, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the display mode of the symbols variablely displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is the display for the preparation period. It may be a configuration in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the preparation period. Further, in the special period, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the background image for the special period is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the display mode of the symbols variablely displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is for the special period. It may be configured to be a display mode, or a predetermined character image may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to a special period.

-When the execution period secured as a special period has elapsed in the situation where the demo display is being performed on the symbol display device 41, the predetermined time (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed from the timing when the execution period has elapsed. The special period may end and the normal production may be restored. In this case, the image data group for normal effect can be returned to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 by using the predetermined time, and the image data group for normal effect is set for the world coordinate system. It is possible to make initial settings for this.

-If the execution period secured as a special period has elapsed in the situation where the effect for the game round is being executed, even if the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed following the effect for the game round. , The special period may be terminated when the production for the game is completed. This makes it possible to prevent the special period from continuing for an extremely long time.

-The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the RTC65 is used to specify the start timing of the time-corresponding effect. The elapsed time may be measured and the MPU 62 on the sound / light side may be specified as the start timing of the time-corresponding effect when the measured elapsed time becomes the time corresponding to the generation cycle of the time-corresponding effect. ..

-All of the texture data is not read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 at the start of supplying the operating power to the display CPU 201, but the texture data to be used is the texture data to be used when it becomes necessary to use it. It may be configured to be read out each time. In this case, in step S2902 in the command correspondence process (FIG. 80), all of the image data group 232 for the preparation period is read, in step S2908, all of the image data group 233 for the special period is read, and in step S2912. All of the image data group for displaying the background image for normal production will be read out.

-During the preparation period, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 84, the symbols in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in the partition display area G66 set as a part of the symbol display device 41, and the area other than the partition display area G66. The background image for the preparation period may be displayed in the above. This makes it possible to emphasize that it is the preparation period.

-In the preparation period, a new start of the effect for the game round may be restricted, and the restricted state may be released when the special period is started. This makes it possible to prevent the special period from starting in the middle of the production for the game round.

-When it is the start timing of the time-appropriate effect, if neither the effect for the game round nor the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed, the special period is started without going through the preparation period, and the time is supported. When the start timing of the effect is reached, if the effect for the game round or the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed, the preparation period is set while the effect is being executed, and the effect that was in the middle of the execution is performed. The special period may be started when the period ends.

At least one of the time-corresponding light emission control period in the display light emitting unit 44 and the time-corresponding sound output control period in the speaker unit 45 is after a predetermined second has elapsed with respect to the start timing of the time-corresponding effect in the symbol display device 41. It may be a configuration to be started. In this case, it is preferable that the target control period, which is started after a predetermined second has elapsed, is started before the special period is started in the symbol display device 41.

<Further alternative form of time-of-day production>
-In this separate mode, when the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for the game round or the effect for the open / close execution mode is being executed, the effect for the game round or the open / close execution mode during the execution is reached. No image for the preparation period is displayed, including the remaining time notification image G63, until the effect is completed. Hereinafter, a processing configuration for causing the action will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a setting process for starting the preparation period in the present alternative mode.

First, the data table 231 for time-corresponding effect is read from the ROM 63 to the RAM 64 (step S3301). After that, the read instruction command for the preparation period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3302). As a result, similarly to the above embodiment, the display CPU 201 transfers data other than the texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. Of the image data group 232 for the preparation period, the texture data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 at the start of supplying the operating power to the display CPU 201.

After executing the process of step S3302, it is determined whether or not the current state is the delay target situation (step S3303). The situation in which the effect for the game round is executed or the situation in which the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed corresponds to the delay target situation. In the case of a delay target situation (step S3303: YES), "1" is set in the delaying flag provided in the sound / light side RAM 64 (step S3304).

When the current state is not the delay target situation (step S3303: NO), "1" is set in the preparation display flag provided in the sound light side RAM 64 (step S3305). After that, the continuation period for displaying the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 as the preparation display is calculated (step S3306). This time, since the preparation period starts at the start timing of the time-corresponding effect, the continuation period of the preparation display is the time from the start timing of the time-corresponding effect to the start timing of the special period. Then, the information corresponding to the continuation period for the preparation display calculated in step S3306 is set in the preparation display start command read from the sound light side ROM 63 (step S3307), and the preparation display start command is set in the display CPU 201. Transmit (step S3308).

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a command correspondence process in the present alternative mode. When the display CPU 201 receives the preparation display start command (step S3401: YES), the display CPU 201 grasps the remaining period of the preparation period from the preparation display start command (step S3402). Then, in the case where the count value is subtracted and displayed on the remaining time notification image G63 from the fixed start value (for example, "60") to the fixed end value (for example, "0") within the remaining period of the preparation period. The update cycle of the count value is set (step S3403). Specifically, the display of the count value is started from a fixed start value, and the subtraction value of the count value (specifically, "1") in the count value update cycle and one update cycle is kept constant. Calculate the update cycle of the count value required to make the count value a fixed end value in the remaining period of the preparation period. Then, the preparation period table corresponding to the calculation result is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S3404). As a result, the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is updated according to the update cycle calculated in step S3403. In the command correspondence process, a process other than the above process is also executed.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a setting process during the preparation period in the present alternative mode.

When neither the end timing of the preparation period nor the data transfer timing (step S3501 and step S3502: NO) and "1" is set in the delaying flag of the sound light side RAM 64 (step S3503: YES), the delay is achieved. It is determined whether or not it is the release timing (step S3504). If there is a delay period due to the start timing of the time-based effect in the situation where the effect for the game is being executed, the effect for the game is completed and a new effect for the game is performed. When is started or when the demo display is started, it is determined that the delay release timing is reached. In addition, if a delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time-corresponding effect in the situation where the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed, the effect for the open / close execution mode ends and a new game is played. When the effect of reusing is started or the demo display is started, it is determined that the delay release timing is reached.

When it is the delay release timing (step S3504: YES), the delay flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3505), and the preparation display flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3506). After that, the continuation period for displaying the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 as the preparation display is calculated (step S3507). This time, since the preparation period is started at a timing after the start timing of the time-corresponding effect, the remaining period until the start timing of the special period is the continuation period of the preparation display. Then, the information corresponding to the continuation period for the preparation display calculated in step S3507 is set in the preparation display start command read from the sound / light side ROM 63 (step S3508), and the preparation display start command is set in the display CPU 201. Transmit (step S3509). As a result, the processes of steps S3402 to S3404 already described in the command correspondence process (FIG. 86) in the display CPU 201 are executed, and as described above, the count in the remaining time notification image G63 is counted in the remaining period of the preparation period. The value is subtracted from the fixed start value to the fixed end value.

The processing contents of steps S3510 to S3513 are the same as the processing contents of steps S3008 to S3011 in the setting processing (FIG. 81) during the preparation period in the above embodiment.

When the start timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached in the situation where the effect for the game round or the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed as described above, the effect for the game round or the effect for the open / close execution mode during the execution is reached. The display of the image for the preparation period including the remaining time notification image G63 is not started until the effect of is completed. As a result, for example, in a situation where there is a growing expectation that a jackpot result will be obtained due to the execution of a predetermined reach effect, the display of the image for the preparation period is suddenly started, and the predetermined reach effect is reached. It is possible to prevent the event that the player's attention is lowered.

Further, in the configuration in which the display of the image for the preparation period including the remaining time notification image G63 is not started until the effect for the game round during the execution or the effect for the open / close execution mode is completed, the image during the execution is being executed. When the effect for the game round or the effect for the open / close execution mode is completed and the display of the image for the preparation period is started, the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is related to the remaining duration of the preparation period. The update cycle is set. As a result, even if the display of the image for the preparation period is started at a timing after the start timing of the time-corresponding effect, the display of the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is fixed from the fixed start value. It is possible to do until the end value is reached.

<Structure for performing separate storage effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a separate storage effect will be described.

The separate storage effect is to save the drawing data created by projecting the three-dimensional image data arranged in the world coordinate system onto a virtual two-dimensional plane as separate storage data, and then save the separate storage data. Is placed in the world coordinate system by setting the plate-shaped object data, and drawing data is created by projecting the separately saved data together with other image data placed in the world coordinate system onto a virtual two-dimensional plane. It is an effect of displaying an image by doing so. In addition, during the period when the image is displayed using the drawing data created based on the placement of the separately stored data in the world coordinate system, the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane is used when creating the separately stored data. Mask control is executed to exclude the three-dimensional image data that has become from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane. The image data that is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane in the mask control may not be placed in the world coordinate system, and the placement position and shape of the image data placed in the world coordinate system are updated. It may be configured to be further excluded from the projection target. By creating drawing data using separately stored data and executing mask control in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load of VDP205 even when the types of images to be displayed increase. It becomes.

FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the specific contents of the separate preservation effect, and FIGS. 88 (a1) and 88 (b1) show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system. 8 (a2) and 88 (b2) show the contents of an image displayed by using drawing data created by projecting onto a virtual two-dimensional plane.

In a situation where the separate storage effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 88 (a1), the rearmost image data 241 is arranged at the innermost position when the viewpoint PC 11 is used as a reference, and the rearmost image data 241 is arranged in front of the viewpoint PC 11. The image data 242 for the 1 background individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are arranged, and the image data 244 for the effect character is further arranged on the front side. The backmost image data 241 is image data in which the backmost texture data is attached to the plate-shaped object data (that is, the plate polygon). The plate-shaped object data is non-thick object data, and has a smaller data capacity and a smaller processing load in geometry calculation and rendering in VDP205 than thick three-dimensional object data.

FIG. 88 (a2) shows that drawing data is created by projecting onto a virtual two-dimensional plane in a state where three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 88 (a1). It is possible to display such an image for one frame on the symbol display device 41. In the image for one frame, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 are displayed in front of the rearmost image G71, and the effect character image G74 is further displayed in front of the first background individual image G72. Then, between the update timings of the plurality of images, the arrangement position and shape of the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character in the world coordinate system, etc. By changing the above, it is possible to change the display position and shape of the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 in the image for one frame.

Image data 241 on the back surface, image data 242 for the first background individual image, and image data for the second background individual image in a state where three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 88 (a1). By executing the projection process on the virtual two-dimensional plane so that the image data 244 for the effect character is not the projection target while the 243 is the projection target, the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the image are executed. It is possible to create two-dimensional drawing data that enables the display of the still image of the second background individual image G73 as the first separate storage data. By pasting the first separate saved data to the plate-shaped polygon data, it is arranged in the world coordinate system as the first separate saved image data 245, and in front of it, the image data 244 for the effect character and the image for the additional individual image. By arranging the data 246, the state shown in FIG. 88 (b1) is obtained. Then, in this state, the first separate saved image data 245, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image are projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data. This makes it possible to display an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 88 (b2) on the symbol display device 41. In the image for one frame, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 are displayed in front of the rearmost image G71, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are further displayed in front of the first background individual image G72. Is displayed.

However, since the image data for displaying the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 is arranged in the world coordinate system as a still image using the first separate saved image data 245, a plurality of images are used. It is not possible to individually change the arrangement position and shape of the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 between the update timings. On the other hand, since the image data for displaying the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are individually arranged in the world coordinate system as the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image, there are a plurality of images. It is possible to individually change the arrangement position and shape of the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 between the update timings of the images.

When drawing data is created using the first separate saved image data 245 as described above, the first separate saved image data 245 is the rearmost surface when the first separate saved image data is created in the world coordinate system. The image data 241 of the above, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are arranged in front of the position where they were arranged. Then, the space MS1 behind the first separate saved image data 245 is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by the mask control. As a result, when drawing data is created using the first separate saved image data 245, a virtual two-dimensional image is displayed in order to display the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73. The number of image data to be projected onto the plane is reduced, and the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying these images G71 to G73 is reduced. Therefore, even if the additional individual image G75 is newly added as a display target, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the VDP 205.

By executing the mask control, the rearmost image data 241 and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are excluded from the projection targets on the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in the situation, parameter information such as coordinate information and scale information for these image data 241 to 243 is stored and retained in the work RAM 202. As a result, when returning to the period for displaying the image by projecting the image data 241 to 243 on the virtual two-dimensional plane, the work RAM 202 secures an area for updating the parameter information of the image data 241 to 243. There is no need to perform any processing to do so. In order to newly set the parameter information of the image data as an update target, an initial process such as a search process for the storage area of the work RAM 202 for storing and holding the parameter information and a clear process for the storage area searched by the search process. It becomes necessary to execute the setting process, and the processing load of the initial setting process is larger than the processing load for updating the parameter information. Under such circumstances, the parameter information of the image data 241 to 243 that is the target of the mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202, so that the processing load of the display CPU 201 when the mask control is released is extremely large. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

Further, even in a situation where the display CPU 201 excludes each of the image data 241 to 243 from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by executing the mask control, the image data for the first background individual image is obtained. The process of updating the parameter information for the image data 243 for the 242 and the second background individual image is continued. As a result, immediately after the period in which the image using the first separate saved image data 245 is displayed ends, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 start from the state immediately before the start of the period. The first background individual image from the state when the movement is not restarted but the change of the movement is continued for the time that the period is continued according to the display pattern up to that point with respect to the display state immediately before the start of the period. It is possible to restart the movement of the G72 and the second background individual image G73.

Further, by executing the mask control, the rearmost image data 241 and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are excluded from the projection targets on the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in this situation, the buffer area in which the information referred to for arranging the image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system is stored in the VRAM 204 is retained. As a result, when returning to the period for displaying the image by projecting the image data 241 to 243 on the virtual two-dimensional plane, the information referred to for arranging the image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system can be obtained. It is not necessary to execute the process for securing the buffer area to be stored in the VRAM 204. In order to secure the buffer area, it is necessary to execute an initial setting process such as a search process for the storage area of the VRAM 204 and a clear process for the storage area searched by the search process, which is subject to mask control. By holding the buffer areas of the image data 241 to 243 as they are in the VRAM 204, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from becoming extremely large when the mask control is released.

Here, if it becomes necessary to create separate storage data using the image data excluded from the projection target by the mask control in the situation where the mask control is being executed, the image data is excluded from the projection target. Therefore, it is not possible to create another saved data using the image data. The case where such an event occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 (a) to 89 (c). FIGS. 89 (a1) to 89 (c1) show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 89 (a2) to 89 (c2) are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane. Shows the contents of the image displayed using the drawing data created in.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a1), the rearmost image data 241 is arranged at the innermost position in the world coordinate system, and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the second background individual image are arranged in front of the rearmost image data 241. The image data 243 of the above is arranged, and the image data 244 for the effect character is arranged on the front side, and the projection is performed on the virtual two-dimensional plane to create the drawing data. It is possible to display an image for one frame as shown in (a2) on the symbol display device 41. In this case, the drawing data created in the arrangement state of the image data 241 to 244 as shown in FIG. 89 (a1) is saved as the second separate save data.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (b1), the second separate saved data is pasted on the plate-shaped polygon data and arranged as the second separate saved image data 247 in the world coordinate system. The effect image data 248 for displaying the effect image G76 is arranged in front of the saved image data 247. Then, the second separate saved image data 247 and the effect image data 248 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data, whereby one frame as shown in FIG. 89 (b2) is created. It is possible to display the image of the above on the symbol display device 41. The effect image data 248 is data in which texture data for the effect image is pasted on the plate-shaped polygon data, and the effect image data 248 is opaque because a transparent or semi-transparent α value is set as a whole. Since the α value of is not set, the effect image data 248 is overwritten with the second separate saved image data 247 in a state where the transparency processing or the semi-transparency processing is performed.

When drawing data is created using the second separate saved image data 247 as described above, the second separate saved image data 247 is the rearmost when creating the second separate saved data in the world coordinate system. The image data 241 of the above, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character are arranged in front of the position where they are arranged. Then, the space MS2 behind the second separate saved image data 247 is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by the mask control. As a result, when drawing data is created using the second separate saved image data 247, the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 are displayed. Therefore, the number of image data to be projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane is reduced, and the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying these images G71 to G74 is reduced. Therefore, even if the effect image G76 is newly added as a display target, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the VDP 205.

However, immediately after the image is displayed using the second separate saved image data 247, the first separate saved image data 245, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the additional individual image as shown in FIG. 88 (b1) are displayed. When it becomes necessary to display an image using the image data 246 for, the backmost image data 241 and the first background are displayed during the period when the image using the second separately saved image data 247 is displayed. Since the mask control is executed for the image data 242 for the individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the first separate saved image data 245 cannot be created. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (c1), the first separate saved image data 245 cannot be arranged behind the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image in the world coordinate system. As shown in FIG. 88 (c2), the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are displayed in a state where the background image is not displayed. Further, for example, not only the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image in the world coordinate system, but also the rearmost image data 241 and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the second background individual image. If it is attempted to create drawing data by arranging image data 243 for use and projecting all the image data 241 to 244, 246 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane, the processing load of VDP205 becomes large. As a case where such a situation occurs, in the pachinko machine 10, when the effect operation device 48 is operated, an operation-compatible effect is generated in which an image is displayed using the second separate saved image data 247. There may be a case where it is necessary to display an image using the first separately saved image data 245 immediately after the operation corresponding effect is completed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to display the image using the first separate saved image data 245 immediately after the image using the second separate saved image data 247 is displayed. It is composed. Hereinafter, a state in which another preservation effect is performed will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a time chart showing how a separate storage effect is performed, FIG. 90 (a) shows a normal drawing period in which mask control is not executed, and FIG. 90 (b) shows a mask control period in which mask control is executed. FIG. 90 (c) shows the timing at which at least one of the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data is executed separately, and FIG. 90 (d) shows the first separate storage data provided in the VRAM 204. The period of storage and retention in the first separate storage buffer 251 is shown, and FIG. 90 (e) shows the period of storage and retention of the second separate storage data in the second separate storage buffer 252 provided in the VRAM 204. 90 (f) shows the operation valid period of the effect operation device 48, FIG. 90 (g) shows the operation timing of the effect operation device 48, and FIG. 90 (h) shows the execution period of the operation corresponding effect.

First, a case where an image is displayed using the first separately saved image data 245 will be described.

In the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed as shown in FIG. 90 (a), the timing of t1 is the saving execution timing of the first separate saved data as shown in FIG. 90 (c). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), the first separate storage data is created, and the first separate storage data is stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251 of the VRAM 204. As a result, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), the first separate storage image data 245 is stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251 at the timing of t1.

After that, at the timing of t2, the period for displaying the image using the first separately saved image data 245 is set, and the period for performing the mask control as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b) is set. .. In this case, even during the period in which the mask control is performed, each of the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 to be displayed in the first separate saved image data 245 is supported. Various parameter information about the image data 241 to 243 to be performed is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the update process of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201.

After that, at the timing of t3, the period for displaying the image using the first separately saved image data 245 ends, and the mask control ends as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b). It returns to the normal drawing period when mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, display CPU201 of various parameter information about the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to each of the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 even during the mask control period. Since the update process in the above is continued, the display of the images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the mask control execution period elapses with respect to the timing when the mask control is started.

Next, a case where the image using the first separate saved image data 245 is displayed immediately after the image is displayed using the second separate saved image data 247 will be described. In the following description, FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c) will be referred to as appropriate. FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c) are explanatory views for explaining how an image is displayed using the first separate saved image data 245 and an image is displayed using the second separate saved image data 247. 91 (a1) to 91 (c1) show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 91 (a2) to 91 (c2) are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane. The contents of the image displayed by using the drawing data created by doing so are shown.

In the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed as shown in FIG. 90 (a), the timing of t4 is the start timing of the operation valid period of the effect operating device 48 as shown in FIG. 90 (f). In this case, another storage is executed at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 90 (c). At the execution timing of this separate storage, both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are to be executed separately.

The state in which both the first storage data and the second storage data are created will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (a). As shown in FIG. 91 (a1), the rearmost image data 241 is arranged at the innermost position in the world coordinate system, and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the second background individual image are arranged in front of the rearmost image data 241. The image data 243 of the above is arranged, and the image data 244 for the effect character is arranged on the front side, and the projection is performed on the virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data. It is possible to display an image for one frame as shown in (a2) on the symbol display device 41. In this case, the drawing data created by projecting all of the image data 241 to 244 shown in FIG. 91 (a1) onto the virtual two-dimensional plane is stored in the second storage buffer 252 as the second storage data. To. The second separate storage data is data that enables the display of still images of the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74.

Further, in a state where the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 91 (a1), the rearmost image data 241 and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the second background individual image are used. While the image data 243 is the projection target, the projection process is executed on the virtual two-dimensional plane so that the image data 244 for the effect character is not the projection target, so that the rearmost image G71 and the first background are individual. Two-dimensional drawing data that enables the display of still images of the image G72 and the second background individual image G73 is created as the first separate storage data. Then, the first separate storage data is stored in the first separate storage buffer 251.

Returning to the explanation with reference to FIG. 90, the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are created at the timing of t4, so that the first separate storage buffer 251 is set as shown in FIG. 90 (d). The separately stored data is stored and retained, and as shown in FIG. 90 (e), the second separately stored data is stored and retained in the second separately stored buffer 252.

After that, at the timing of t5, the effect operation device 48 is operated as shown in FIG. 90 (g), so that the operation corresponding effect is started as shown in FIG. 90 (h). In this case, as shown in FIG. 91 (b1), the second separate saved data is pasted on the plate-shaped polygon data and arranged as the second separate saved image data 247 in the world coordinate system. The effect image data 248 for displaying the effect image G76 is arranged in front of the saved image data 247. Then, the second separate saved image data 247 and the effect image data 248 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data, whereby one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (b2) is created. It is possible to display the image of the above on the symbol display device 41.

By starting the operation corresponding effect at the timing of t5, the mask control is performed at the timing of t5 as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b). In this case, even during the period in which the mask control is performed, the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image to be displayed in the second separate saved image data 247 are displayed. Various parameter information about the image data 241 to 244 corresponding to each of the G74 is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the updating process of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201.

After that, at the timing of t6, the operation corresponding effect ends as shown in FIG. 90 (h). In this case, the display of the image using the first separately saved image data 245 is started at the timing of t6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 91 (c1), the first separate saved data is pasted on the plate-shaped polygon data and arranged as the first separate saved image data 245 in the world coordinate system, and for the effect character in front of the data. The image data 244 of the above and the image data 246 for the additional individual image are arranged. Then, in this state, the first separate saved image data 245, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image are projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data. This makes it possible to display an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (c2) on the symbol display device 41. In this case, since the update process of the display CPU 201 of the parameter information about the image data 244 for the effect character is continued even during the mask control period as described above, the mask control is started for the display of the effect character image G74. It starts from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the execution period of the mask control has elapsed with respect to the timing.

By starting the display of the image using the first separate saved image data 245 at the timing of t6, the mask control is continued as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b). However, the target of the mask control is the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to each of the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image. The image data 244 and 246 corresponding to the image G75 are not subject to mask control. Various parameter information about the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to each of the images G71 to G73 targeted for mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the updating process of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201. To.

After that, at the timing of t7, the period for displaying the image using the first separately saved image data 245 ends, and the mask control ends as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b). It returns to the normal drawing period when mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, display CPU201 of various parameter information about the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to each of the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 even during the mask control period. Since the update process in the above is continued, the display of the images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the mask control execution period elapses with respect to the timing when the mask control is started. This makes it possible to match the effect contents with the effect execution device other than the symbol display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45.

Next, although both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are separately stored, the first separate storage image data 245 is used without displaying the image using the second separate storage image data 247. A case where the displayed image is displayed will be described.

In the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed as shown in FIG. 90 (a), the operation valid period of the effect operating device 48 becomes the start timing as shown in FIG. 90 (f) at the timing of t8. In this case, as in the case of the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), the execution timing of the separate storage for both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data is set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), the first separate storage buffer 251 is stored and held, and as shown in FIG. 90 (e), the second separate storage buffer 252 is stored. 2 Separately saved data is stored and retained.

However, as shown in FIGS. 90 (f) and 90 (g), the operation valid period elapses at the timing of t9 without the effect operation device 48 being operated. In this case, since the image using the second separate saved image data 247 is not displayed, the mask control is not executed from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9. Therefore, at the timing of t9, the first separate storage data to be used thereafter is created again. That is, the first separate storage data created at the timing of t8 and stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251 is erased, and the first separate storage data created at the timing of t9 is stored in the first separate storage buffer 251. New memory is retained. This makes it possible to display each image G71 to G73 in a display mode closer to the timing of using the first separate saved image data 245 as an image using the first separate saved image data 245. Become. The timing at which the first separate storage data is newly created is the update timing of the next image with respect to the update timing of the image whose operation valid period has elapsed.

After that, at the timing of t10, the display of the image using the first separately stored image data 245 is started, so that the mask control is started as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b). However, the target of the mask control is the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to each of the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image. The image data 244 and 246 corresponding to the image G75 are not subject to mask control. Various parameter information about the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to each of the images G71 to G73 targeted for mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the updating process of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201. To.

After that, at the timing of t11, the period for displaying the image using the first separately saved image data 245 ends, and the mask control ends as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b). It returns to the normal drawing period when mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, display CPU201 of various parameter information about the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to each of the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 even during the mask control period. Since the update process in the above is continued, the display of the images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the mask control execution period elapses with respect to the timing when the mask control is started. This makes it possible to match the effect content with the effect execution device other than the symbol display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing another storage effect will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for another storage effect executed by the display CPU 201. The calculation process for the separate storage effect is executed in the background calculation process in step S2503 in the task process (FIG. 68) in the game times in which the separate storage effect should be executed.

First, by updating the pointer information to be referenced in the execution target table read into the work RAM 202 in order to control the effect for this game round, the contents of the data to be referenced in the execution target table can be updated this time. The data corresponds to the processing times of (step S3601). After that, if it is neither during the execution of the operation corresponding effect nor in the operation valid period (step S3602 and step S3603: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the usage period of the first separate storage data (step S3604). The usage period of the first separate storage data is generated when the elapsed time of the game times reaches a predetermined time if the game times are such that the operation validity period does not occur and the separate storage effect occurs. In the case of a game round in which an operation valid period occurs, it occurs when the operation valid period elapses without executing the operation corresponding effect or when the operation corresponding effect ends.

When it is not the usage period of the first separate storage data (step S3604: NO), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S3605). The image data includes the rearmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character. After that, parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the image data 244 for the effect character, the rearmost image data 241 and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image. The derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to each of the image data 241 to 244 in the work RAM 202 (step S3606 and step S3607). After that, the non-use instruction information of the separately saved data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3608). Further, when it is the time to create the first separate save data (step S3609: YES), the first creation instruction information of the separate save data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3610).

When the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) includes various image data 241 to 244 grasped in step S3605. Is set as the object to be placed in the world coordinate system. Further, parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244 is set in the drawing list. In addition, non-use instruction information of the separately stored data is set in the drawing list, and when this time is the creation timing of the first separately stored data, the first creation instruction information of the separately stored data is set.

When the operation period for the separate storage effect is during the usage period of the first separate storage data (step S3604: YES), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is input based on the currently set execution target table. Grasp (step S3611 to step S3613). The image data includes the first separate storage data stored and stored in the first separate storage buffer 251, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image. After that, the image data 244 for the effect character, the rearmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the image data 246 for the additional individual image, and the first Parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the separately stored data, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to each of the image data 241 to 244 and 246 in the work RAM 202 (steps S3614 to S3617). .. In this case, the rearmost image data 241 and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are not subject to placement in the world coordinate system, but these image data 241 to 244 The storage of the parameter information about 246 in the work RAM 202 and the update of the parameter information are continued. After that, the usage instruction information of the separately saved data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3618).

When the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) includes various image data grasped in steps S3611 to S3613. 241 to 244, 246 are set as placement targets in the world coordinate system. Further, parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244, 246 is set in the drawing list. In addition, usage instruction information of separately saved data is set in the drawing list.

In the calculation process for the separate storage effect, if the operation is valid period (step S3603: YES), the process is executed during the operation valid period in step S3618, and if the operation corresponding effect is in progress (step S3602:). YES), in step S3619, the operation-corresponding production process is executed. The processing during the operation valid period and the processing during the operation corresponding effect will be described below.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the processing during the operation valid period.

When it is the start timing of the operation valid period (step S3701: YES), the second creation instruction information of the separately stored data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3702). When the process of step S3702 is executed, or when the operation valid period is not started and the effect operation device 48 is not operated (step S3701 and step S3703: NO), based on the currently set execution target table. , Grasp the type of image data corresponding to this update timing (step S3704). The image data includes the rearmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character. After that, parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the image data 244 for the effect character, the rearmost image data 241 and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image. The derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to each of the image data 241 to 244 in the work RAM 202 (step S3705 and step S3706). After that, the validity period information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3707). Further, when it is the end timing of the operation valid period (step S3708: YES), the first creation instruction information of the separately stored data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3709).

When the processing is executed during the operation valid period as described above, various image data 241 to 244 grasped in step S3704 are displayed in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407). It is set as an object to be placed in the coordinate system. Further, parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244 is set in the drawing list. In addition, the valid period information is set in the drawing list, and if this time is the start timing of the operation valid period, the second creation instruction information of the separately saved data is set, and this time is the end timing of the operation valid period. If so, the first creation instruction information of the separately stored data is set.

When the effect operation device 48 is operated during the operation valid period (step S3703: YES), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step). S3710 and step S3711). The image data includes the second separate storage data and the effect image data 248 stored and held in the second separate storage buffer 252. After that, the image data 244 for the effect character, the rearmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the effect image data 248, and the second separate storage data. Parameter information is calculated and derived for each, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to each of the image data 241 to 244 and 248 in the work RAM 202 (steps S3712 to S3715). In this case, the image data 244 for the effect character, the rearmost image data 241 and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are not to be arranged in the world coordinate system. , The storage and retention of the parameter information about these image data 241 to 244 in the work RAM 202 and the update of the parameter information are continued. After that, the operation correspondence effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3716).

When the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) includes various image data grasped in steps S3710 and S3711. 248 is set as the object to be placed in the world coordinate system. Further, parameter information applied to the image data 248 is set in the drawing list. In addition, operation-corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the process during the operation corresponding effect.

First, based on the execution target table currently set, the type of image data corresponding to the update timing this time is grasped (step S3801 and step S3802). The image data includes the second separate storage data and the effect image data 248 stored and held in the second separate storage buffer 252. After that, the image data 244 for the effect character, the rearmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the effect image data 248, and the second separate storage data. Parameter information is calculated and derived for each, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to each of the image data 241 to 244 and 248 in the work RAM 202 (steps S3803 to S3806). In this case, the image data 244 for the effect character, the backmost image data 241 and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are not to be arranged in the world coordinate system. , The storage and retention of the parameter information about these image data 241 to 244 in the work RAM 202 and the update of the parameter information are continued. After that, the operation correspondence effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3806).

When the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) includes various image data grasped in steps S3801 and S3802. 248 is set as the object to be placed in the world coordinate system. Further, parameter information applied to the image data 248 is set in the drawing list. In addition, operation-corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list.

Next, the setting process for separate storage display executed by VDP205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 95. The setting process for separate storage display is executed as a part of the setting process for the background executed in step S2602 of the drawing process (FIG. 70). Further, when the non-use instruction information of the separate storage data, the usage instruction information of the separate storage data, the validity period information, or the operation correspondence effect information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the separate storage display is executed.

When the instruction information for using the separately saved data is not set in the drawing list this time, and the operation corresponding effect information is not set in the drawing list this time (step S3901: NO), the most is based on the drawing list this time. The image data 241 on the back surface, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character are grasped as placement targets in the world coordinate system (step S3902). .. Further, the parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244 is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3903). Then, in a state where the parameter information grasped this time is applied to the image data 241 to 244 to be arranged, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed (step S3904). As a result, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (a2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the instruction information for using the separately saved data is set in the current drawing list (step S3905: YES), the first separate saved data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the additional individual image are used based on the current drawing list. The image data 246 of the above is grasped as an arrangement target in the world coordinate system (step S3906 to step S3908). Further, the parameter information applied to the first separate saved data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3909). Then, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed in a state where the parameter information grasped this time is applied to the first separate saved data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image (step). S3904). As a result, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (c2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the operation correspondence effect information is set in the current drawing list (step S3905: NO), the second separate saved data and the effect image data 248 are grasped as the placement target in the world coordinate system based on the current drawing list. (Step S3910 and step S3911). Further, the parameter information applied to the second separate storage data and the effect image data 248 is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3912). Then, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed in a state where the parameter information grasped this time is applied to the second separate saved data and the effect image data 248 (step S3904). As a result, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (b2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the drawing data creation process for separate storage display executed by VDP205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The drawing data creation process for separate storage display is executed as a part of the effect and background drawing data creation process executed in step S2610 of the drawing process (FIG. 70). In addition, when the non-use instruction information of the separately saved data, the usage instruction information of the separately saved data, the validity period information, or the operation correspondence effect information is set in the drawing list, the drawing data creation process for the separately saved display is executed. To.

When the first creation instruction information of the separately saved data or the second creation instruction information of the separately saved data is set in the drawing list this time (step S4001: YES), the rearmost image data 241 and the first background individual image are used. The first separate storage data is created by projecting the image data 242 and the image data 243 for the second background individual image onto a virtual two-dimensional plane (step S4002). Then, the created first separate storage data is written to the first separate storage buffer 251 of the VRAM 204 (step S4003). As a result, the first separate storage data is stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251.

When a negative determination is made in step S4001 or when the process of step S4002 is executed, drawing data for displaying any of the images of FIGS. 91 (a2), 91 (b2) and 91 (c2) is created. (Step S4004). The drawing data is used in the drawing data composition process of step S2612 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) in order to display the image of one frame.

After that, when the second creation instruction information of the separately saved data is set in the drawing list this time (step S4005: YES), the drawing data created in the immediately preceding step S4004 is used as the second separately saved data in the second VRAM 204. Write to the separate storage buffer 252 (step S4006). As a result, the second storage data is stored and held in the second storage buffer 252. Further, since the drawing data used for displaying the image for one frame is used as it is for the second separate storage data, it is possible to suppress the processing load for creating the second separate storage data.

As described above, when displaying an image using the first separate saved data, the rearmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are used. On the other hand, it is possible to display the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 while executing the mask control. As a result, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 is reduced, and even if the additional individual image G75 is newly added as a display target. , It is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the VDP 205. When displaying an image using the second separate saved data, the rearmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the effect character. While performing mask control on the image data 244 for use, it is possible to display the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74. As a result, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 is reduced, and the effect image G76 is newly added as a display target. Even if it is done, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the VDP 205.

The parameter information of the image data excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by executing the mask control is stored and retained without being erased from the work RAM 202. As a result, when returning to the period for displaying the image by projecting the image data on a virtual two-dimensional plane, a process for securing an area for updating the parameter information of the image data in the work RAM 202 is executed. There is no need to do it. In order to newly set the parameter information of the image data as an update target, an initial process such as a search process for the storage area of the work RAM 202 for storing and holding the parameter information and a clear process for the storage area searched by the search process. It becomes necessary to execute the setting process, and the processing load of the initial setting process is larger than the processing load for updating the parameter information. Under such circumstances, the parameter information of the image data subject to mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202, so that the processing load of the display CPU 201 when the mask control is released becomes extremely large. It is possible to prevent this.

Further, even in a situation where the predetermined image data is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by executing the mask control, the display CPU 201 updates the parameter information for the predetermined image data. continue. As a result, immediately after the end of the period in which the image using the first separate storage data or the second separate storage data is displayed, the movement of the image corresponding to the predetermined image data from the state immediately before the start of the period is completed. Is not restarted, but from the state when the change of movement is continued for the time that the period is continued according to the display pattern up to that point with respect to the display state immediately before the start of the period, to the above-mentioned predetermined image data. It is possible to resume the movement of the corresponding image. This makes it possible to match the effect content with the effect execution device other than the symbol display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45.

Further, by executing the mask control, the rearmost image data 241 and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are excluded from the projection targets on the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in this situation, the buffer area in which the information referred to for arranging the image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system is stored in the VRAM 204 is retained. As a result, when returning to the period for displaying the image by projecting the image data 241 to 243 on the virtual two-dimensional plane, the information referred to for arranging the image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system can be obtained. It is not necessary to execute the process for securing the buffer area to be stored in the VRAM 204. In order to secure the buffer area, it is necessary to execute an initial setting process such as a search process for the storage area of the VRAM 204 and a clear process for the storage area searched by the search process, which is subject to mask control. By holding the buffer areas of the image data 241 to 243 as they are in the VRAM 204, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from becoming extremely large when the mask control is released.

If the period for displaying the image using the first separate storage data may occur immediately after the period for displaying the image using the second separate storage data is over, the image using the second separate storage data is displayed. Before the start of the period, not only the second storage data but also the first storage data is created. As a result, even if the mask control is executed for the image data 241 to 243 for creating the first separate storage data during the period for displaying the image using the second separate storage data, the second division Immediately after the period for displaying the image using the saved data ends, it becomes possible to display the image using the first separate saved data.

Further, even if the configuration is such that the first storage data is created before the period for displaying the image using the second storage data is started, the period for displaying the image using the second storage data is If the mask control is not executed for the image data 241 to 243 for creating the first separate saved data because it does not occur, the first immediately before starting the display of the image using the first separate saved data. 1 Separately saved data is newly created. As a result, each image G71 to G73 having a display mode closer to the timing of using the first separate storage data can be displayed as an image using the first separate storage data.

<Another form related to another preservation effect>
-Instead of the configuration in which both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are stored and retained when the operation valid period is started, the first separate storage data is stored at a predetermined timing before the operation valid period is started. And one of the second separately stored data is stored and retained, and the other separately stored data is stored at the timing after the predetermined timing but before the start of the operation valid period or at the start timing of the operation valid period. It may be a structure to be retained. In this case, it is possible to distribute the processing load as compared with the configuration in which both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are stored and retained in the same processing times.

-When the mask control is executed, the image data to be executed by the mask control is also the world coordinate system instead of the configuration in which the image data to be executed by the mask control is not arranged in the world coordinate system. Although it is arranged in, it may be configured to be excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane. In this case, when the mask control is completed, it is not necessary to execute the process for rearranging the image data to be executed by the mask control in the world coordinate system. Further, in the configuration, the image data that is the target of mask control may be arranged in the world coordinate system, but the parameter information applied to the image data in VDP205 may not be changed. However, it is preferable that the parameter information of the image data in the display CPU 201 is continuously updated.

-Instead of the configuration in which the update of the parameter information for the image data subject to mask control is continued on the display CPU 201, the parameter information on the display CPU 201 is updated for the image data subject to mask control. It may be configured not to be performed. In this case, the operation of the image corresponding to the image data that was the target of the mask control is restarted from the display state of the image corresponding to the separately stored data. Even with this configuration, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the state in which the parameter information to be the target of the mask control is stored in the work RAM 202 is stored and held during the execution of the mask control.

-The separately stored data separately stored in advance is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. Further, the above mask control configuration may be applied to a configuration in which there is only one type of separately stored data.

<Structure for performing angle display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing an angle display effect will be described.

The angle display effect uses a plurality of types of moving images that enable the display target whose movement changes with the passage of time to be displayed from different angles, and is used up to that point based on the operation of the effect operation device 48. It is a production that changes the target of use to a video with a different angle from the video that was the target. The specific display contents of the angle display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory views of FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b). As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the live-action video is displayed as a moving image in the angle display effect. In this live-action video, a person is displayed as the live-action character image G81, and the movement of the live-action character image G81 is displayed as a moving image. Further, FIG. 97 (a) corresponds to a moving image of a person in the live-action character image G81 from an A angle which is a predetermined angle with respect to the live-action character image G81, and FIG. 97 (b) is different from the A angle. It corresponds to a moving image of a person in the live-action character image G81 from an angle. In addition to the A-angle moving image and the B-angle moving image, there is also a moving image of a person in the live-action character image G81 from a C-angle different from the A-angle and the B-angle.

The contents of the data stored in advance in the memory module 203 for executing the angle display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 98.

As data for executing the angle display effect, the memory module 203 has the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle, the second moving image data group 262 of the A angle, and A as the moving image data for displaying the moving image of the A angle. The third moving image data group 263 of the angle is stored in advance. Further, in the memory module 203, as moving image data for displaying the moving image of the B angle, the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle, the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle, and the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle are used. Is stored in advance. Further, in the memory module 203, as moving image data for displaying the moving image of the C angle, the first moving image data group 267 of the C angle, the second moving image data group 268 of the C angle, and the third moving image data group 269 of the C angle are used. Is stored in advance.

99 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each moving image data group 261 to 269, FIG. 99A shows the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle, and FIG. 99B shows the second moving image of the A angle. The data group 262 is shown, FIG. 99 (c) shows the third moving image data group 263 of the A angle, FIG. 99 (d) shows the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle, and FIG. 99 (e) shows the B angle. The second moving image data group 265 is shown, FIG. 99 (f) shows the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle, and FIG. 99 (g) shows the first moving image data group 267 of the C angle. ) Shows the second moving image data group 268 of the C angle, and FIG. 99 (i) shows the third moving image data group 269 of the C angle.

As shown in FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (i), each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has a plurality of moving image data 271a to 273c, respectively. As described above, the moving image data 271a to 273c are image data that is compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data with reference to one frame of still image data, and is encoded by, for example, the MPEG2 method. .. When the moving image data 271a to 273c are decoded, they are expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames.

One moving image data 271a to 273c possessed by each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has a data amount such that still image data corresponding to the minimum number of units that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. Is set. Specifically, for the still image data for the minimum number of units, each moving image data 271a to 273c can reproduce 48 still image data, in other words, can update the image 48 times (update 48 frames). It has become. Each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has the same number (specifically, 20) of such moving image data 271a to 273c.

The first moving image data group 261 of the A angle, the second moving image data group 262 of the A angle, and the third moving image data group 263 of the A angle all correspond to the A angle as the live character image G81 moves according to a predetermined operation pattern. The purpose is to display a series of moving images as viewed from an angle. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 271a to 271c in each moving image data group 261 to 263 of the A angle. In this case, in each of the moving image data groups 261 to 263 of the A angle, the still image data in the last order in the moving image data 271a to 271c in which the order to be decoded is a predetermined order and the next in the predetermined order. The movement of the live character image G81 has continuity in the predetermined operation pattern with respect to the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271a to 271c which are in order. Therefore, in the case of the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle, the moving image data 271a included in the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle is sequentially decoded and displayed according to a predetermined decoding order. Thereby, it is possible to display a series of movements of the live-action character image G81 as if it were moved according to a predetermined movement pattern at an angle corresponding to the A angle. Further, in the case of the second moving image data group 262 of the A angle, the moving image data 271b included in the second moving image data group 262 of the A angle is sequentially decoded and displayed in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. Thereby, it is possible to display a series of movements of the live-action character image G81 as if it were moved according to a predetermined movement pattern at an angle corresponding to the A angle. Further, in the case of the third moving image data group 263 of the A angle, the moving image data 271c included in the third moving image data group 263 of the A angle is sequentially decoded and displayed in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. Thereby, it is possible to display a series of movements of the live-action character image G81 as if it were moved according to a predetermined movement pattern at an angle corresponding to the A angle.

The first moving image data group 264 of the B angle, the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle, and the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle all correspond to the B angle as the live character image G81 moves according to a predetermined operation pattern. The purpose is to display a series of moving images as viewed from an angle. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 272a to 272c in each moving image data group 264 to 266 of the B angle. In this case, in each of the moving image data groups 264 to 266 of the B angle, the still image data in the last order in the moving image data 272a to 272c in which the order to be decoded is a predetermined order and the next in the predetermined order. The movement of the live character image G81 has continuity in the predetermined operation pattern with respect to the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 272a to 272c which are in order. Therefore, if the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle is used, the moving image data 272a included in the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle is sequentially decoded and displayed in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. Thereby, it is possible to display a series of movements of the live-action character image G81 as if it were moved according to a predetermined movement pattern at an angle corresponding to the B angle. Further, in the case of the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle, the moving image data 272b included in the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle is sequentially decoded according to a predetermined decoding order to display the image. Thereby, it is possible to display a series of movements of the live-action character image G81 as if it were moved according to a predetermined movement pattern at an angle corresponding to the B angle. Further, in the case of the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle, the moving image data 272c included in the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle is sequentially decoded and displayed in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. Thereby, it is possible to display a series of movements of the live-action character image G81 as if it were moved according to a predetermined movement pattern at an angle corresponding to the B angle.

The first moving image data group 267 of the C angle, the second moving image data group 268 of the C angle, and the third moving image data group 269 of the C angle all correspond to the C angle as the live character image G81 moves according to a predetermined operation pattern. The purpose is to display a series of moving images as seen from the angle at which they are viewed. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 273a to 273c in each moving image data group 267 to 269 of the C angle. In this case, in each of the moving image data groups 267 to 269 of the C angle, the still image data in the last order in the moving image data 273a to 273c in which the order to be decoded is a predetermined order and the next in the predetermined order. The movement of the live character image G81 has continuity in the predetermined operation pattern with respect to the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 273a to 273c which are in order. Therefore, in the case of the first moving image data group 267 of the C angle, the moving image data 273a included in the first moving image data group 267 of the C angle is sequentially decoded and displayed according to a predetermined decoding order. This makes it possible to display a series of movements of the live character image G81 as if it were moving according to a predetermined movement pattern at an angle corresponding to the C angle. Further, in the case of the second moving image data group 268 of the C angle, the moving image data 273b included in the second moving image data group 268 of the C angle is sequentially decoded according to a predetermined decoding order to display the image. This makes it possible to display a series of movements of the live character image G81 as if it were moving according to a predetermined movement pattern at an angle corresponding to the C angle. Further, in the case of the third moving image data group 269 of the C angle, the moving image data 273c included in the third moving image data group 269 of the C angle is sequentially decoded and displayed according to a predetermined decoding order. Thereby, it is possible to display a series of movements of the live-action character image G81 as if it were moved according to a predetermined movement pattern at an angle corresponding to the C angle.

Since the moving image data 271a to 273c derive the still image data by executing the decoding process, it is not possible to start displaying the image from the middle timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c, and the moving image is tentatively used. When the image display is started from the timing in the middle of the data 271a to 273c, a processing waiting time occurs until the still image data at the timing in the middle is derived. In this case, since each moving image data group 261 to 269 has a plurality of moving image data 271a to 273c, the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order are obtained. It is possible to use the switching timing of the above as the angle change timing. Therefore, it is possible to change the type of the angle among the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle during the execution of the angle display effect.

Here, in the angle display effect, the trigger for changing the angle is generated by the operation of the effect operation device 48. In this case, if the angle is not changed at an early stage with respect to the operation timing of the effect operation device 48, it becomes difficult to give the player the impression that the angle is changed due to the operation of the effect operation device 48. It ends up. On the other hand, as already described, there are a plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 for displaying the same moving image in each of the angles A to C, specifically, three. Further, the number of image updates (number of frames) after the start of the angle display effect corresponding to the first-order still image data in the arbitrary moving image data 271a to 273c is set between the moving image data groups 261 to 269 within the same angle. It's different.

Specifically, in each of the angles A to C, in the first moving image data groups 261,264,267, the first-order still image data in the first-order moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a starts the angle display effect. The moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the subsequent order correspond to the timing, and the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the previous order can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. It corresponds to the timing when the video display progresses by the number of minutes corresponding to the minimum number of units. In this case, the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle, the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle, and the first moving image data group 267 of the C angle have the same number of moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a. , The number of image updates after the start of the angle display effect corresponding to the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the corresponding order is the same.

In the second moving image data group 262,265,268 at each angle of A to C, the still image data of the first order in the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b of each order is the first moving image of each angle of A to C. Corresponding to the timing at which the moving image is displayed for the first reference period K1 with respect to the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the corresponding order in the data groups 261,264,267. There is. In other words, in the second moving image data group 262,265,268 at each angle of A to C, the first-order still image data in the first-order moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b is the start timing of the angle display effect. On the other hand, it corresponds to the timing when the video display progresses by the first reference period K1 minutes, and the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in the subsequent order corresponds to the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in the previous order. Therefore, it corresponds to the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed by the number corresponding to the minimum number of units of the still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. In this case, the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the second moving image data group 262,265,268 are the moving images included in the first moving image data group 261,264,267 at the same angle. The contents of the still image data created by the decoding process partially overlap with the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the corresponding order of the data 271a, 272a, 273a. Furthermore, all the still image data created by one moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the second moving image data group 262,265,268 is the first moving image data group 261,264,267. It is included in the still image data created by the two consecutive moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a included in.

In the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 at each angle of A to C, the still image data of the first order in the moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c of each order is the second moving image of each angle of A to C. Corresponding to the timing at which the moving image is displayed for the second reference period K1 with respect to the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in the corresponding order in the data groups 262,265,268. There is. In other words, in each of the angles A to C, in the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269, the first-order still image data in the first-order moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c is the start timing of the angle display effect. On the other hand, it corresponds to the timing when the video display progresses for the second reference period K2, which is twice the first reference period K1, and the moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c in the subsequent order are in the previous order. With respect to the moving image data 271c, 272c, and 273c, it corresponds to the timing at which the moving image is displayed by the number corresponding to the minimum unit number of the still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. In this case, the moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c included in the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 are the moving images included in the first moving image data group 261,264,267 at the same angle. The contents of the still image data created by the decoding process partially overlap with the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the corresponding order of the data 271a, 272a, 273a, and the second moving image data at the same angle. The contents of the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the groups 262,265,268 and the still image data created by the decoding process partially overlap with the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in the corresponding order. is doing. Furthermore, all the still image data created by one moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c included in the third moving image data group 263,266,269 is the first moving image data group 261,264,267. Two consecutive moving images included in the still image data created by the two consecutive moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a, and included in the second moving image data group 262,265,268. It is included in the still image data created by the image data 271b, 272b, 273b.

The number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the number of still image data that can be reproduced by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each moving image data 271a to 273c. In other words, the number of image updates (number of frames) in the first reference period K1 is less than the number of image updates by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each moving image data 271a to 273c. Furthermore, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. Specifically, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is 16, and the number of image updates in the first reference period K1 is 16.

The number of still image data that can be reproduced in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the number of still image data that can be reproduced by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each moving image data 271a to 273c. In other words, the number of image updates (number of frames) in the second reference period K2 is less than the number of image updates by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each moving image data 271a to 273c. Furthermore, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. Specifically, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is 32, and the number of image updates in the first reference period K1 is 32.

As described above, a plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 for displaying the same moving image at each of the angles A to C are provided. Further, in each angle, the second moving image data group 262,265,268 is a number smaller than the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c for the first moving image data groups 261,264,267. The third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 is a still image that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c for the second moving image data group 262,265,268 while the first reference period corresponding to the above is deviated by K1 minutes. The first reference period K1 minutes deviates from the number corresponding to the number smaller than the minimum number of units of data. As a result, it is possible to generate a large number of switching timings between the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order at each angle. It is possible to change the angle at an early stage.

Next, the state in which the angle display effect progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 100 (a) shows the operation timing of the effect operating device 48, FIG. 100 (b) shows the waiting period until the angle is switched with respect to the operation of the effect operation device 48, and FIG. 100 (c) shows the waiting period. The timing at which the angle can be switched is shown, FIG. 100 (d) shows the period during which the A-angle moving image is displayed, and FIG. 100 (e) shows one included in the A-angle moving image data groups 261 to 263. The period in which the moving image data 271a to 271c of No. 271a to 271c are read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 is shown, and FIG. Indicates a period during which one moving image data 272a to 272c included in the B-angle moving image data groups 264 to 266 is read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. In the following description, the case where the angle is changed from the A angle to the B angle will be described, but the same applies to other patterns for changing the angle.

As shown in FIG. 100 (d), in the situation where the moving image using the first moving image data group 261 of the A-angle moving image data groups 261 to 263 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 100 (c). At the timing of t1, the timing at which the B angle can be switched to the second moving image data group 265 is generated, and at the timing of t2, the timing at which the B angle can be switched to the third moving image data group 266 is generated. However, since the effect operating device 48 has not been operated by the timing of t1 and the timing of t2, the angle switching does not occur.

The angle switching triggered by the operation of the effect operation device 48 is performed by looping in a predetermined order among the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle. Specifically, the A angle is selected at the start timing of the angle display effect, and then the operation of the effect operation device 48 triggers the operation of the A angle → B angle → C angle → A angle → B angle → C angle → A. Angle switching occurs in the order of angle → ....

After that, at the timing of t3, it is the timing to read and decode the moving image data 271a in the next order in the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle which is the target of the moving image display. Therefore, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 100 (e), the moving image data 271a in the next order is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, and the moving image is obtained. The decoding process is started for the image data 271a. In this case, only one moving image data 271a is read from the memory module 203 into the moving image data area 211b, and the decoding process is started. Then, the plurality of still image data after the decoding process are written in the moving image data area 211b. Further, in the reading and decoding processing of the one moving image data 271a, the moving image data area 211b so that the still image data created from the one moving image data 271a currently displayed is not erased. The data is set to.

After that, at the timing of t4, which is the timing at which the decoding process is completed, the switchable timing to the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle occurs as shown in FIG. 100 (c). However, since the effect operation device 48 has not been operated by the timing of t4, the angle switching does not occur, and the moving image of the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle whose decoding is completed at the timing of t4. The display of the moving image using the data 271a is started.

After that, at the timing of t5, the effect operating device 48 is operated as shown in FIG. 100 (a). In this case, since the moving image data 271a, which is the current display target, is being displayed and it is not the timing for switching the B angle to the moving image data groups 264 to 266, the angle is as shown in FIG. 100 (b). Will be in a state of waiting for switching.

After that, at the timing of t6, one moving image data 271a to 273c can be decoded before the timing of t7, which is the timing at which the B angle moving image data group 264 to 266 can be switched. It is the timing at which decoding can be started. Therefore, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 100 (g), the decoding of the moving image data 272b of the switching destination is started in the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle. Specifically, in the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle, the moving image data 272b of the switching destination this time is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and the moving image data 272b is decoded. It will be started. Then, the plurality of still image data after the decoding process are written in the moving image data area 211b. Further, in the reading and decoding processing of the one moving image data 272b, the moving image data area 211b so that the still image data created from the one moving image data 271a currently displayed is not erased. The data is set to. The period between the decoding startable timing and the switchable timing is shorter than the period in which the moving image is displayed by one moving image data 271a to 273c. For example, the decoding startable timing is switched immediately after. It corresponds to the update timing of the image two times before the possible timing.

After that, at the timing of t7, which is the timing at which the decoding process is completed, the display of the moving image using the moving image data 272b of the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle whose decoding is completed at the timing of t7 is started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 100 (f), the display of the B-angle moving image is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), the switchable timing of the C angle to the third moving image data group 269 occurs at the timing of t8. However, since the effect operation device 48 has not been operated by the timing of t8, the angle switching does not occur, and the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle whose decoding is completed at the timing of t7. The display of the moving image using the moving image data 272b is continued.

As described above, the angle is changed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48, but the operation timing of the effect operation device 48 is the operation timing, and the decoding process of the moving image data 271a to 273c of the switching destination is performed. Even if it starts, if the decoding process is not completed by the switchable timing of the next angle, the angle cannot be switched at the switchable timing of the next angle, and the switchable timing of the next angle is further performed. The angle is switched in. Such an operation will be described.

As shown in FIG. 100 (d), in a situation where a moving image using the first moving image data group 261 of the A-angle moving image data groups 261 to 263 is being displayed, FIG. 100 (a) shows the timing of t9. As shown, the effect operating device 48 is operated. In this case, since the moving image data 271a, which is the current display target, is being displayed and it is not the timing for switching the B angle to the moving image data groups 264 to 266, the angle is as shown in FIG. 100 (b). Will be in a state of waiting for switching.

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), the B-angle moving image data group 264 to 266 can be switched. However, the period between the timing of t9 when the effect operation device 48 is operated and the timing of t10, which is the timing at which the B angle moving image data group 264 to 266 can be switched, is one moving image data 271a to. It is less than the period required to complete the decoding process for 273c. Therefore, at the timing of t10, switching of the B angle to the moving image data group 264 to 266 does not occur. At the timing of t10, the reading and decoding processing of the B-angle moving image data 272a to 272c has not been started yet.

After that, at the timing of t11, one moving image data 271a to 273c can be decoded before the timing of t12, which is the timing at which the B angle moving image data group 264 to 266 can be switched. It is the timing at which decoding can be started. Therefore, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 100 (g), the decoding of the moving image data 272c of the switching destination is started in the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle. Specifically, in the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle, the moving image data 272c of the switching destination this time is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and the moving image data 272c is decoded. It will be started. Then, the plurality of still image data after the decoding process are written in the moving image data area 211b. Further, in the reading and decoding processing of the one moving image data 272c, the moving image data area 211b so that the still image data created from the one moving image data 271a currently displayed is not erased. The data is set in.

After that, at the timing of t12, which is the timing at which the decoding process is completed, the display of the moving image using the moving image data 272c of the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle whose decoding is completed at the timing of t12 is started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 100 (f), the display of the B-angle moving image is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), the switchable timing of the C angle to the first moving image data group 267 occurs at the timing of t13. However, since the effect operation device 48 has not been operated by the timing of t13, the angle switching does not occur, and the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle whose decoding is completed at the timing of t12. The display of the moving image using the moving image data 272c is continued.

When the effect operation device 48 is operated immediately before the angle switchable timing as described above, the angle is switched at the next switchable timing, so that the moving image of the switching destination angle is used. The angle is switched at the timing when the decoding for the data 271a to 273c is completed. This makes it possible to prevent the decoding waiting time of the moving image data 271a to 273c from occurring when the angle is switched.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the angle display effect will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for angle display effect executed by the display CPU 201. The calculation process for the angle display effect is executed by the effect calculation process in step S2504 in the task process (FIG. 68) in the open / close execution mode in which the angle display effect should be executed.

If it is the opening period immediately before the start of the angle display effect (step S4101: YES), the opening process is executed (step S4102). The opening period is a period set before starting the display of the moving image by any of the A angle to the C angle, and the display of the moving image by any of the A angle to the C angle is started from now on in the opening period. It is notified that the angle can be changed by operating the effect operation device 48. Further, during the opening period, the angle to be displayed can be selected at the start timing of the moving image display based on the operation of the effect operation device 48.

The opening process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 102. First, it is determined whether or not it is the reading period of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4201). As the opening period, an angle selection period that enables angle selection is set first, and then a reading period of moving image data 271a to 273c is set. In the case of the angle selection period (step S4201: NO), it is determined whether or not the operation generation command is received from the sound light side MPU 62 (step S4202). The effect operation device 48 is electrically connected to the sound / light side MPU 62, and when the effect operation device 48 is operated, an operation generation command is transmitted from the sound / light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 201.

When the operation generation command is received from the sound light side MPU 62 (step S4202: YES), the update process of the angle counter provided in the work RAM 202 is executed (step S4203). The angle counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which angle of the moving image data 271a to 273c is to be read at the reading timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c. When the value of the angle counter is "0", it corresponds to the A angle, when the value of the angle counter is "1", it corresponds to the B angle, and the value of the angle counter is "2". The case corresponds to the C angle. When the opening period is started, the value of the angle counter is "0", the operation occurrence command is received, the process of step S4203 is executed, and 1 is added to the value of the angle counter. Further, when the value of the angle counter after 1 addition becomes "3", the value of the angle counter is cleared to "0".

On the other hand, in the case of the reading period of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4201: YES), the moving image data 271a to 273c corresponding to the current value in the angle counter of the work RAM 202 is grasped (step S4204). In this case, if the value of the angle counter is "0", the moving image data 271a in the first order in the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle is grasped, and if the value of the angle counter is "1", the B angle The first order moving image data 272a in the first moving image data group 264 is grasped, and if the value of the angle counter is "2", the first order moving image data 273a in the first moving image data group 267 of the C angle is grasped. do. After that, the decoding designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4205).

When a negative determination is made in step S4202, when the process of step S4203 is executed, or when the process of step S4205 is executed, various image data necessary for displaying the image corresponding to the current update timing in the opening period. (Step S4206), and the parameter information applied to the image data is calculated and derived (step S4207). Then, the opening information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4208).

When the opening process is executed as described above, various image data grasped in step S4206 are arranged in the world coordinate system in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407). Set as a target. In addition, parameter information applied to these various image data is set in the drawing list. In addition, opening information is set in the drawing list. By executing the drawing process (FIG. 70) in the VDP 205 according to the drawing list, the image for the opening period is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the decoding designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201, the decoding designation information is set in the drawing list, and the moving image data 271a to 273c grasped in step S4204 are stored. In the information of the address of the memory module 203 and the moving image data area 211b, the address of the area where the moving image data 271a to 273c are expanded as still image data is set. In this case, the VDP 205 reads the moving image data 271a to 273c specified in the drawing list from the memory module 203 into the moving image data area 211b and executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 103.

Specifically, the addresses of the moving image data 271a to 273c are grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S4301), and the moving image data 271a to 273c are still images from the information specified in the drawing list. The address of the area to be expanded as data is grasped (step S4302). Then, the moving image data 271a to 273c are read from the address of the memory module 203 grasped in step S4301, and the moving image data 271a to 273c are decoded. Then, the still image data group of the decoding result is written in each area of the address of the moving image data area 211b grasped in step S4302 (step S4303).

Returning to the explanation of the arithmetic processing for the angle display effect (FIG. 101), if it is not the opening period (step S4101: NO), the condition that the operation generation command is received from the sound light side MPU 62 (step S4103: YES). ), Set "1" to the operation reception flag provided in the work RAM 202 (step S4104). The operation reception flag is a flag for specifying on the display CPU 201 that the angle should be switched. Only one operation reception flag is provided, and even if the effect operation device 48 is operated multiple times before the angle is switched, the operation is accepted for the second and subsequent operations of the effect operation device 48. Only the state in which "1" is set in the flag is maintained. Then, as will be described in detail later, when the operation reception flag is set to "1", no matter how many times the effect operation device 48 is operated before the angle switching occurs, the order is as follows from the current angle. Switch to the angle of. As a result, when the angle is switched, the angles are switched in a predetermined order as the content of the angle display effect displayed on the symbol display device 41.

In the arithmetic processing for the angle display effect, it is determined in step S4105 whether or not it is the timing at which the decoding of the moving image data 271a to 273c can be started. The decoding startable timing is the angle switchable timing (t1 timing, t2 timing, t4 timing, t7 timing, t8 timing, t10 timing, t12 timing, t13 in FIG. 100). The timing) is set as the update timing of the image before a predetermined period, in other words, a predetermined number of times. More specifically, the period between the decoding startable timing and the switchable timing is shorter than the period during which the moving image is displayed by one moving image data 271a to 273c, for example, the decoding startable timing. Corresponds to the update timing of the image two times before the switchable timing immediately after. Whether or not the video data is decoded is determined based on the execution target table for the angle display effect read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 when the angle display effect is started.

When it is the timing at which the decoding of the moving image data 271a to 273c can be started (step S4105: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the operation acceptance flag of the work RAM 202 (step S4106). When "1" is not set in the operation reception flag (step S4106: NO), the value of the timing counter provided in the work RAM 202 is decremented by 1 (step S4107). The timing counter is the same moving image data group 261 when the moving image is continuously displayed by one moving image data 271a to 273c for the same moving image data group 261 to 269 without the occurrence of angle switching. It is a counter for specifying the timing for executing the decoding process of the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order in ~ 269 on the display CPU 201. The timing counter is set to "3" when the decoding process of the moving image data 271a to 273c is newly executed, and the moving image data 271a to 273c are used in the situation where the same moving image data 271a to 273c are used. The value of the timing counter is decremented by "1" every time the decoding timing is reached. At the timing when the opening period ends in the angle display effect, the value of the timing counter is "3".

When the value of the timing counter after subtracting "1" is "0" (step S4108: YES), at the timing of decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order in the same moving image data group 261 to 269. It means that there is. In this case, the decoding processing of the moving image data 271a to 273c shown in steps S4109 to S4112 is executed.

Specifically, first, the moving image compatible table 275 corresponding to the current value of the angle counter is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S4109). As already described, the angle counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which angle of the moving image data 271a to 273c is to be read at the reading timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c. The moving image correspondence table 275 is stored in advance in the memory module 203 in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle. In the moving image correspondence table 275, the relationship between the timing at which the new moving image data 271a to 273c can occur and the type of the switching destination moving image data 271a to 273c at the switching timing is predetermined. Further, in each angle, the first moving image data group 261,264,267, the second moving image data group 262,265,268 and the third moving image data group 263,266,269 can be used to generate new moving image data 271a to 273c. Since the timing at which switching can occur is different and the types of moving image data 271a to 273c of the switching destination are also different, the above data is set for each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be used in the moving image correspondence table 275. There is.

FIG. 104A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the moving image compatible table 275 corresponding to the A angle. The contents of the moving image-compatible table corresponding to the B angle and the moving image-compatible table corresponding to the C angle are the same as those in FIG. 104 (a).

As shown in FIG. 104 (a), the pointer information corresponding to the switching is set as the information for specifying the timing at which the switching to the new moving image data 271a to 271c may occur. The pointer information corresponds to the number of times the image is updated using the moving image data 271a to 271c, and specifically, each time the image is updated using the moving image data 271a to 271c. The pointer information of the reference target is added by 1. Further, when the display of the image using the first moving image data 271a to 271c is started in the angle display effect, the pointer information to be referred to is "0". Then, the update of the pointer information of the reference target is continued without clearing "0" in the middle until the display of the image using the moving image data 271a to 271c is completed in the angle display effect. Therefore, when the pointer information is "16", it means that the image has been updated 16 times using the moving image data 271a to 271c, and when the pointer information is "32", the moving image data has been updated by then. It means that the image was updated 32 times using 271a to 271c.

One type of moving image data 271a to 271c is set corresponding to each of the pointer information corresponding to switching. As described above, in the first moving image data group 261, the moving image data 271a in the first order corresponds to the start timing of the angle display effect, and the moving image data 271a in the subsequent order corresponds to the moving image data 271a in the previous order. On the other hand, it corresponds to the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed by the number of still image data that can be displayed by using one moving image data 271a. Therefore, for the first moving image data group 261, the moving image data 271a in the first order is not set in the moving image correspondence table 275, and the number of still image data that can be displayed by using one moving image data 271a is increased. On the other hand, the pointer information corresponding to each value multiplied by an integer is set as the pointer information corresponding to the switching. Then, for each of the pointer information corresponding to each switching, the information of the type of the corresponding moving image data 271a, specifically, the area where each moving image data 271a is developed in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204. Address information is set.

As described above, each moving image data 271b of the second moving image data group 262 corresponds to the timing at which the moving image is displayed for the first reference period K1 for each moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261. is doing. Therefore, for the second moving image data group 262, the pointer information corresponding to the switching of the moving image data 271b in the first order is the timing at which the moving image is displayed for the first reference period K1 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. Pointer information is set. Further, regarding the moving image data 271b after the first order in the second moving image data group 262, the pointer information corresponding to each switching set in the moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261 is set as the pointer information corresponding to the switching. On the other hand, the pointer information of the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed by the first reference period K1 is set.

As described above, each moving image data 271c of the third moving image data group 263 corresponds to the timing at which the moving image is displayed for the second reference period K2 for each moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261. is doing. Therefore, for the third moving image data group 263, the pointer information corresponding to the switching of the moving image data 271c in the first order is the timing at which the moving image is displayed for the second reference period K2 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. Pointer information is set. Further, regarding the moving image data 271c after the first order in the third moving image data group 263, the pointer information corresponding to each switching set in the moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261 is set as the pointer information corresponding to the switching. On the other hand, the pointer information of the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed for the second reference period K2 is set.

Returning to the description of the arithmetic processing for the angle display effect (FIG. 101), after reading the moving image compatible table 275, the moving image data 271a to 273c to be read this time and the decoding process is executed are grasped (step S4110). In the grasp, the target moving image counter provided in the work RAM 202 is referred to. The target moving image counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which moving image data group 261 to 269 is the reading target at the reading timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c. The case where the value of the target video counter is "0" corresponds to the first video data group 261,264,267, and the case where the value of the target video counter is "1" corresponds to the second video data group 262,265. , 268, and the case where the value of the target moving image counter is "2" corresponds to the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269. In step S4110, the types of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be read out are specified in the moving image corresponding table 275 read out in step S4109 based on the value of the target moving image counter. Then, among the pointer information corresponding to switching set for the moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be read out, the value is larger than the current pointer information in the angle display effect, and the current pointer information is used. On the other hand, the information of the moving image data 271a to 273c set corresponding to the pointer information corresponding to the switching of the closest value is grasped. As a result, the information of the moving image data 271a to 273c to be read out and the decoding process is executed this time is grasped by the display CPU 201.

After that, "3" is set in the timing counter of the work RAM 202 (step S4111), and the decoding designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4112). When these processes are executed, the decoding designation information is set in the drawing list this time, and the information and the moving image of the address of the memory module 203 in which the moving image data 271a to 273c grasped in step S4110 are stored. In the data area 211b, the address of the area where the moving image data 271a to 273c are developed as still image data is set. The VDP 205 that has received the drawing list executes the decoding process (FIG. 103) as described above, thereby reading the moving image data 271a to 273c to be read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b. The decoding process is executed, and each still image data after the decoding process is written in the designated area in the moving image data area 211b.

On the other hand, in the arithmetic processing for angle display effect (FIG. 101), when "1" is set in the operation acceptance flag of the work RAM 202 at the timing when decoding can be started (step S4105 and step S4106: YES), the operation is concerned. The reception flag is cleared to "0" (step S4113), and the switching reference table 276 is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S4114). In the switching reference table 276, when the angle is changed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48, the switching destination angle and the types of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 are related to the current angle and the types of the moving image data groups 261 to 269. It is a table for specifying.

FIG. 104 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the switching reference table 276. As shown in FIG. 104 (b), the pointer information corresponding to the switching is set as the information for specifying the timing at which the switching to the new moving image data 271a to 273c may occur. The content of the pointer information is the same as the content described for the moving image correspondence table 275 in FIG. 104 (a). The switchable pointer information is set according to the switchable timings of the first moving image data group 261,264,267, the second moving image data group 262,265,268 and the third moving image data group 263,266,269. Has been done. Specifically, as the pointer information corresponding to the first switching, the pointer information at the timing when the moving image is displayed for the first reference period K1 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect is set, and the pointer information corresponding to the subsequent switching is set. As the pointer information of, the pointer information of the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed by the first reference period K1 is set with respect to the pointer information corresponding to the immediately preceding switching.

For the pointer information corresponding to each switching, information on the correspondence between the current angle, the switching destination angle, and the combination of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 is set. Specifically, as described above, when the angle is changed due to the operation of the effect operation device 48, A angle → B angle → C angle → A angle → B angle → C angle → A angle → ... Angle switching occurs in this order. Further, the switchable timing to the first moving image data group 261,264,267, the switchable timing to the second moving image data group 262,265,268, and the switchable timing to the third moving image data group 263,266,269 are It is as described in FIG. 104 (a) about the moving image correspondence table 275. Therefore, the correspondence is as shown in FIG. 104 (b).

Returning to the description of the calculation process for the angle display effect (FIG. 101), after reading the switching reference table 276, the setting process of the angle counter and the target moving image counter is executed based on the switching reference table 276 (step S4115). In the setting process, among the pointer information for switching set in the switching reference table 276, the switching correspondence of the value larger than the current pointer information in the angle display effect and the closest value to the current pointer information. The pointer information of is specified, and the information set corresponding to the current angle in the pointer information corresponding to the switching is specified. For example, when the current pointer information in the angle display effect is "10" and the current angle is the A angle, the B angle information is specified as the switching destination angle information based on the switching reference table 276 and the switching is performed. The information of the second moving image data group 265 is specified as the information of the above moving image data groups 261 to 269. Further, for example, when the current pointer information in the angle display effect is "68" and the current angle is the C angle, the A angle information is specified as the switching destination angle information based on the switching reference table 276. The information of the third moving image data group 263 is specified as the information of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 of the switching destination. The angle information of the specified switching destination is set in the angle counter, and the information of the specified moving image data groups 261 to 269 of the switching destination is set in the target moving image counter.

After executing the processes of steps S4113 to S4115, the processes of steps S4109 to S4112 already described are executed. In this case, in step S4109, the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the value of the angle counter newly set in step S4115 is read out, and in step S4110, it corresponds to the value of the target moving image counter newly set in step S4115. The moving image data 271a to 273c to be performed is grasped.

In the arithmetic processing for the angle display effect, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to change the types of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4116). When the processes of steps S4109 to S4112 are executed, "1" is set in the change trigger flag provided in the work RAM 202. In step S4116, when "1" is set in the change trigger flag and the timing for switching the moving image data 271a to 273c is reached, the timing for changing the type of the moving image data 271a to 273c. Make an affirmative judgment as being. The switchable timings of the moving image data 271a to 273c are as described above, and the first switchable timing corresponds to the timing when the moving image is displayed for the first reference period K1 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. The subsequent switchable timing corresponds to the timing at which the moving image is displayed for the first reference period K1 minutes with respect to the immediately preceding switchable timing.

When it is the change timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4116: YES), the value of the frame counter provided in the work RAM 202 is cleared to "0" (step S4117). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4116, the change trigger flag is cleared to "0". The frame counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which of the still image data of the moving image data 271a to 273c developed in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204 is to be used. Is. When the value of the frame counter is "0", the still image data in the first order in one developed moving image data 271a to 273c is grasped as a target for use. Further, when the still image data is grasped as a target for use in step S4118 described later, the value of the frame counter is added by 1, and in the next step S4118, the still images in the order corresponding to the value of the frame counter after the addition of 1 are added. The data is grasped as the target of use.

When a negative determination is made in step S4116 or when the process of step S4117 is executed, the still image data corresponding to the value of the frame counter of the work RAM 202 is grasped as the image data to be used at the current update timing (step S4118). .. In this case, the value of the frame counter is added by 1. In addition, while grasping other image data necessary for displaying the image corresponding to the update timing this time (step S4119), the parameter information applied to the image data grasped in steps S4118 and S4119 is calculated. Derivation (step S4120). Then, the angle effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4121).

When the arithmetic processing for the angle display effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) includes various image data grasped in steps S4118 and S4119. Is set as the object to be placed in the world coordinate system. In addition, parameter information applied to these various image data is set in the drawing list. In addition, angle effect information is set in the drawing list.

When the VDP 205 receives the drawing list, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 105 as a setting process for the angle display effect, the VDP 205 first grasps the still image data grasped in step S4118 (step S4401), and then steps S4119. The other image data grasped in (step S4402) is grasped. Further, the parameter information grasped in step S4120 is grasped (step S4403). Then, the image data grasped in step S4401 and step S4402 are set in the world coordinate system in a state where the parameter information grasped in step S4403 is applied (step S4404). As a result, drawing data for displaying the image for the angle display effect is finally created, and the image for the angle display effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. The setting process for the angle display effect is executed in the setting process for the effect in step S2603 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) when the drawing list in which the angle effect information is set is received.

As described above, since each moving image data group 261 to 269 has a plurality of moving image data 271a to 273c, the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order can be obtained. The switching timing can be used as the angle change timing. Therefore, it is possible to change the type of the angle among the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle during the execution of the angle display effect.

Further, the amount of the moving image data 271a to 273c is set so that the still image data corresponding to the minimum number of units that can be set as the moving image data can be reproduced. This makes it possible to set many timings at which the moving image data 271a to 273c to be used can be switched. Further, according to the configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data to be read at one time.

A plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 for displaying the same moving image at each of the angles A to C are provided. Further, in each angle, the second moving image data group 262,265,268 is a number smaller than the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c for the first moving image data groups 261,264,267. The third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 is a still image that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c for the second moving image data group 262,265,268 while the first reference period corresponding to the above is deviated by K1 minutes. The first reference period K1 minutes deviates from the number corresponding to the number smaller than the minimum number of units of data. As a result, it is possible to generate a large number of switching timings between the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order at each angle. It is possible to change the angle at an early stage.

The moving image data 271a to 273c are not read out collectively for each angle to be selected, but are to be used next in a situation where one moving image data 271a to 273c is decoded and used. When it is time to decode the moving image data 271a to 273c, one moving image data 271a to 273c to be used is read out and decoded. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for reading the moving image data 271a to 273c in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204.

In a situation where one moving image data 271a to 273c is decoded and targeted for use, the moving image data 271a to 273c to be used next are read out and decoded. This makes it possible to prevent a waiting time for decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c when the new moving image data 271a to 273c are to be used.

In a configuration in which the angle is changed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48, even if the operation timing of the effect operation device 48 is before the switchable timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c, it is after the decoding start possible timing. If this is the case, the angle change with respect to the operation of the effect operation device 48 occurs not at the immediately after switchable timing but at the next switchable timing with respect to the immediately after switchable timing. This makes it possible to smoothly switch the angle for the operation of the effect operation device 48.

<Another form related to angle display production>
The number of images that can be displayed by one moving image data 271a to 273c is not limited to the same configuration, and the number of images that can be displayed by at least a part of the moving image data is the other moving images. The configuration may be different from the data. In this case, it is necessary to set the switchable timing to the new moving image data 271a to 273c and the decoding startable timing according to the type of each moving image data 271a to 273c.

-In a configuration in which the moving image display using the moving image data is started when the effect operation device 48 is operated during the operation valid period, the moving image display starts from the timing corresponding to the elapsed time from the start timing of the operation valid period. A video data group that makes it possible to display a series of specific videos for the configuration to be started, and another video data group that makes it possible to display a video that starts from the middle timing of the specific video. A configuration in which and is individually provided may be applied.

-The number of moving image data groups prepared for one angle is not limited to three types, and may be two types or four or more types. Further, the types of angles are not limited to three types, and may be two types or four or more types.

<Structure for directing the use of special videos>
Next, a configuration for performing a special moving image use effect will be described.

The special moving image use effect is an effect of using the special moving image data 282 when displaying an image on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the special moving image data 282, and FIG. 106 (a) shows normal moving image data 281 such as the moving image data 271a to 273c already described, and FIG. 106 (b) shows. Indicates special moving image data 282.

As shown in FIG. 106 (a), in the normal moving image data 281, file data is set at the first address, and then compressed data of each frame is set. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data includes I picture data for one frame corresponding to the reference data, P picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the first difference data, and B picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the second difference data. And have.

The I-picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by itself at the time of decoding. The P-picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to the I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before decoding. .. The B-picture data is bidirectionally predicted by referring to the I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or multiple frames before and the I-picture data or P-picture data after one frame or multiple frames at the time of decoding. It is data that can create still image data for one frame.

In the compressed data in the normal moving image data 281, I-picture data is set as the data of the first frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the second frame, ..., The first frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data in the mth frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the m + 1th frame, ..., The n-1th frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the nth frame. The arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above and is arbitrary.

By executing the decoding process on the normal moving image data 281, the still image data 283a to 283d (hereinafter referred to as normal decoded image data 283a to 283d) for a plurality of update timings from the normal moving image data 281 can be obtained from the VRAM 204. It will be created in the moving image data area 211b. In this case, the normal decoded image data 283a to 283d are image data in which the contents of some of the images displayed by the normal decoded image data 283a to 283d are different from each other.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), in the special moving image data 282, file data is set at the first address, and then I picture data for one frame corresponding to the reference data is set. , Compressed data other than the I picture data is not set. By executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282, the still image data 284 (hereinafter referred to as the special decoded image data 284) for a plurality of update timings from the special moving image data 282 is used as the moving image data area of the VRAM 204. It will be created at 211b. However, in these specially decoded image data 284, the contents of the images displayed by the specially decoded image data 284 are all the same image data.

The amount of the special moving image data 282 is set so that the still image data corresponding to the minimum number of units that can be set as the moving image data can be reproduced. Regarding the still image data for the minimum number of units, specifically, the special moving image data 282 can reproduce 48 still image data, in other words, it is possible to update the image 48 times (update 48 frames). ing. Therefore, when the special moving image data 282 is decoded, the same special decoded image data 284 as the content of the image is created for the minimum number of units. The amount of the moving image data 271a to 273c corresponding to the normal moving image data 281 is set so that the still image data for the minimum number of units that can be set as the moving image data can be reproduced as described above. However, the amount of normal moving image data 281 other than the moving image data 271a to 273c is set so that a larger number of still image data than the minimum number of units that can be set as moving image data can be created. There is.

The special moving image data 282 is stored in advance in the memory module 203 like the normal moving image data 281, but a plurality of types of special moving image data 282 are stored in the memory module 203. The content of the image by the special decoded image data 284 after the decoding process is different for each type of the special moving image data 282.

The special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data. In this case, predetermined object data for applying the special decoded image data 284 as texture data is stored in the memory module 203 in advance. The type of image displayed using the specially decoded image data 284 and the predetermined object data is arbitrary, but it may be configured to display character images of animals such as humans, cats, fish and dogs, other than animals. It may be configured to display an individual image in the shape of an object.

By setting the special moving image data 282 as described above, it is possible to store one texture data in the memory module 203 as moving image data. As described above, all of the texture data stored in advance in the memory module 203 as still image data is read out from the memory module 203 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started, and is used for expanding the VRAM 204. It is written in the texture area 211a in the buffer 211. In this case, as the types of texture data increase, the storage capacity required in the texture area 211a increases. On the other hand, if the type of texture data read out in the texture area 211a is changed every time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load of VDP205 increases.

On the other hand, by storing some texture data as special moving image data 282, it is possible to read some texture data to VRAM 204 as needed while eliminating the need to replace the texture area 211a. It becomes. Further, since the texture data is not stored in the memory module 203 but is stored as the special moving image data 282, the texture data is created from the special moving image data 282 using the moving image data area 211b. Is possible. Furthermore, when the moving image data area 211b is also used as the area for using the texture data, the special moving image data 282 is read out from the moving image data area 211b instead of reading the texture data itself. It is not necessary to change the handling of the moving image data area 211b in the VDP 205 according to the type of data read into the moving image data area 211b.

Next, a state in which the special moving image use effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 107 (a) shows the timing of starting supply of operating power, FIG. 107 (b) shows the reading period of texture data from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a, and FIG. 107 (c) shows the texture area 211a. FIG. 107 (d) shows the storage retention period of the texture data, FIG. 107 (d) shows the start timing of the special moving image use effect, and FIG. 107 (e) shows the execution period of the special moving image use effect, and the special moving image data 282 is used. FIG. 107 (f) shows the previous period, FIG. 107 (f) shows the reading period of the special moving image data 282 from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and FIG. 107 (g) shows the usage period of the special moving image data 282. ..

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the supply start timing of the operating power to the display CPU 201 is set, so that the texture data from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a as shown in FIG. 107 (b). Is started, and the reading of the texture data is completed at the timing of t2. As a result, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), all the texture data stored in advance in the memory module 203 is stored and held in the texture area 211a while the supply of the operating power to the VRAM 204 is continued. .. Since the backup power is not supplied to the VRAM 204, the texture data cannot be stored and held in the texture area 211a when the supply of the operating power to the display control device 200 is stopped.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the start timing of the special moving image use effect is reached. However, the use of the special moving image data 282 is not started at the timing of t3. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the object data read from the memory module 203 to the area other than the texture area 211a and the moving image data area 211b in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, and the texture at the start of supply of the operating power are used. Drawing data is created using the texture data read out in the area 211a, and the image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 using the drawing data.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 107 (f), the reading timing of the special moving image data 282 is set, so that the reading of the special moving image data 282 from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b is started. At the same time, the decoding process is executed for the special moving image data 282 read out in the moving image data area 211b. Then, at the timing of t5, the decoding process of the special moving image data 282 is completed, and the plurality of special decoded image data 284 created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282 is for moving image data. It is written in the area 211b.

At the timing of t5 when the decoding process of the special moving image data 282 is completed, the display of the image using the special decoded image data 284 is started as shown in FIG. 107 (g). In this case, the specially decoded image data 284 is used as texture data for pasting to the predetermined object data, and the predetermined object data and the specially decoded image data 284 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane. Drawing data is created. Then, the image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 using the drawing data, so that the image using the special decoded image data 284 is displayed. After that, at the timing of t6, the display of the image using the special moving image data 282 ends.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the special moving image use effect will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for special moving image use effect executed by the display CPU 201. It should be noted that the calculation process for the special moving image use effect is executed in the effect calculation process of step S2504 in the task process (FIG. 68) in the game times in which the special moving image use effect should be executed.

When the special moving image data 282 is not in use (step S4501: NO), the special moving image data 282 is referred to by referring to the execution target table read out to the work RAM 202 in order to control the execution of the special moving image use effect. It is determined whether or not it is the read timing (step S4502). When it is the read timing of the special moving image data 282 (step S4502: YES), the special moving image data 282 to be read this time and the decoding process is executed is grasped (step S4502). It should be noted that there are a plurality of types of special moving image use effects, and the types of special moving image data 282 to be used are different for each type of special moving image use effects. Further, the decoding designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4504).

After that, various image data necessary for displaying the image corresponding to the update timing this time is grasped (step S4505), and the parameter information applied to the image data is calculated and derived (step S4506). Then, the special moving image use effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4507). The various image data grasped in step S4505 include the object data stored in the memory module 203 and the texture data read out in the texture area 211a.

When the arithmetic processing for the special moving image use effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) contains various image data grasped in step S4505 in the world. It is set as an object to be placed in the coordinate system. In addition, parameter information applied to these various image data is set in the drawing list. In addition, special moving image use effect information is set in the drawing list.

When the decoding designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201, the decoding designation information is set in the drawing list, and the special moving image data 282 grasped in step S4503 is stored. In the information of the address of the memory module 203 and the moving image data area 211b, the address of the area where the special moving image data 282 is expanded as the special decoded image data 284 is set. In this case, the VDP 205 reads the special moving image data 282 of the type specified in the drawing list from the memory module 203 into the moving image data area 211b and executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 103.

Specifically, the address of the special moving image data 282 is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S4301), and the special moving image data 282 is specially decoded image data from the information specified in the drawing list. The address of the area to be expanded as 284 is grasped (step S4302). Then, the special moving image data 282 is read from the address of the memory module 203 grasped in step S4301, and the special moving image data 282 is decoded. Then, the plurality of specially decoded image data 284s of the decoded result are written in each area of the address of the moving image data area 211b grasped in step S4302 (step S4303). As a result, all the special decoded image data 284 created from the special moving image data 282 is written in the moving image data area 211b.

Returning to the explanation of the arithmetic processing for the special moving image use effect (FIG. 108), when the special moving image data 282 is in use (step S4501: YES), the special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter of the work RAM 202 Is grasped as image data to be used at this update timing (step S4508). The frame counter is used to specify which of the specially decoded image data 284s of the specially decoded image data 284 of the special moving image data 282 developed in the moving image data area 211b is to be used by the display CPU 201. It is a counter. The frame counter is also used when the normal moving image data 281 is used, such as an angle display effect. Further, when the usage period of the special moving image data 282 is started, the value of the frame counter is "0", and when the value of the frame counter is "0", the first order in the special moving image data 282. The specially decoded image data 284 of the above is grasped as a target for use. Further, when the specially decoded image data 284 is grasped as a target for use in step S4508, the value of the frame counter is added by 1, and in the next step S4508, the special decoding in the order corresponding to the value of the frame counter after the addition is 1. The image data 284 is grasped as a target for use.

Here, as described above, the plurality of special decoded image data 284s created by executing the decoding process on one type of special moving image data 282 are all the same image data, and the special decoded image data 284 is used. The contents of the images displayed using are the same. On the other hand, when the special decoded image data 284 is used as the texture data, the special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter is used instead of always using one special decoded image data 284. This makes it possible to use the same processing configuration as when displaying an image using normal moving image data 281.

After that, other image data necessary for displaying the image corresponding to the update timing this time is grasped (step S4509). In this case, the image data includes predetermined object data to which the special decoded image data 284 is applied. After that, the parameter information applied to the image data grasped in steps S4508 and S4509 is calculated and derived (step S4510), and the use instruction information of the special moving image data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4511).

When the arithmetic processing for the special moving image use effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) includes various images grasped in steps S4508 and S4509. The data is set to be placed in the world coordinate system. In addition, parameter information applied to these various image data is set in the drawing list. In addition, usage instruction information for special moving image data is set in the drawing list.

When the VDP 205 receives the drawing list in which the special moving image use effect information or the use instruction information of the special moving image data is set, the VDP 205 executes the setting process for the special moving image use effect. In the setting process for special moving image use effect, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 109, when the use instruction information of the special moving image data is set (step S4601: YES), the special decoding grasped in step S4508. The image data 284 is grasped (step S4602). Further, the other image data grasped in step S4509 are grasped (step S4603), and the parameter information grasped in step S4510 is grasped (step S4604). Then, the image data grasped in steps S4602 and S4603 are set in the world coordinate system in a state where the parameter information grasped in step S4604 is applied (step S4605). As a result, drawing data for displaying an image for special moving image use effect using the special decoded image data 284 as texture data is finally created, and the image for the special moving image use effect is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Will be done. The setting process for the special moving image use effect is for the effect of step S2603 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) when the drawing list in which the special moving image use effect information or the use instruction information of the special moving image data is set is received. It is executed by the setting process of.

By setting the special moving image data 282 as described above, it is possible to store one texture data in the memory module 203 as moving image data. As described above, all of the texture data stored in advance in the memory module 203 as still image data is read out from the memory module 203 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started, and is used for expanding the VRAM 204. It is written in the texture area 211a in the buffer 211. In this case, as the types of texture data increase, the storage capacity required in the texture area 211a increases. On the other hand, if the type of texture data read out in the texture area 211a is changed every time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load of VDP205 increases.

On the other hand, by storing some texture data as special moving image data 282, it is possible to read some texture data to VRAM 204 as needed while eliminating the need to replace the texture area 211a. It becomes. Further, since the texture data is not stored in the memory module 203 but is stored as the special moving image data 282, the texture data is created from the special moving image data 282 using the moving image data area 211b. Is possible. Furthermore, when the moving image data area 211b is also used as the area for using the texture data, the special moving image data 282 is read out from the moving image data area 211b instead of reading the texture data itself. It is not necessary to change the handling of the moving image data area 211b in the VDP 205 according to the type of data read into the moving image data area 211b.

The number of the special decoded image data 284 created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282 is one type. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary image data from being created.

The plurality of specially decoded image data 284s created by executing the decoding process on one type of special moving image data 282 are all the same image data, and the image displayed by using the specially decoded image data 284. The contents are the same. On the other hand, when the special decoded image data 284 is used as the texture data, the special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter is used instead of always using one special decoded image data 284. This makes it possible to use the same processing configuration as when displaying an image using normal moving image data 281.

The special moving image data 282 has only I picture data and does not have difference data such as B picture data and P picture data. This makes it possible to simplify the data structure of the special moving image data 282.

The special moving image data 282 is set as the minimum unit data amount that can be set as moving image data. This makes it possible to keep the data capacity of the special moving image data 282 small.

<Another form of special video usage>
-Not only the texture data but also the object data may be configured to be read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. In this case, since it is not necessary to read the object data into the VRAM 204 at an appropriate timing, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the VDP 205 at each creation timing of the drawing data.

-Although a plurality of types of image data are created by executing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282, only one or a part of them may be used. Even in this case, the texture data can be treated as moving image data.

-The configuration may be such that only one image data is created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282. In this case, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity for storing the image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282.

-The special moving image data 282 may have a plurality of the same I-picture data set, and when the special moving image data 282 is decoded, image data corresponding to the number of I-picture data may be created. ..

-Although a plurality of image data of the same type are created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282, only one of the image data may be used. In this case, of the plurality of image data created by executing the decoding process, only one image data may be stored and held in the moving image data area 211b, and the rest may be erased.

-A separate storage area is provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, and all or part of the image data created in the moving image data area 211b by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282 is stored in the separate storage area. It may be a configuration to be transferred. In this case, the image data can be stored and retained in another storage area even after use, and the image data is read out from the separate storage area at the next use, so that the special moving image data 282 There is no need to perform the decoding process again for.

-The special moving image data 282 has difference data such as B picture data and P picture data, but the difference data may be set so that the difference becomes "0". Even in this case, it is possible to create a plurality of specially decoded image data 284s of the same type.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) The processing configuration of the sound / light side MPU 62, the processing configuration of the display CPU 72, and the processing configuration of the VDP 76 in the first embodiment are configured to display a 3D image on the symbol display device 41 as in the second embodiment. May be applied to. Further, the processing configuration of the sound / light side MPU 62, the processing configuration of the display CPU 201, and the processing configuration of the VDP 205 in the second embodiment are configured to display a 2D image on the symbol display device 41 as in the first embodiment. May be applied.

(2) In the second embodiment described above, the camera (viewpoint) is set individually for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system, but instead of this, all the cameras (viewpoints) are arranged in the world coordinate system. A single camera may be set in common for image data.

(3) In the second embodiment, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is projected in units of a background image, an effect image, and a pattern image, but is summarized in units of a background image and an effect image. It may be a configuration in which the images are projected together, a configuration in which the effect image and a pattern image are projected together, or a configuration in which all of them are projected together.

(4) In the second embodiment, when the color information setting process (step S2609) is performed, the color information may be set such that the texture is pasted only on the projected surface. In this case, the rendering processing load can be reduced. Further, instead of setting the color information such as texture mapping before projection, the configuration may be such that the color information such as texture mapping is set after projection. In this case, at the time of projection, the coordinate information of each pixel constituting the projection plane may be stored, and the color information such as texture mapping may be set based on the coordinate information.

(5) Display control based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the voice emission control device 60 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50. The device 90 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 60. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 60 and the display control device 90 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 50, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 50. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 50 to the voice emission control device 60 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

(6) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Or, after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the main body of the gaming machine, which is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, is equipped with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a) and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP205) for displaying an image on the display unit using image data stored in the display storage means, and
Equipped with
The display storage means is created by executing a decoding process, and special moving image data (special moving image data 282), which is one type of image data to be used by the display control means, is the display storage means. A gaming machine characterized by being remembered in.

According to the feature A1, since the decoding process is executed and the display control means provides the special moving image data in which the image data to be used is one type, the one type of image data after the decoding is provided as a special moving image. It can be handled as image data. This makes it possible to use the one type of image data while not increasing the capacity of the image data similar to the one type of image data after the decoding.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the special moving image data is moving image data in which one type of image data is created by executing the decoding process.

According to the feature A2, when the special moving image data is decoded, a plurality of types of image data are not created, but one type of image data is created, so that unnecessary image data is created. It is possible to achieve the above-mentioned effects while preventing the data from being damaged.

Feature A3. The game according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the special moving image data is data in which a plurality of special image data (still image data 284) having the same content are created by executing the decoding process. Machine.

According to the feature A3, when the decoding process is executed on the special moving image data, a plurality of special image data having the same contents are created, so that the special moving image data is treated in the same manner as the image data created from the other moving image data. , Special image data with the same content can be used at the update timing of a plurality of images.

Feature A4. When the image update timing is a predetermined update timing, the display control means uses the special image data in a predetermined order created from the special moving image data, and is next to the predetermined update timing. The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein the special image data in the following order is used with respect to the predetermined order when the update timing is set.

According to the feature A4, a plurality of special image data having the same contents are created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data, and the special image data are used in a predetermined order. As a result, the special image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is combined with the image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data other than the special moving image data. It can be treated in the same way.

Feature A5. The moving image data other than the special moving image data includes reference data (I picture data) as a reference when the image data is created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data, and the reference data. It has difference data (B picture data, P picture data) that can create image data different from the image data created by the reference data by applying to.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the special moving image data has the reference data and does not have the difference data.

According to the feature A5, since the special moving image data has reference data and no difference data, only one type of image data is created when the decoding process is executed. Data structure of the special moving image data. Can be simplified. In addition, it is possible to keep the data capacity of the special moving image data small.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the special moving image data is set as a data amount of a minimum unit that can be set as moving image data.

According to the feature A6, it is possible to keep the data capacity of the special moving image data small.

Feature A7. The display control means performs a predetermined process on the predetermined image data (texture data) stored in the display storage means to display an image corresponding to the predetermined image data (step in VDP205). It has a function to execute the processing of S2609).
When displaying an image corresponding to the special image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data, the predetermined process is executed on the special image data by the predetermined process executing means. And
When the image data is used in the display control means, the image data is read from the display storage means to the read storage means (VRAM204).
The reading storage means includes a first reading area (texture area 211a) from which the predetermined image data is read, and a second reading area (moving image data area 211b) from which the special moving image data is read. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A6, which is characterized by being present.

According to the feature A7, when the image data is used in the display control means, the image data is not used directly from the display storage means, but is used after being read once by the read storage means. Therefore, by reading the image data into the reading storage means in advance, when the image data is used in the display control means, the image data can be used immediately. Further, the reading storage means is provided with a first reading area for reading predetermined image data and a second reading area for reading special moving image data, so that the storage means for reading can be read according to each application. The area is set, and when the image data is used in the display control means, the area can be specified according to the type of the image data.

In this case, although the configuration of the above feature A1 is provided and only one type of special image data is used in the display control means, the special image data is displayed as special moving image data instead of as predetermined image data. It is stored in the storage means. As a result, since the special image data is read out not in the first read area but in the second read area, it is not necessary to secure an area for using the special image data in the first read area. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the first read area.

Feature A8. A plurality of types of the predetermined image data are stored in the display storage means.
The gaming machine is
A first read execution means (a function of executing the process of step S2402 in the display CPU 201) for reading all of the plurality of types of the predetermined image data to the first read area when the predetermined read timing is reached.
When the image data corresponding to the moving image data other than the special moving image data is stored in the second read area and the image data corresponding to the special moving image data is stored in the second read area. A second read execution means (a function for executing the decoding process in the VDP 205) that overwrites the image data on the image data already stored in the second read area, and
The gaming machine according to the feature A7, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature A8, since all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data are read into the first read area, it is not necessary to read the predetermined image data as needed. On the other hand, moving image data is read into the second reading area as needed, and when new moving image data is read, the second reading area is overwritten. This makes it possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the second read area. In this case, although the configuration of the above feature A1 is provided and only one type of special image data is used in the display control means, the special image data is displayed as special moving image data instead of as predetermined image data. It is stored in the storage means. As a result, since the special image data is read out not in the first read area but in the second read area, it is not necessary to secure an area for using the special image data in the first read area. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the first read area.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the first read-out executing means reads out all of the plurality of types of the predetermined image data to the first read-out area when the supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature A9, it is possible to generate a state in which all of a plurality of types of predetermined image data are read out to the first read area at an early stage.

Feature A10. The special image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is set to any one of the features A1 to A9, which is characterized by being texture data used for displaying a three-dimensional image. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature A10, when the texture data is used, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above.

For the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. , One or more of the features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10 may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a) and
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) for displaying an image on the display unit, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
Data that determines the display mode of the individual image at each update timing of the image when the display unit causes the individual image (the symbol displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3) to display the specific variation for a predetermined period. Information storage means (memory module) for storing in advance the mode determination information (execution target table T10 for the acceleration period, execution target table T11 for the first high speed period, execution target table T12 for the first low speed period) in which is set. 74)
The display control means is
Target determination means (display CPU 72) for determining at least one of the type of the individual image to which the mode determination information is applied in the plurality of types of the individual images and the order in which the mode determination information is applied to the plurality of types of the individual images. (Function to execute the processing of step S908 and step S1011) in
An application execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1012 to S1014 in the display CPU 72) for performing the specific variation display by applying the mode determination information according to the contents determined by the target determination means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, the mode determination information is commonly applied to a plurality of types of individual images. As a result, it becomes possible to use the mode determination information in common for various situations in which the specific variation display is executed, and it is possible to reduce the number of the mode determination information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for storing the mode determination information in the information storage means.

Feature B2. When the specific variation display is newly started, the individual image of the type displayed at the start is controlled to start the variation display according to a predetermined variation start mode, and is displayed at the start. The type of the individual image to be made is a structure that can change.
As the mode determination information, at least information for causing the individual image to display the variation according to the predetermined variation start mode is set.
The target determination means is the type of the individual image and the plurality of types of the individual image to which the information for determining the mode is applied in the plurality of types of the individual image according to the type of the individual image displayed at the start of the specific variation display. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein at least one of the order in which the mode determination information is applied is determined in the individual image.

According to the feature B2, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the specific variation display has been started by setting the mode of the variation display at the start of the specific variation display to be constant in the predetermined variation start mode. .. Further, even when the mode of the variable display at the start of the specific variable display is fixed as such, the specific variable display is started because the type of the individual image displayed at the start can change. It is possible to diversify the aspects in.

In the configuration, the mode determination information is set with information for causing the variation display of the individual image according to the predetermined variation start mode at the start of the specific variation display, and is displayed at the start of the specific variation display. At least one of the type of the individual image to which the mode determination information is applied and the order of the individual images are determined in the manner corresponding to the type of individual image. As a result, even in a configuration in which the type of the individual image displayed at the start of the specific variation display can change, it becomes possible to commonly use the mode determination information for performing the specific variation display.

Feature B3. The individual image of the type corresponding to the type of the individual image displayed when the specific variation display is terminated last time is displayed at the start of the specific variation display in the next execution time. Feature The gaming machine described in B2.

According to the feature B3, since the individual image of the type corresponding to the type of the individual image displayed when the specific variation display was terminated last time is displayed at the start of the specific variation display in the next execution time, the specific variation is displayed. When the display is repeatedly executed, it is possible to add continuity to each execution time of the specific variation display. In this case, the type of the individual image for which the variation display is started differs depending on the predetermined variation start mode at the start of the specific variation display, but it is specified by having the configuration of the above feature B2. Even if the type of the individual image displayed at the start of the variable display can change, it is possible to commonly use the mode determination information for performing the specific variable display.

Feature B4. In the mode determination information, mode information (task content) for determining the mode of the specific variation display is set in chronological order.
The target determining means changes the type of the individual image of the target to which each of the mode information is applied, and the type of the individual image to be executed of the specific variation display changes as the specific variation display progresses. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that the determination is made in correspondence with the above.

According to the feature B4, even if the type of the individual image to be executed of the specific variation display changes as the specific variation display progresses, the aspect information set in time series in the aspect determination information is applied. The type of individual image to be used is determined. As a result, even if the type of the individual image to be executed of the specific variation display changes with the progress of the specific variation display, the mode determination information can be used in common.

Feature B5. The aspect determination information is any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that the aspect determination information is set as information corresponding to a period equal to or longer than the longest duration assumed as a situation in which the aspect determination information is used. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature B5, the mode-determining information can be used in common regardless of the duration of various situations in which the mode-determining information is used.

Feature B6. The duration of the situation in which the mode determination information is used is a predetermined timing from the switching timing of one of the individual image types to which the mode determination information is applied to the next switching timing. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the use of the mode determination information is set to end.

In the case of a configuration in which the mode determination information is set corresponding to the duration of various situations in which the mode determination information is used, the mode determination is performed in the middle of the time series information set in the mode determination information. It is assumed that it will be the end timing of the use of the information for the next time, and the information for the next control will be the target of use. In this case, according to the feature B6, the end timing of the use of the mode determining information is predetermined from the switching timing of one of the individual image types to which the mode determining information is applied to the next switching timing. It will be the timing. As a result, it becomes possible to make the situation in which the use of the next control information is started constant, and the design of the control information can be facilitated.

In addition, "the predetermined timing from the switching timing of one of the individual image types to which the mode determination information is applied" is "the application target of the mode determination information". The timing at which the type of the individual image is switched is also included.

Feature B7. The information for determining the mode is
A mode information group (task content) in which mode information for determining the mode of the specific variation display is set in chronological order, and
A plurality of target information groups (display symbol adjustment areas) in which target information to which information of the type of the individual image to which the mode information is applied are set corresponding to the mode information, and
Equipped with
The target determination means is characterized in that, when starting to use the mode determination information, information of the type of the individual image is set for each of the target information included in the target information group. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B6.

According to the feature B7, since the mode information group and the target information group are set in the mode determination information, the individual target to which the mode information is applied at each update timing only by referring to the mode determination information. It becomes possible to grasp the type of image. In this case, when the use of the mode determination information is started, the information of the type of the individual image is set for each of the target information included in the target information group of the mode determination information. As a result, it is not necessary to execute the process of adjusting the type of the individual image to be applied during the execution of the specific variation display, so that it is possible to simplify the processing configuration during the execution of the specific variation display.

Feature B8. The specific variation display is configured to be performed in each of a plurality of variation display areas.
The game according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the mode determination information is commonly used as information for controlling the specific variation display in each of the plurality of variation display areas. Machine.

According to the feature B8, since the mode determination information is commonly used for the specific variation display in each of the plurality of variation display areas, it is possible to reduce the number of the mode determination information.

For the configuration of any one of the features B1 to B8, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. , One or more of the features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10 may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. A display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a) and
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) for displaying an image on the display unit, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means is a simultaneous display control means (in the display CPU 72) that causes the first type image (loop display character G4) and the second type image (loop display background G5) to be simultaneously displayed on the display unit. It has a function to execute arithmetic processing for character loops and arithmetic processing for background loops, VDP76).
In the game machine, the first mode determination information (character movement table 123) in which the first mode information for determining the display mode of the first type image is set in chronological order and the display mode of the second type image. The second aspect determination information (background table 124) in which the second aspect information is set in time series and the information storage means (memory module 74) for storing in advance are provided.
When the first type image and the second type image are simultaneously displayed on the display unit, the simultaneous display control means determines the display mode of the first type image according to the information for determining the first aspect, and the display mode is determined. A gaming machine characterized in that the display mode of the second type image is determined according to the information for determining the second aspect.

According to the feature C1, in the configuration in which the first type image and the second type image are displayed at the same time, the mode determination information for determining the display mode of the first type image and the second type image is one aspect. The information for determining the first aspect for determining the display mode of the first type image and the information for determining the second aspect for determining the display mode of the second type image are not provided as the information for determination. Are provided individually. As a result, in the situation where one of the first type image and the second type image is stopped and displayed, the other is displayed in a variable manner, and then the image on the side in which the stopped display is displayed changes from the state in which the stopped display is displayed. Even when the display is restarted, it is possible to independently control the display of each type of image by using each of the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control the display effect in which both the first type image and the second type image are displayed at the same time.

Feature C2. The information for determining the first aspect is
A first reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of first reference information for which reference targets are sequentially updated by the simultaneous display control means are set each time the update timing of the first type image is reached.
The first aspect information group (task) in which the first aspect information for determining the display mode of the first type image at each update timing of the first type image is set corresponding to each of the first reference information. Contents) and
Equipped with
The information for determining the second aspect is
A second reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of second reference information is set in which the reference target is sequentially updated by the simultaneous display control means each time the update timing of the second type image is reached.
The second aspect information group (task) in which the second aspect information for determining the display mode of the second type image at each update timing of the second type image is set corresponding to each of the second reference information. Contents) and
The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the feature C2, a dedicated first reference information group is set for the first mode determination information, and a dedicated second reference information group is set for the second mode determination information. As a result, while one of the first aspect determination information and the second aspect determination information is not used, the reference information to be referred to by the other can be continuously updated, or the reference information to be referred to by the other can be used. It is possible to retain the information in a predetermined reference.

Feature C3. The information for determining the first aspect is information in which the first aspect information for causing the first type image to be displayed in the first variation mode is set in time series.
The information storage means has information for determining a third aspect (character retention table 122) in which information for causing the first type image to be displayed in a variation mode different from that of the first variation mode is set in time series. The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, which is characterized in that the above is stored in advance.

According to the feature C3, different mode determination information is provided corresponding to the difference in the content of the variation mode even when the first type image is displayed. As a result, when switching between a situation in which the first type image is displayed in the first variation mode and a situation in which the first type image is displayed in a variation mode different from the first variation mode, the mode to be used is determined. It is only necessary to switch between the information for determining the first aspect and the information for determining the third aspect, and it is possible to suitably switch between these variable modes.

Feature C4. The simultaneous display control means is
A first simultaneous display control means (step S1102 to step S1104, step S1109 to step S1113 and step in the display CPU 72) for displaying and controlling the display unit so that both the first type image and the second type image are displayed in a variable manner. (Function to execute the processing of S1202 to step S1206) and
A second simultaneous display control means (steps S1105 to S1113 in the display CPU 72) for displaying and controlling the display unit so that one of the first type image and the second type image is variablely displayed and the other is stopped and displayed. (Functions for executing the processes of steps S1207 to S1208) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

According to the feature C4, there are a situation where both the first type image and the second type image are variablely displayed, and a situation where one of the first type image and the second type image is variablely displayed and the other is stopped and displayed. By generating this, it is possible to diversify the display mode even in a situation where both the first type image and the second type image are displayed. In this case, the configuration of the above feature C1 is provided, and the information for determining the first aspect and the information for determining the second aspect are separately provided, so that the information for determining the first aspect and the information for determining the first aspect can be switched when the display status is switched. It is only necessary to switch the usage status of the information for determining the second aspect, and it is possible to suitably switch between these display statuses.

Feature C5. The first simultaneous display control means displays and controls the display unit so that the first type image displays in the first variation mode and the second type image displays in the second variation mode.
The second simultaneous display control means displays and controls the display unit so that the first type image displays in a variation mode different from the first variation mode, and the second type image performs stop display.
The information for determining the first aspect is information in which the first aspect information for causing the first type image to display according to the first variation mode is set in time series.
The information storage means stores in advance information for determining a third mode (character retention table 122) in which information for causing the first type image to be displayed in the different variation modes is set in time series. The gaming machine according to the feature C4.

According to the feature C5, the situation where the first type image is variablely displayed according to the first variation mode and the second type image is variablely displayed according to the second variation mode, and the first type image is different from the first variation mode. The display mode is diversified even in the situation where both the first type image and the second type image are displayed due to the situation that the second type image is stopped and displayed while being displayed in a variable manner depending on the variation mode. It becomes possible to plan. In this case, the information for determining the first aspect and the information for determining the third aspect are individually provided for the first type image, and the information for determining the second aspect is individually provided for the second type image. ing. As a result, when switching the display status, the target of use for the first type image is switched between the information for determining the first aspect and the information for determining the third aspect, and the second aspect is determined for the second type image. It is only necessary to switch between the situation where the information to be used is updated and the situation where the information to be used is fixed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably switch between these display states.

Feature C6. The information for determining the first aspect is set in chronological order with information necessary for causing the first type image to display a series of first variation modes for one round.
The simultaneous display control means is characterized in that it is possible to repeatedly display the series of first variation modes by the first type image by repeatedly using the information for determining the first mode. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C5.

According to the feature C6, by repeatedly using the information for determining the first aspect, it is possible to make the first type image repeatedly display a series of first variation modes. When the information for variable display of the first type image and the information for variable display of the second type image are integrated and set as one mode determination information, a series of first type images are set in the first type image. When one lap of the display of the variation mode is completed and the next one lap is started, the display content for one lap is also started in the second type image, unless the display content is started, the first type image is the first. It is necessary to set more information for displaying one variation mode than for one lap. In this case, the information for more than one lap is wasted. On the other hand, since the configuration of the feature C1 is provided and the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information are provided separately, it is not necessary to set such useless information.

Feature C7. The information for determining the second aspect is set in chronological order with information necessary for displaying the second type image in a series of second variation modes for one lap.
The simultaneous display control means can repeatedly display the series of second variation modes by the second type image by repeatedly using the second mode determination information.
The number of update timings of the first type image required to make the first type image display according to the first variation mode for one round, and the display according to the second variation mode on the second type image 1 The gaming machine according to feature C6, characterized in that the number of update timings of the second type image required for performing laps is different.

According to the feature C7, since the information for determining the first aspect and the information for determining the second aspect are separately provided, only the information corresponding to each one of the first variation mode and the second variation embodiment is provided. Can be set in the information for determining each mode, and there is no need to set unnecessary information.

Feature C8. The simultaneous display control means is
When the display of the first type image according to the first aspect determination information is started, the start information is set in the start information storage means (interlocking flag 125), and the first aspect determination information is followed. A means for erasing the start information from the start information storage means when the display of the first type image is finished (a function of executing the processes of steps S1103 and S1107 in the display CPU 72) and
When the start information is set in the start information storage means, a means for displaying the second type image according to the second mode determination information (a positive determination is made in step S1201 in the display CPU 72). Function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7.

According to the feature C8, the start information is set when the display of the first type image according to the information for determining the first aspect is started, and the start information is deleted when the display is finished, and the start information is started. Since the second type image is displayed according to the second aspect determination information when is set, as long as the information on the use start timing of the first aspect determination information is prepared in advance. , The second aspect determination information can be used in accordance with the use of the first aspect determination information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information on the start timing of use in a configuration in which the information for determining the first aspect and the information for determining the second aspect are separately provided.

For the configuration of any one of the features C1 to C8, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. , One or more of the features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10 may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. A display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a) and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
Drawing data is created based on setting the image data in the setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. Based on this, display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) for displaying an image on the display unit, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means is
The first setting range control means (display CPU 72) for displaying the first setting range image by setting the range set in the setting storage means in the specific image data (decoded image data 132) to the first setting range. A function for executing the processes of steps S1307 to S1309 in the above, VDP76) and
A second setting range control means for displaying a second setting range image by setting a range set in the setting storage means in the specific image data to a second setting range different from the first setting range. (A function for executing the processes of steps S1311 to S1313 in the display CPU 72, VDP76) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, the first setting range image and the first setting range image and the first setting range image are obtained by changing the range set in the setting storage means between the first setting range and the second setting range while using the same specific image data. 2 It is possible to display each of the set range images. This makes it possible to change the content of the displayed image even in a situation where there are few types of image data.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the first setting range and the second setting range partially overlap.

According to the feature D2, since the first setting range and the second setting range partially overlap, the first setting range image and the second setting range image are used while using the same specific image data. It is possible to cause a slight change in the image.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the second set range image is displayed at the update timing of the next image on which the first set range image is displayed.

According to the feature D3, the second setting range image is displayed at the update timing of the next image in which the first setting range image is displayed, so that the first setting range image and the second setting range image are displayed as a series of images. Can be used as.

Feature D4. When both the first setting range image and the second setting range image include a predetermined individual image (group display character G11) as a display target, and the predetermined individual image is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction. The first setting range image and the second setting range image are displayed in the configuration.
The display position of the predetermined individual image included in the second setting range image is moved in the predetermined direction with respect to the display position of the predetermined individual image included in the first setting range image. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the first setting range and the second setting range are set so as to correspond to a display position.

According to the feature D4, it is possible to realize the display of an image in which a predetermined individual image is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction with a small number of image data.

Feature D5. The first set range image and the second set range image are described in feature D4, which is an image in which a large number of the predetermined individual images are displayed during an effect period in which a large number of the predetermined individual images are displayed. Game machine.

According to the feature D5, since the first setting range image and the second setting range image using the same specific image data are displayed in a situation where a large number of predetermined individual images are displayed, the same specific image data is used. What you are doing becomes less noticeable.

Feature D6. The data size of the specific image data is set to be larger than the data size of the area to be displayed on the display unit in the setting storage means.
Any of the features D1 to D5, wherein the first setting range and the second setting range correspond to a range that fills the entire area to be displayed on the display unit in the setting storage means. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature D6, it is possible to make it inconspicuous that the first set range image and the second set range image are displayed by using the same specific image data.

Feature D7. The specific image data is set to any one of the features D1 to D6, which is image data created by executing a decoding process on the moving image data stored in the display storage means. The described gaming machine.

Even if the number of image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data is small with respect to the update timing of the image, the same specific image data having the configuration of the above feature D1 can be obtained. Since it is possible to display different images such as the first setting range image and the second setting range image by using it, it is possible to prevent the same image from being displayed between a plurality of update timings. ..

Feature D8. The plurality of image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data includes the specific image data and is image data for displaying a predetermined individual image so as to move in a predetermined direction. And
The feature D7, wherein the first setting range control means and the second setting range control means apply the first setting range and the second setting range to each of the plurality of image data. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature D8, the situation where the number of image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data is small with respect to the update timing of the image while using the same processing configuration is dealt with. It becomes possible to do.

Feature D9. The plurality of image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data includes the specific image data and is image data for displaying a predetermined individual image so as to move in a predetermined direction. And
The second setting range image is displayed at the update timing of the next image in which the first setting range image is displayed.
The second display position of the predetermined individual image included in the second setting range image is the predetermined individual image with respect to the first display position of the predetermined individual image included in the first setting range image. The first setting range and the second setting range are set so as to correspond to the display position moved in the direction.
In the image displayed next to the second set range image using the next-use image data to be used next to the specific image data among the plurality of image data, the display position of the predetermined individual image. Is the same as or substantially the same movement amount as the movement amount from the first display position to the second display position with respect to the display position of the predetermined individual image in the second setting range image, the predetermined individual image. The gaming machine according to feature D7 or D8, wherein is a display position moved in the predetermined direction.

According to the feature D9, even when the first set range image and the second set range image are displayed from the same specific image data, the amount of movement of a predetermined individual image in a predetermined direction between a plurality of update timings is determined. It becomes possible to make it constant.

For the configuration of any one of the features D1 to D9, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K10, or any one or more of them may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. A display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a) and
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) for displaying an image on the display unit, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means is
The first display content (size position information of band image G24 and position information of blinking image G25) of the predetermined individual image at each update timing when the predetermined individual image (valid period image G22) is to be changed and displayed according to a predetermined mode. , The first determination means (step in the display CPU 72) in which the first predetermined mode information for determining the first display content is determined by using the first predetermined mode determination information (band display table 145) set in time series. (Functions for executing the processes of S1606, step S1615, and step S1616) and
The first predetermined aspect is the second display content (type of image data for displaying the blinking image G25) of the predetermined individual image at each update timing when the predetermined individual image is to be changed and displayed according to the predetermined mode. A second determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1608 and S1613 in the display CPU 72) for determining without using the determination information, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, it is possible to independently and individually control the first display content and the second display content of the predetermined individual image when the predetermined individual image is to be displayed in a change according to a predetermined mode. As a result, when the display mode of the change display according to the predetermined mode in the predetermined individual image is diversified, the first display content and the second display content can be independently controlled individually, and the diversification is performed. It will be easier.

Feature E2. The second predetermined mode determines the second display content of the predetermined individual image at each update timing in the case where the predetermined individual image is made to display a change according to the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the information is determined by using the second predetermined mode determination information (blinking display table 146) set in time series.

According to the feature E2, the first predetermined mode determining information for determining the first display content and the second predetermined mode determining information for determining the second display content are individually provided, so that each predetermined mode is provided. While it is possible to execute display control according to the information, it is possible to independently control the first display content and the second display content.

Feature E3. The information for determining the first predetermined mode is
The first predetermined reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of first predetermined reference information for which the reference target by the first determining means is sequentially updated each time the update timing of the first display content of the predetermined individual image is reached. When,
The first predetermined mode information for determining the first display content at each update timing of the first display content of the predetermined individual image is set corresponding to each of the first predetermined reference information. Aspect information group (size information and tip position information) and
Equipped with
The information for determining the second predetermined mode is
A second predetermined reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of second predetermined reference information is set in which the reference target by the second determining means is sequentially updated each time the update timing of the second display content of the predetermined individual image is reached. When,
The second predetermined mode information for determining the second display content at each update timing of the second display content of the predetermined individual image is set corresponding to each of the second predetermined reference information. Aspect information group (image data information) and
The gaming machine according to the feature E2, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature E3, a dedicated first predetermined reference information group is set for the first predetermined mode determination information, and a dedicated second predetermined reference information group is set for the second predetermined mode determination information. There is. This makes it easy to control the update cycle of the first display content and the update cycle of the second display content individually and independently.

Feature E4. It is provided with means for changing the update cycle of one of the first display content and the second display content independently of the other update cycle (a function of executing the processes of steps S1610 and S1612 in the display CPU 72). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3.

According to the feature E4, the update cycle of one of the first display content and the second display content is changed independently of the other update cycle, so that the display mode of the change display according to the predetermined mode in the predetermined individual image is displayed. It is possible to suitably realize diversification.

Feature E5. The display control means creates drawing data by setting image data in the setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and uses the image signal corresponding to the drawing data as the display means. Based on the output, the image is displayed on the display unit, and the image is displayed.
The predetermined individual image is displayed by using the first predetermined individual image data (image data 142 for band display) and the second predetermined individual image data (image data 143 for lighting, image data 144 for extinguishing).
The first display content corresponds to the display content of an image displayed by using the first predetermined individual image data in the predetermined individual image.
The second display content corresponds to the display content of the image displayed by using the second predetermined individual image data in the predetermined individual image.
In the information for determining the first predetermined mode, when the second predetermined individual image data is set in the setting storage means, the second predetermined individual image data is set in association with the first predetermined individual image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that the information (tip position information) is set.

According to the feature E5, even if the first display content and the second display content can be controlled independently and individually, the second predetermined individual image data according to the mode associated with the first predetermined individual image data can be obtained. It is possible to easily set the setting storage means.

Feature E6. One of the first display content and the second display content is at least one of the size, shape, and color of the predetermined individual image.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the other of the first display content and the second display content is a type of image data for displaying the predetermined individual image.

According to the feature E6, it is possible to independently and individually control at least one of the size, shape, and color of the predetermined individual image and the type of image data for displaying the predetermined individual image.

For the configuration of any one of the features E1 to E6, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K10, or any one or more of them may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. A display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a) and
A display storage means (memory module 203) that stores image data in advance, and
A setting storage means (VRAM204) in which the image data is set, and
Derivation means (display CPU 201) for deriving parameter information that determines the setting mode when the image data is set in the setting storage means, and
Drawing data is created based on setting the image data in the setting storage means according to the parameter information derived by the derivation means, and the image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. Display control means (VDP205) for displaying an image on the display unit based on
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means obtains predetermined type image data (image data 241 on the backmost surface, image data 242 for the first background individual image, image data 243 for the second background individual image, image data 244 for the effect character). After displaying the predetermined type image for the front side period based on the setting in the setting storage means, the display of the predetermined type image based on setting the predetermined type image data in the setting storage means is displayed on the rear side. It is equipped with a predetermined type of control means (a function to execute a setting process for another storage display in VDP205) that is not performed over a period of time.
The parameter information derived by the derivation means for applying to the predetermined type image data in the front side period is stored in the predetermined storage area of the predetermined storage means (work RAM 202), and the predetermined storage area is the rear side period. However, the gaming machine is characterized in that it is held as an area for storing the parameter information of the predetermined type image data.

According to the feature F1, even in a situation where the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data is interrupted, the predetermined storage area in which the parameter information for applying to the predetermined type image data is stored is the said. By being retained as an area for storing the parameter information of the predetermined type image data, a new process for securing the predetermined storage area when resuming the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data is newly performed. There is no need to do it. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load when resuming the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the derivation means updates parameter information for applying to the predetermined type image data even during the latter period.

According to the feature F2, since the parameter information for applying to the predetermined type image data is updated even in the rear side period, the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data is displayed after the rear side period ends. When resuming, the predetermined type from the state when the change of the content of the predetermined type image is continued for the rear side period according to the display pattern determined in time series with respect to the display state immediately before the start of the rear side period. It is possible to resume the display of a predetermined type of image using image data.

Feature F3. The predetermined type control means is pre-created data (first separate saved image data 245, second separate saved image data 247) created based on setting the predetermined type image data in the setting storage means in the front period. ) Is used to create the drawing data in the posterior period. The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or F2.

According to the feature F3, it is possible to display a predetermined type of image even in the posterior period.

Features F4. The predetermined type control means is based on setting the pre-created data and additional image data (image data 246 for additional individual images, effect image data 248) in the setting storage means in the latter period. The gaming machine according to feature F3, which is characterized by creating drawing data.

According to the feature F4, since the additional image data is added as the image data to be used in the latter period, the display content can be made flashy. Further, in the latter period, since the predetermined type image data is not used as the image data for displaying the predetermined type image but the pre-created data is used, the additional image data is added as the image data to be used. Even so, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature F5. The posterior period occurs when a predetermined start trigger occurs in the anterior period.
The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, wherein the predetermined type control means creates the pre-created data before the predetermined start trigger can occur in the front period.

According to the feature F5, since the pre-created data is created before the situation where the predetermined start trigger can occur, the predetermined start trigger is compared with the configuration in which the pre-created data is created at the timing when the predetermined start trigger occurs. It is possible to reduce the processing load at the timing of occurrence.

Feature F6. The predetermined type control means is continued when the predetermined start trigger is not generated by the branch timing of the pre-created data created before the predetermined start trigger can occur in the front period. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the pre-created data is newly created in the front-end period.

According to the feature F6, since the pre-created data is newly created as needed, it is possible to use the pre-created data created at a timing closer to the timing when the pre-created data is actually used. Become.

Feature F7. One of the features F3 to F6, wherein the predetermined type control means creates a plurality of types of the pre-created data so that the contents of the images displayed by the pre-created data are different in the front period. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature F7, by creating a plurality of types of pre-created data, it is possible to diversify the situation in which the image is displayed by using the pre-created data.

Feature F8. At least the first pre-created data (second separate saved image data 247) and the second pre-created data (first separately saved image data 245) are created as the pre-created data.
As the posterior period, there are a first posterior period and a second posterior period that can occur after the first posterior period.
The predetermined type control means is
A first pre-creation means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3910 to S3912 in VDP205) for creating the drawing data by using the first pre-created data in the first rear period.
A second pre-creation means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3906 to S3909 in VDP205) that creates the drawing data by using the second pre-created data in the second rear period.
The gaming machine according to the feature F7, which is characterized by having.

Feature F8 makes it possible to use pre-created data suitable for each posterior period.

Features F9. The first posterior period occurs when a predetermined start trigger occurs in the anterior period.
The first pre-prepared data and the second pre-created data are created before the predetermined start trigger can occur in the front period.
The second pre-prepared means is described in feature F8, which newly creates the second pre-created data in the continued front-side period when the predetermined start trigger does not occur in the front-side period. Gaming machine.

According to the feature F9, when the first posterior period does not occur, the second pre-created data is newly created before the second posterior period occurs, so that the second pre-created data is actually created. It is possible to use the second pre-created data created at a timing closer to the timing to be used.

Feature F10. The display control means is
Arrangement means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2602 to S2604 in VDP205) for arranging object data which is three-dimensional information as the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space in the setting storage means.
A viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processes of steps S2605 to S2606 in VDP205) and
The drawing setting means (processes S2607 to S2612 in VDP205) for projecting the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and creating the drawing data based on the data projected on the projection plane. Function to execute) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9.

According to the feature F10, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as already described in the configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image.

For the configuration of any one of the features F1 to F10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K10, or any one or more of them may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each of the inventions of the feature A group to the feature F group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably performing display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A first control means (main side MPU 52) and a second control means (sound light side MPU 62, display CPU 72, VDP 76) are provided.
The first control means is
Grant determination means (a function to execute the special figure special electric control process in the main MPU 52) that determines whether or not to grant the privilege to the player, and
Information transmission means (function for executing special figure special electric control processing in the main MPU 52) for transmitting predetermined correspondence information (variation command and type command) corresponding to the result of the grant determination, and
Equipped with
The second control means is
A content determining means (a function of executing the processes of steps S404 and S406 to S408 in the sound light side MPU 62) for determining the effect content of the unit effect (effect for game rounds) corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information, and
The effect execution control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) that controls the effect execution means (symbol display device 41) so that the unit effect corresponding to the effect content determined by the content determination means is executed, and the effect execution control means (display CPU 72, VDP76).
Equipped with
As the effect content that can be determined by the content determination means based on the same type of predetermined correspondence information, the first effect content in which the duration of the effect corresponds to the first continuation period and the duration of the effect correspond to the second continuation period. A gaming machine characterized in that at least the content of the second production to be performed is included.

According to the feature G1, since the production contents having different durations of the production can be selected from the same type of predetermined correspondence information, it is possible to diversify the production contents and to determine the production contents. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in configuration.

Feature G2. The effect execution control means has the feature G1 characterized in that the unit effect is terminated when the continuation period corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information has elapsed, regardless of which effect content is determined by the content determination means. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature G2, regardless of which effect content is determined, the unit effect ends when the duration corresponding to the predetermined response information elapses, so that the duration of the effect differs from the same type of predetermined response information. Even if the effect content can be selected, the duration of the unit effect can be set to the continuation period corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information.

Feature G3. The first control means includes a duration determination means (a function of executing a special figure special electric control process in the main MPU 52) for determining the duration of the unit effect.
The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the predetermined correspondence information includes information that enables the second control means to specify the duration determined by the duration determination means.

According to the feature G3, by determining the duration of the unit effect in the first control means, even if the second control means controls the execution of the unit effect, the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to grasp the duration of the unit effect in the first control means without requiring the transmission of information to. In this case, even if the configuration of the above-mentioned feature G2 is provided so that the production contents having different durations of the production can be selected from the same type of predetermined correspondence information, the continuation period of the unit production can be selected. It is possible to have a duration determined by one control means.

Features G4. The effect content determined by the content determination means is characterized in that the duration corresponding to the effect content is equal to or less than the continuation period corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information that triggered the determination of the effect content. The gaming machine according to the feature G2 or G3.

According to the feature G4, it is possible to prevent an event that the continuation period of the unit effect elapses and the unit effect is terminated during the execution of the effect content determined by the content determination means.

Feature G5. As the unit effect, the effect execution control means causes the effect execution means to perform an effect of holding the pattern in a predetermined area and displaying it on standby after the variable display of the pattern is performed.
When the duration of the effect content determined by the content determination means is shorter than the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information, the means for extending the execution period of the standby display accordingly (step S504 in the sound / light side MPU 62). The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G4, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing).

According to the feature G5, by extending the execution period of the standby display, the difference between the continuation period of the effect content determined by the content determination means and the continuation period corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information is compensated. As a result, it is not necessary to greatly modify the effect content of the unit effect in order to compensate for the difference, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for compensating for the difference.

Feature G6. The content determining means is
A means for determining the effect content of the first effect range of the unit effects by executing the first lottery process (a function of executing the process of step S404 in the sound light side MPU 62).
A means for determining the effect content of the second effect range of the unit effects by executing the second lottery process (a function of executing the process of step S406 in the sound / light side MPU 62).
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G5, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.

According to the feature G6, the first lottery process and the second lottery process are executed to determine the effect content of the unit effect, so that the effect content of the unit effect can be irregularly determined. In this case, since the above-mentioned feature G1 configuration is provided and the production contents having different durations of the production can be selected from the same type of predetermined correspondence information, the degree of freedom in designing the first lottery process and the second lottery process is increased. Be done.

For the configuration of any one of the features G1 to G6, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K10, or any one or more of them may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the above-mentioned feature G group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably performing an effect such as a display effect, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. A display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a) and
Display control means (for measurement display in the display CPU 72) that displays and controls the display means so that the measurement result information (number display image G31) corresponding to the number of measurement targets (number of acquired game balls) is displayed on the display unit. (A function to execute the arithmetic processing of the display CPU 72, a function to execute the arithmetic processing for the increase display in the display CPU 72),
Equipped with
The display control means changes the change value of the value displayed in the measurement result information when the measurement result information is updated (step S2003, step S2007, step S2010 and step S2012 in the display CPU 72). The gaming machine is characterized by having a function of executing the process of the above, and a function of executing the process of steps S2102 to S2104 in the display CPU 72).

According to the feature H1, the measurement result information corresponding to the number of measurement targets is displayed on the display unit, so that the player can recognize the number of measurement targets. In this case, the change value of the value currently displayed in the measurement result information when the measurement result information is updated is changed. This makes it possible to diversify the mode in which the measurement result information changes.

Feature H2. The display control means starts the display of the measurement result information when the measurement start trigger occurs, and ends the display of the measurement result information at the measurement time when the measurement end trigger occurs.
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the change value changing means can change the change value within the range of one measurement.

According to the feature H2, since the change value of the measurement result information can be changed within the range of one measurement time, the mode in which the measurement result information changes within the range of one measurement time is diversified. It becomes possible.

Feature H3. The display control means starts the display of the measurement result information when the measurement start trigger occurs, and ends the display of the measurement result information at the measurement time when the measurement end trigger occurs.
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the change value changing means can change the change value between one measurement time and another measurement time.

According to the feature H3, it is possible to diversify the mode in which the measurement result information changes at each measurement time.

Features H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the change value changing means sets a value corresponding to a result obtained by dividing a value finally displayed as the measurement result information by a predetermined value as the change value.

According to the feature H4, it is possible to make the change value of the value corresponding to the measurement result information irregular according to the value finally displayed as the measurement result information.

Feature H5. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the change value changing means changes the change value according to a value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information.

According to the feature H5, the change value is changed according to the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information, so that the change value of the value of the measurement result information is related to the value to be reflected. It is possible to change it.

Feature H6. The change value changing means has one of the features H1 to H5, which is characterized in that the larger the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information, the larger the value of the change value. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature H6, the larger the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information, the larger the value of the change value, so that the reflection of the value to be reflected in the measurement result information is completed. It is possible to diversify the mode in which the measurement result information changes while shortening the time required for the process.

Feature H7. The display control means is
When the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is a value corresponding to the increase in the value to be measured, the value to be reflected is divided into a plurality of update timings and displayed in the measurement result information. A first reflection means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2005 to S2013 in the display CPU 72) to be reflected in the set value, and
When the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is a value corresponding to the decrease in the value to be measured, the value to be reflected is displayed in the measurement result information at one update timing. A second reflecting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2003 and S2004 in the display CPU 72) to be reflected in the existing value, and
Equipped with
When the value to be reflected by the first reflecting means is divided into a plurality of update timings and reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information, the change value changing means is said to be said at each update timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, wherein the change value can be changed.

According to the feature H7, when the value of the measurement target increases, it is possible to emphasize that the value of the measurement target is increasing by reflecting the value to be reflected in multiple update timings. Therefore, when the value of the measurement target decreases, the value to be reflected is reflected at one update timing, so that the decrease of the value of the measurement target can be made inconspicuous. In this case, if the value of the measurement target increases, the change value at each update timing can be changed, so the measurement result information changes in the situation where it is emphasized that the value of the measurement target is increasing. It is possible to diversify various aspects.

Feature H8. The measurement target is any one of the features H1 to H7, which is a difference between an increase in the number of gaming media that can be used by the player and a decrease in the number of gaming media that can be used by the player. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature H8, when the difference between the increase and the decrease in the number of game media that can be used by the player is displayed as the measurement result information, the mode in which the measurement result information changes is diversified. Is possible.

For the configuration of any one of the features H1 to H8, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K10, or any one or more of them may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the above-mentioned feature H group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably performing display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic I group>
Features I1. The effect execution means (design display device 41) for executing the effect, and
The effect control means (sound / light side MPU62, display CPU201, VDP205) that controls the effect execution means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The effect control means is a time-compatible control means (sound-light side) that starts a special effect (effect of a special period) by the effect execution means when the start condition is satisfied when the predetermined start response time is reached. A gaming machine comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S3010 and S3011 in the MPU 62).

According to the feature I1, the special effect is started when the predetermined start response time is reached, so that the effect can be performed when the predetermined time is reached. Further, for example, it is possible to simultaneously start the same effect on a plurality of gaming machines installed in a gaming hall. In addition, it is not preferable to start the special effect from the viewpoint of processing load and facilitating understanding of the game content by starting the special effect when the start condition is satisfied even when the start response time is reached. It is possible to prevent the special production from being started in the situation.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the time-corresponding control means starts the special effect after the preparation period has elapsed when the start-corresponding time is reached.

According to the feature I2, when the start corresponding time is reached, the special effect is started after the preparation period has elapsed, so that the start time of the special effect can be set to a predetermined time. In addition, it is possible to distribute and execute the processing necessary for executing the special effect during the preparation period, and it is possible to distribute the processing load.

Feature I3. The effect control means is an arbitrary response control means (step S3208 in the sound light side MPU 62) that causes the effect execution means to execute an arbitrary response effect (effect for game rounds) when an arbitrary trigger that occurs at an arbitrary timing occurs. -A function to execute the process of step S3213) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein the preparation period is set as a period equal to or longer than the maximum execution period of the execution periods of the voluntary response effects.

According to the feature I3, since the preparation period is set as a period equal to or longer than the maximum execution period of the voluntary response effect, the special effect is started even if the start response time is reached in the situation where the voluntary response effect is being executed. The voluntary response effect during the execution will end before the timing to make it happen. This makes it possible to limit the execution status of the arbitrary response effect when the special effect is started to a predetermined situation, and the occurrence of an event that the processing load at the timing when the special effect is started becomes extremely high occurs. It will be possible to prevent it.

Feature I4. The effect control means is an arbitrary response control means (step S3208 in the sound light side MPU 62) that causes the effect execution means to execute an arbitrary response effect (effect for game rounds) when an arbitrary trigger that occurs at an arbitrary timing occurs. -A function to execute the process of step S3213) is provided.
When the voluntary response control means starts the voluntary response effect after the start response time is reached and before the start condition is satisfied, the voluntary response control means limits the effect content of the voluntary response effect to a predetermined effect content. The gaming machine according to the feature I3.

According to the feature I4, it is possible to limit the effect content of the voluntary effect when the special effect is started to a predetermined effect content. As a result, the processing load at the timing when the special effect is started becomes extremely high while it is possible to start the arbitrary response effect after the start response time has come and before the special effect is started. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of.

Feature I5. The effect control means is a preparation support control means (sound light) that causes the effect execution means to execute a preparation response effect (effect of a preparation period) until the start condition is satisfied even when the start response time is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, which comprises a function of executing the processing of step S2806, step S2807, step S3006, and step S3007 in the side MPU 62.

According to the feature I5, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special effect will be executed from now on by executing the preparatory effect.

Feature I6. The preparation response control means according to feature I5, wherein if the restriction condition is satisfied when the start response time is reached, the preparation response control means does not start the preparation response effect until the restriction condition is released. Gaming machine.

According to the feature I6, when the restriction condition is satisfied, the preparation response effect is not started even if the start response time is reached, so that the preparation response effect is started in an unfavorable situation from the viewpoint of processing load and the like. It is possible to prevent it from being stowed.

Feature I7. The gaming machine according to feature I6, wherein the preparatory control means is such that when the restriction condition is satisfied, the notification corresponding to the restriction condition (display of the remaining time notification image G63) is executed.

According to the feature I7, it is possible to make the player recognize that the preparation response effect and the special effect will be executed from now on even in the situation where the restriction condition is satisfied.

Feature I8. The effect control means is an arbitrary response control means (step S3208 in the sound light side MPU 62) that causes the effect execution means to execute an arbitrary response effect (effect for game rounds) when an arbitrary trigger that occurs at an arbitrary timing occurs. -A function to execute the process of step S3213) is provided.
When the start response time is reached in the situation where the voluntary response effect is being executed, the preparation response control means assumes that the restriction condition is satisfied, and performs the preparation response effect until the voluntary response effect is completed. The gaming machine according to feature I6 or I7, characterized in that it is not started.

According to the feature I8, it is possible to prevent the preparation response effect from being started during the execution of the voluntary response effect. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the processing load at the timing when the preparation response effect is started becomes extremely high.

Feature I9. The effect executing means is a display means having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a).
When the preparatory effect and another effect (effect for playing a game) are executed at the same time, the preparatory effect is executed in a part of the display unit, and the other area (section display) of the display unit is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I5 to I8, wherein the other effect is executed in the area G66).

According to the feature I9, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize each of the preparatory production and the other production.

Feature I10. The preparation response control means is characterized in that, as the preparation response effect, the effect execution means notifies the remaining time information (remaining time notification image G63) corresponding to the remaining time until the special effect is started. The gaming machine according to any one of I5 to I9.

According to the feature I10, the player can recognize that the start of the special effect is approaching by confirming the remaining time information.

Feature I11. The preparation response control means is
Regardless of the timing at which the preparation response effect is started, the display is started from the information of the predetermined initial value as the remaining time information, and the remaining time information is updated until the information of the predetermined end value is reached. (A function to execute the process of step S3404 in the display CPU 201) and
A means for changing the one-time update value of the remaining time information according to the timing at which the preparation response effect is started (a function of executing the processes of steps S3402 and S3403 in the display CPU 201).
The gaming machine according to feature I10, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the feature I11, it is possible to diversify the update mode of the remaining time information in relation to the timing at which the preparation response effect is started.

Feature I12. When the start corresponding time or later is a predetermined time before the start condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect execution means (display light emitting unit 44, speaker unit 45) different from the effect execution means is used. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I11, which comprises means for initiating the effect (a function of executing the process of step S2801 in the sound light side MPU 62).

According to the feature I12, it is possible to surely start a predetermined effect when the start corresponding time is reached. As a result, for example, regardless of the effect execution status of the effect execution means in the plurality of game machines installed in the game hall, it is possible to start a predetermined effect all at once in the plurality of game machines.

For the configuration of any one of the features I1 to I12, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K10, or any one or more of them may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the above-mentioned feature I group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry section provided in the game area, and a variable display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. When the winning result is obtained, the combination of specific patterns and the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, it is necessary to provide a novel game content in a gaming machine such as the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. A display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a) and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
Drawing data is created based on setting the image data in the setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. Based on this, display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) for displaying an image on the display unit, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means is
A specific individual image (first pseudo moving image character G42, second pseudo moving image character G43, pseudo) using the first still image data (first character image data 171) stored in advance in the display storage means. A function of executing the processing of steps S2204 to S2207 in the display CPU 72 for displaying the first frame image (first character image G41, first pseudo-moving image G52) including the moving image character G51). )When,
A second frame image (second character image G48, second pseudo) including the specific individual image using the second still image data (second character image data 173) stored in advance in the display storage means. A second frame control means for displaying the moving image G53) (a function of executing the processes of steps S2217 to S2220 in the display CPU 72) and
Mid-image data (effect) stored in advance in the display storage means at the update timing of the image after the first frame image is displayed and before the second frame image is displayed. Using the image data 172), the process of the intermediate control means (processes S2211 to S2214 in the display CPU 72) for displaying the intermediate image (effect image G45, effect image G54 for pseudo moving image) that does not include the specific individual image is executed. Function to do) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J1, a specific individual image is set between the update timing in which the first frame image including the specific individual image is displayed and the update timing in which the second frame image including the specific individual image is displayed. An image that is not included is displayed. As a result, even in a situation where there is not enough image data for the player to recognize that the moving image of the specific individual image is being displayed, the specific individual image is intervened by interposing the intermediate image. It is possible to make the player recognize that the moving image is displayed.

Feature J2. The first frame control means is characterized in that the first frame image is displayed in a different display mode at a plurality of update timings by changing the setting mode of the first still image data in the setting storage means. The gaming machine according to the feature J1 ,.

According to the feature J2, by using the first still image data, it is possible to generate a situation in which the display mode is changed at a plurality of update timings while displaying a specific individual image.

Feature J3. The second frame control means is characterized in that the second frame image is displayed in a different display mode at a plurality of update timings by changing the setting mode of the second still image data in the setting storage means. The gaming machine according to the feature J1 or J2.

According to the feature J3, by using the second still image data, it is possible to generate a situation in which the display mode is changed at a plurality of update timings while displaying a specific individual image.

Features J4. In the specific effect period, the intermediate image is displayed next to the first frame image, and the second frame image is displayed next to the intermediate image.
The first still image data is used in a first period different from the specific effect period, and is used.
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the second still image data is used in the specific effect period and a second period different from the first period.

According to the feature J4, an effect of displaying a specific individual image in a specific effect period is executed by using the first still image data used in the first period and the second still image data used in the second period. To. As a result, the still image data can be used in a plurality of situations, and the storage capacity required for the display storage means can be suppressed. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above feature J1, even if the configuration uses the first still image data and the second still image data as such, a moving image of a specific individual image in a specific effect period is provided. It is possible to make the player recognize that the display is performed.

Feature J5. The predetermined part of the specific individual image displayed in the second frame image has a predetermined operation path with respect to the predetermined part (predetermined part G51a) of the specific individual image displayed in the first frame image. The first still image data and the second still image data are set so as to be displayed at the position on the front side of the above.
The intermediate individual image (individual image G54a) displayed in the intermediate image is described in any one of features J1 to J4, wherein the intermediate image data is set so as to be displaced according to the predetermined operation path. Game machine.

According to the feature J5, the first still image is displayed so that the intermediate individual image is displaced according to the operation path of the predetermined portion in the specific individual image by the first still image data and the second still image data. Even if the display position of the predetermined part in the specific individual image based on the image data and the display position of the predetermined part in the specific individual image based on the second still image data are separated, the predetermined part is displaced according to the predetermined operation path. It is possible to give the player the impression that he / she is doing it.

Features J6. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, wherein the first frame image and the second frame image are live-action images, and the intermediate image is a non-live-action image.

According to feature J6, it is possible to give the player the impression that a moving image of a specific individual image is being displayed by using a non-live-action image even in a situation where there are few types of live-action images. Become.

For the configuration of any one of the features J1 to J6, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K10, or any one or more of them may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. A display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a) and
A display storage means (memory module 203) that stores image data in advance, and
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP205) for displaying an image on the display unit using image data stored in the display storage means, and
Equipped with
The display storage means is
The first moving image data (A-angle first moving image data group 261) that makes it possible to display a series of specific moving images by using the image data created by executing the decoding process, and
The second moving image data (A angle) that makes it possible to display the specified intermediate moving image started from the intermediate timing of the specific moving image by using the image data created by executing the decoding process. 2nd video data group 262) and
A gaming machine characterized by memorizing in advance.

According to the feature K1, not only the first moving image data but also the second moving image data is provided, so that the first moving image data and the second moving image can be used according to the timing when the display start trigger occurs. It is possible to select any of the data. As a result, the display of the specific moving image can be started from the beginning of the specific moving image and the display of the specific moving image can be started from the middle of the specific moving image only by switching the moving image data to be used.

Feature K2. The first moving image data has a plurality of first unit moving image data (moving image data 271a) having different display periods corresponding to the specific moving images.
The second moving image data has a plurality of second unit moving image data (moving image data 271b) having different display periods corresponding to each of the specified intermediate moving images.
Each of the second unit moving image data is a moving image started from the middle timing of the moving image displayed by using the first unit moving image data in the corresponding order in the plurality of first unit moving image data. The gaming machine according to feature K1, which is characterized in that it is set as data to be displayed.

According to the feature K2, it is possible to set many timings that enable the specific moving image to be started from the middle, and it becomes easy to start the specific moving image from the display content corresponding to the occurrence timing of the display start trigger.

Feature K3. In the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data in the corresponding order, the start timing of the moving image displayed by using the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data are set. The amount of deviation in the image update timing from the start timing of the moving image displayed by use is the same in each of the combination of the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data in the corresponding order. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to feature K2, which is characterized by being substantially the same.

According to the feature K3, it is easy to design the timing at which the display of the moving image by the first unit moving image data can be started and the timing at which the display of the moving image by the second unit moving image data can be started. Will be.

Features K4. The first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data are data in which the number of image data created by executing the decoding process is the minimum number that can be set as moving image data. Characteristic Feature The gaming machine according to feature K2 or K3.

According to the feature K4, it is possible to set many timings at which the display of the moving image based on the first moving image data can be switched and the timing at which the display of the moving image based on the second moving image data can be switched. In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of moving image data to be read at one time.

Feature K5. When the player performs a predetermined operation at a timing prior to the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image, the display control means starts displaying the specific moving image using the first moving image data. When the predetermined operation is performed at a timing after the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image, the target switching means (step in the display CPU 201) for starting the display of the specified intermediate moving image using the second moving image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing the processes of S4105-step S4117).

According to the feature K5, even if the predetermined operation by the player occurs at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to start the display of the specific moving image from the situation corresponding to the occurrence timing of the predetermined operation.

Features K6. The target switching means is a case where the predetermined operation is performed at a timing after the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image and before the timing corresponding to the timing corresponding to the start of the specified intermediate moving image. However, when the predetermined operation is performed after the timing required for starting the use of the second moving image data with respect to the timing corresponding to the start, the second moving image data The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein the display of the specified intermediate moving image using the above-mentioned is not started.

According to the feature K6, it is possible to start the display of the specific moving image from the situation corresponding to the occurrence timing of the predetermined operation within the range that enables the smooth start of the use of the second moving image data.

Feature K7. The display control means is a target switching means (in the display CPU 201) for switching to a situation in which another moving image is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed by a player in a situation in which one of a plurality of types of moving images is displayed. A function for executing the processes of steps S4105 to S4117) is provided.
The combination of the first moving image data and the second moving image data is provided as moving image data for displaying the first moving image among the plurality of types of moving images.
The display storage means is
The third moving image data (the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle) that makes it possible to display a series of predetermined moving images by using the image data created by executing the decoding process, and
The fourth moving image data (B angle) that makes it possible to display a predetermined intermediate moving image started from a timing in the middle of the predetermined moving image by using the image data created by executing the decoding process. 2nd video data group 265) and
Is memorized in advance,
The features K1 to K6, wherein the combination of the third moving image data and the fourth moving image data is provided as moving image data for displaying the second moving image among the plurality of types of moving images. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature K7, it is possible to set many timings at which the moving image to be displayed can be switched between the first moving image and the second moving image.

Features K8. The first moving image data and the third moving image data have the same timing at which the start image can be displayed in a predetermined effect period.
The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the second moving image data and the fourth moving image data coincide with each other at the timing at which the start image can be displayed in the predetermined effect period.

According to the feature K8, when one of the first moving image and the second moving image is switched to the other, it is possible to start the display of the switching destination moving image from the display content corresponding to the display content of the switching source.

Features K9. The gaming machine according to feature K7 or K8, wherein the first moving image and the second moving image are moving images having different angles for displaying special individual images.

According to the feature K9, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the display target is switched between a plurality of moving images having different viewing angles of the special individual image.

Features K10. A display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a) and
A display storage means (memory module 203) that stores image data in advance, and
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP205) for displaying an image on the display unit using image data stored in the display storage means, and
Equipped with
The display storage means uses predetermined moving image data (various moving image data groups 261 to 269) capable of displaying a series of special moving images by using the image data created by executing the decoding process. ) Is memorized in advance,
The predetermined moving image data has a plurality of special unit moving image data (moving image data 271a to 273c) having different display periods corresponding to the special moving images.
The special unit moving image data is a gaming machine characterized in that the number of image data created by executing the decoding process is the minimum number that can be set as moving image data.

According to the feature K10, it is possible to set many timings at which it is possible to switch to the display of moving images based on predetermined moving image data. In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of moving image data to be read at one time.

For the configuration of any one of the features K1 to K10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I12, Features J1 to J6, Features K1 to K10, or any one or more of them may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The inventions of the feature J group and the feature K group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably performing display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 41 ... Design display device, 41a ... Liquid crystal display unit, 44 ... Display light emitting unit, 45 ... Speaker unit, 52 ... Main side MPU, 62 ... Sound light side MPU, 72 ... Display CPU, 74 ... Memory module , 76 ... VDP, 82a ... 1st frame area, 82b ... 2nd frame area, 122 ... character retention table, 123 ... character movement table, 124 ... background table, 125 ... interlocking flag, 132 ... decoded image data , 142 ... band display image data, 143 ... lighting image data, 144 ... extinguishing image data, 145 ... band display table, 146 ... blinking display table, 171 ... first character image data, 172 ... effect image Data, 173 ... Image data for the second character, 201 ... Display CPU, 202 ... Work RAM, 203 ... Memory module, 204 ... VRAM, 205 ... VDP, 211 ... VRAM, 211a ... Texture area, 211b ... Video data area , 241 ... Rearmost image data, 242 ... Image data for the first background individual image, 243 ... Image data for the second background individual image, 244 ... Image data for the effect character, 245 ... First separate saved image data , 246 ... Image data for additional individual images, 247 ... Second separate saved image data, 248 ... Effect image data, 261 to 269 ... Movie data group, 271a to 273c ... Moving image data, 282 ... Special moving image data, 284 ... Still image data, G4 ... Loop display character, G5 ... Loop display background, G11 ... Group display character, G22 ... Validity period image, G24 ... Band image, G25 ... Flashing image, G31 ... Number display image, G41 ... 1st character image, G42 ... 1st pseudo video character, G43 ... 2nd pseudo video character, G45 ... effect image, G48 ... 2nd character image, G51 ... pseudo video character, G51a ... predetermined part, G52 ... 1st pseudo video image, G53 ... 2nd pseudo video image, G54 ... Pseudo video effect image, G54a ... Individual image, G63 ... Remaining time notification image, G66 ... Section display area, T10 ... Execution for acceleration period Target table, T11 ... Execution target table for the first high-speed period, T12 ... Execution target table for the first low-speed period.

Claims (1)

A display means having a display unit and
A display storage means that stores image data in advance,
A display control means for displaying an image on the display unit using image data stored in the display storage means, and a display control means.
Equipped with
The special moving image data in which one type of image data is created by executing the decoding process is stored in the display storage means.
The gaming machine includes a reading storage means for storing the one type of image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data.
The display control means uses the one type of image data stored in the read storage means as texture data to display an image on the display unit.
The special moving image data includes reference data that serves as a reference when the image data is created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data, and the reference when the decoding process is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it does not include diff data for providing diffs to the data .

Images